DT9 Manual PDF

Product User Manual
for the
DT_9 Microprocessor Control

and Variable Frequency Drive
Feeder Conversion
for
TENUGHAT VIDYUT NIGAM LIMITED
Customer: Apex Industrials

Purchase Order No.: AI/3133/13
Stock Redler India Private Limited Job No: 12720000
Stock Redler India Private Limited WBS No: VK/9113000317
Revision 0 - November 2013
Stock Redler India Private Limited. # 3(Old No. 18 & 23), 3rd Main, 1st Phase, Peenya Indusrial Area, Bangalore 560058, INDIA.
(080) 30403705/706/707
Telefax (080) 30403708
DT_9 Microprocessor Control and Variable Frequency Drive Feeder Conversion
For
TENUGHAT VIDYUT NIGAM LIMITED (2 X 210 MW- Unit-2)
OWNER:
TENUGHAT VIDYUT NIGAM LIMITED
CUSTOMER:
Apex Industrials
(A Govt. of Jharkhand undertaking)
MANUFACTURER:
STOCK REDLER INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED
P.O NO. : AI/3133/13
SRIPL JOB NO.: 1272
O & M MANUAL
DOCUMENT TITLE:
SRIPLs Document No. 1272-0000
PREPARED & CHECKED

NAME
Mechanical
Electrical
SIGN
DATE
REV: 0
REVIEWED (QA & QC)

NAME
SIGN
DATE
REVIEWED (Service)
NAME
SIGN
DATE
APPROVED
NAME
SIGN
DATE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1.0 Installation
Stock Redler India Private Limited
How to Use this Manual

This equipment manual is divided into sections which separate the material according to its principal use at
the site.
Section 1.0, for use by the equipment installers, covers receiving inspection, storage instructions, storage
maintenance procedures required, if any, and equipment installation procedures.
Section 2.0, oriented to the operations personnel, contains a system component description of the major
items of equipment supplied, an initial start-up sequence, and procedures for typical operation. The
maintenance staff, contains an inspection schedule, lubrication information, adjustment and calibration
procedures, and any necessary troubleshooting guides.
Sections 3.0 through 5.0 contain the schematic and connection diagrams, assembly drawings, and parts
lists. For ease in locating specific drawings, as well as to bring together all drawings of a similar nature,
Section 3.0 contains all the drawings certified for the specific project; Section 4.0 contains all mechanical
drawings; and Section 5.0 contains electrical and electronics drawings. The drawings within each section
are arranged in the section index in alphanumerical order except that supportive drawings, such as parts
lists and schematics, are indented and listed immediately beneath the related assembly drawing. To the left
of the drawing titles, the Stock Equipment Company part numbers are listed to specify the particular
assembly supplied from a tabulated drawing. The drawings themselves are then arranged exclusively in
alphanumeric order following the section index.
Section 6.0 contains vendor bulletins with specific adjustment, calibration, or service information.
Section 7.0 and following are included when necessary to present optional equipment supplied and
recommended spare parts. These sections are self-contained and are each arranged according to the
organizing principles employed in Sections 1.0 and 2.0 above, with a section index followed by the
operation and maintenance text and relevant drawings.
To keep the manual current, revision packages may be supplied for it as necessary. A Record Of Changes
form is provided in front of Section 1.0 to record these revisions as they are received and processed. It is
recommended that the instruction sheet from each revision package be filed behind the record of changes
for future reference.
Note
The drawings and parts lists incorporated in this manual are correct for the
equipment supplied. The title block descriptive information may not always agree
with the information provided in the original proposal or contract, but the drawing
contents are correct for the equipment supplied.
Note
This equipment manual is designed to supplement, not replace, the original
equipment manual supplied with the feeder. It deals only with additional
considerations pertaining to the weighing system electronics and feeder
microprocessor controls.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
INTRODUCTION
Proprietary Note
The information in this manual, including technical data and copies of drawings,
embodies information proprietary to Stock Equipment Company. This manual is
provided to the user of equipment purchased from Stock Equipment Company for
use only in operation or maintenance of such equipment. Such information in this
manual is not to be used, disclosed, copied, reproduced in whole or part for any use
other than that indicated above, or for any other purpose detrimental to the interests
of Stock Equipment Company. Patents owned by Stock Equipment Company have
been issued or are pending on some of the information in this manual. Any
unauthorized use of this subject matter of such patents is a violation of such patents
and is prohibited by law.
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices

Caution
The electronic controls contain ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and
assemblies that can be damaged by static electricity. The following static control
precautions are required when testing, servicing, or repairing the
electronic assemblies.
1.
Disconnect power at the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
2.
Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
3.
Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis.
4.
When replacing the electronic circuit board, do not remove the board from the static shielding bag
it came in until you are ready to install the board.
5.
When removing any electronic circuit board, immediately place it in a static shielding bag.
6.
Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory
for repair since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
Note
If you are not familiar with static control procedures, before replacing electronic
components, refer to US Department of Defense DOD HDBK-263, Electrostatic
Discharge Control Handbook for protection of electronic parts, assemblies,
and equipment.
7.
Contact Stock Equipment Companys Parts Department for a returns good authorization number
to facilitate the return of an electronic circuit board. Boards should be shipped in static shielding type
bags. If packing materials are used, they should be static-dissipative material.
November 2013
1.0 Installation
Table of Contents
PRODUCT USER MANUAL FOR THE DT_9 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL
AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE FEEDER CONVERSION
Manual Content
Section 1.0
Installation
Section 2.0
DT_9 Operation & Maintenance
Section 3.0
Certified Drawings
Section 4.0
Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists
Section 5.0
Electrical/Electronic Drawings and Parts Lists
Section 6.0
Vendor Information
Section 7.0
Recommended Spare Parts
November 2013
INTRODUCTION
Notice
Revised reference material, written text and drawings may be furnished as required
to update the information contained within this manual. When revisions to the
content of this manual are submitted, utilize the Record of Changes form provided
to record all revisions. Specific instructions may be provided in the Revision Packet
for recording and inserting all changes affecting this manual.
Record of Changes
Change
Number
Date
Entered
Description of Changes
Signature
November 2013
1.0 Installation
1.0 Installation
Section Index
Topic
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
RECEIVING INSPECTION
STORAGE PROCEDURES
SCOPE OF CONVERSION
DT_9 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL CABINET INSTALLATION
VFD CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION
November 2013
1-1
2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance
1.1
RECEIVING INSPECTION
Upon delivery, inspect the equipment for shortages or evidence of physical damage and make a report to the
independent carrier. Also, notify the Contracts Department of Stock Redler India Pvt. Ltd., to arrange for
the shipment of replacement parts.
1.2
STORAGE PROCEDURES
Prior to shipment from the factory, provisions have been made to protect the equipment in the event that
prolonged storage is required at the job site. These storage procedures are provided as recommendationsto
aid in maintaining the equipment in a warrantable and ready condition.
1.2.1 Storage areas shall be periodically inspected to ensure cleanliness. Discarded packaging and trash
shall be removed. Access shall be limited to authorized personnel. Upon placing an item in storage and prior
to its removal, the packaging and protective covers should be visually inspected to
ensure that all closures are intact. Any defects in the packaging may be repaired, after insuring that the
packaged material is intact and undamaged, using the original method of packaging. Surface preservatives
may be reapplied or touched up as required.
1.2.2 Equipment is to be stored in such a manner as to provide ready access for inspection and
maintenance with a minimum of handling. Items should be positioned so that any markings or labelings can
be easily identified without excessive handling. Shipping documents are attached to the outside of each crate
to identify the equipment contained inside.
1.2.3 All feeders with electronic enclosures mounted to them must be stored in a heated, ventilated
building where ambient temperatures may be controlled between 5C minimum and 50C maximum.
Control enclosure access doors must be tightly closed to engage the sealing gaskets.
1.3
SCOPE OF CONVERSION
1.3.1
The conversion consists of the following:

a.
S11154
Remote Power Cabinet With DT_9 Microprocessor assembly
b.
S11160
Feeder Integral Cabinet Assembly
c.
D43566
VFD Motor 7.5HP Upgrade Kit with Dual Tacho
d.
Motor , Loadcell And Calibration Field Cable
Note
System installation, schematic, and connection drawings are provided in Section
3.0, Certified Drawings. Assembly drawings and parts lists are provided in Section
4.0, Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists and Section 5 .0, Electrical/Electronic
Drawings and Parts Lists.
1-2
November 2013
1.0 Installation
Important
Before performing any work inside the feeder, de-energize the feeder by locking the
main circuit breaker or disconnect switch in the OFF position.
Important
Safety considerations require that electrical apparatus and enclosures be solidly
connected to safety ground.
1.4
DT_9 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL CABINET INSTALLATION

Note
System installation, schematic, and connection drawings are provided in Section
3.0, Certified Drawings. Assembly drawings and parts lists are provided in Section
4.0, Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists and Section 5.0, Electrical/Electronic
1.4.1
Close the inlet valve above the feeder and empty the belt.
1.4.2
De-energize the feeder and close the seal air supply if the feeder is so equipped.
1.4.3
If provided, close the feeder discharge valve.
1.4.4
Open all feeder side and end access doors.
1.4.5
Refer to Drawing S11154 and the drawings in Section 3.0, Certified Drawings. Mount the DT_9
microprocessor cabinet assembly onto the feeder by following the instructions provided on
the drawings.
Important
Do not energize the feeder or the power to the control cabinets until a Stock service
engineer is present. If a service engineer is not present when the feeder or the power
to the control cabinets are energized, damage to the equipment, injury or loss of life
may occur.
November 2013
1-3
Note
Electrical control enclosures must be latched and sealed at all times unless
immediate access to them is required, both as a safety measure and to prevent
moisture damage to components.
1.5
1.6
VFD CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION

1.5.1
Refer to Drawing D43566. Install the VFD conversion kit by following the instructions provided on
the drawing.
1.5.2
Refer to Section 2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance for information on programming and
calibration.
ELECTRICAL CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION

Caution
The electronic controls contain ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and
assemblies that can be damaged by static electricity. The following static control
precautions are required when testing, servicing, or repairing the
electronic assemblies.
Disconnect power at the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis
When replacing the electronic circuit board, do not remove the board from the static shielding bag it came in
until you are ready to install the board
Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory for repair
since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
Note
Electrical control enclosures must be latched and sealed at all times unless
immediate access to them is required, both as a safety measure and to prevent
moisture damage to components.
1-4
November 2013
1.0 Installation
Note
Before installing electronics cards, all field wiring for the feeder control system must
be checked and verified. Improper wiring may result in severe damage to the
electronics cards when power is applied.
1.6.1
Refer the drawings in Section 3.0, Certified Drawings and Section 5.0, Electrical/Electronic
1.6.2
Remove the new electronics cards from their individual packages and install them into the
microprocessor assembly by following the instructions provided on the drawings.
1.6.3
Refer to Section 2.0, D T _ 9 Operation and Maintenance for programming and

calibration information.
November 2013
1-5
1-6
November 2013
2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintaenance
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF

Instruction Manual
BV-H6411 GB
November 2013
PASS - A service you can count on. Fast, comprehensive and anywhere in the world.
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support across the entire life cycle of our products.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever
and wherever you need us.
During business hours, our service specialists from all business areas are ready to analyze problems and
find the reasons for failures. You can find the Schenck Process location nearest to you on our website
www.schenckprocess.com.
Are you looking for individual and tailor-made service solutions? Then our modular PASS service system is
just right for you. It includes the entire range of services from simple inspections all the way down to a complete service program. Further information can be found at www.schenckprocess.com.
Service:
Quality and reliability form the basis for our corporate philosophy all over the world.
In House Support (Monday through Friday from at least 8 oclock to 5 p.m. CST). Service specialists are
available for technical assistance to answer your questions or assist you in trouble shooting.
STOCK EQUIPMENT COMPANY
16490 Chillicothe Rd.
Chagrin Falls, OH 44023 , USA
Phone: +1 440-543-6000
Fax: +1 440-543-6839
e-mail address: sales@stockequipment.com
24 hour Emergency Support

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? You can reach our service technician at any time outside of our office hours for after hour emergency support.
Phone: +1 800-628-3347 (Please listen closely to menu for after hours support.)
by STOCK EQUIPMENT COMPANY
A subsidiary of Schenck Process Group, Germany (www.schenckprocess.com)
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation, regardless of method, without prior permission
by STOCK EQUIPMENT in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited. Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: The original manual is in English
(origin: 9007199363029899 V2)
1-8
November 2013
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1
About This Manual ...................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Safety notes................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1
Signal Words ................................................................................................................................................5
2.1.1
Signal Words for Safety Warnings .......................................................................................................5
2.1.2
Signal Words for Application Notes .....................................................................................................6
2.2
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering .................................................................................................6
2.3
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ...............................................................................................7
3 Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1
What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-9? .......................................................................................................9
3.2
Definitions ...................................................................................................................................................10
3.3
Measuring Principle ....................................................................................................................................10
3.4
Operating Modes - Remote ........................................................................................................................12
3.4.1
Gravimetric .........................................................................................................................................12
3.4.2
Volumetric ..........................................................................................................................................12
3.4.3
Volumetric Control..............................................................................................................................12
3.5
Operating Modes OFF/Maintenance .......................................................................................................12
4 DT-9 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 15
4.1
Setup Notes ...............................................................................................................................................15
4.2
Startup and Functional Check ....................................................................................................................16
4.3
Setup Parameters ......................................................................................................................................17
4.3.1
Commonly Changed Parameters.......................................................................................................17
4.4
Calibration ..................................................................................................................................................20
4.4.1
Performing Calibrations......................................................................................................................20
4.4.2
Weigh Roller Adjustment ...................................................................................................................21
4.4.3
Basic (CAL 1) ....................................................................................................................................22
4.4.4
Span (CAL 2) ....................................................................................................................................23
4.4.5
TC: Span Calibration .........................................................................................................................25
4.4.6
LB: Pulses per Belt ............................................................................................................................26
4.4.7
TA: Tare .............................................................................................................................................26
4.5
Analog Trim Function .................................................................................................................................27
4.6
Belt Monitoring............................................................................................................................................28
4.6.1
Belt Drift Monitoring............................................................................................................................28
4.6.2
Belt Influence Compensation (BIC)....................................................................................................30
4.6.3
Belt Slippage Monitoring ....................................................................................................................30
4.6.3.1 Monitoring Standstill after Startup ......................................................................................................30
4.6.3.2 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking .........................................................................................................30
4.6.3.3 Two-Sensor Belt Slippage Monitoring................................................................................................31
5 Operating and Control Access .................................................................................................................. 33
5.1
Connection between a VHM Operating Panel and a Scales Controller (VCU) ..........................................33
5.1.1
Connection via Ethernet Cable ..........................................................................................................34
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-i-
Table of Contents
5.1.2
Connection via Bluetooth ...................................................................................................................34
5.1.3
Connection via RS485 .......................................................................................................................34
5.2
Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU) ................................................................35
5.2.1
Connection via Ethernet .....................................................................................................................35
5.2.2
Connection via RS-232 ......................................................................................................................35
5.2.3
Connection via WLAN ........................................................................................................................35
5.2.4
Connection via Bluetooth ...................................................................................................................36
5.3
Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller ..........................................................36
5.4
Web Server in the Scales Controller VCU..................................................................................................37
6 Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI .................................................................................................... 39
6.1
Initial Configuration ....................................................................................................................................39
6.1.1
The 'Network' Screen ........................................................................................................................39
6.1.2
The 'Display Settings' Screen ...........................................................................................................40
6.1.3
The 'Feeder' Screen ..........................................................................................................................40
6.1.4
The 'Configuration' Screen ................................................................................................................40
6.1.5
The 'Communication' Screen ............................................................................................................40
6.1.6
The 'Calibration' Screen ....................................................................................................................40
6.1.7
Exiting HMI Configuration .................................................................................................................40
6.2
Display Functions ......................................................................................................................................40
6.2.1
The 'Home' Screen ............................................................................................................................40
6.2.1.1 Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode ...................................................................................41
6.2.1.2 Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode .................................................................................................41
6.2.2
The 'Trend' Screen ............................................................................................................................41
6.2.3
The 'Values' Screen ..........................................................................................................................41
6.2.4
The 'Setup' Screen ............................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.1 Data Log Values.................................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.2 Event Log Values ..............................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.3 Parameter Log Values ......................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.4 Parameter Setup ...............................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.5 Trimming the Analog Inputs and Outputs .........................................................................................43
6.2.4.6 Restoring the Factory Default Settings .............................................................................................44
6.2.4.7 Simulation Mode ...............................................................................................................................44
6.2.4.8 Calibrating the Feeder .......................................................................................................................44
6.2.4.9 Setting the Current Time and Date ...................................................................................................45
6.3
Typical Operating Procedures ...................................................................................................................45
7
Operation Using the 196NT Display .......................................................................................................... 47
8 Operation Using EasyServe ...................................................................................................................... 49

8.1
Program EasyServe VPC 20150 ................................................................................................................49
8.2
Minimum System Requirements ................................................................................................................49
8.3
Installation...................................................................................................................................................49
8.4
Start Program and Connect to Feeder .......................................................................................................49
8.4.1
Connecting to Feeder.........................................................................................................................50
8.4.2
Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters .................................................................................51
8.5
Parameter Set.............................................................................................................................................51
8.5.1
.PAR Files ..........................................................................................................................................52
8.5.2
Read/change Parameters ..................................................................................................................52
8.5.3
Loading Custom Default Parameters .................................................................................................52
8.5.4
Loading Factory Default Parameters .................................................................................................53
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 10 -
November 2013
Table of Contents
8.5.5
Expert Mode .......................................................................................................................................53
8.5.6
Print Parameters ................................................................................................................................53
8.6
Operating the Feeder .................................................................................................................................54
8.6.1
Scale Operation Screens ...................................................................................................................54
8.6.2
Events ................................................................................................................................................54
8.6.3
Calibration ..........................................................................................................................................54
8.6.4
Service Values ...................................................................................................................................54
8.6.5
Trends ................................................................................................................................................55
8.6.6
Setting Time .......................................................................................................................................56
8.6.7
Options ...............................................................................................................................................56
9 Testing .................................................................................................................................................... 57
9.1
Calibration Weight Test ..............................................................................................................................57
9.2
Chain Test ..................................................................................................................................................57
9.3
Material Test ...............................................................................................................................................58
10 Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 59
10.1 General Information ....................................................................................................................................59
10.2 DT-9 Parameter List ...................................................................................................................................65
10.2.1
Parameter Overview ..........................................................................................................................66
10.2.2
Parameter Details ..............................................................................................................................82
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules ..........................................................................................82
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition .............................................................................................84
10.2.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources ..............................................................................................91
10.2.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ......................................................................................................97
10.2.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ...............................................................................................100
10.2.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring .........................................................................................101
10.2.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring ..............................................................................................108
10.2.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters.............................................................................................................113
10.2.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values...................................................................................................114
10.2.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ............................................................................................118
10.2.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ...............................................................................................121
10.2.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Moisture.........................................................................................................125
10.2.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control ............................................................................................128
10.2.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs .............................................................................................130
10.2.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs .................................................................................................134
10.2.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs...............................................................................................143
10.2.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration..........................................................................................150
10.2.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip.................................................................................................154
10.2.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval .....................................................................................156
10.2.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging .................................................................................................157
10.2.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe...........................................................................159
10.2.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus...............................................................................160
10.2.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet.........................................................................................................165
10.2.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs..................................................................................................166
10.2.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration..............................................................................168
10.2.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ......................................................................................172
10.2.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs ........................................................................................177
10.2.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................180
11 Event (Error) Messages ...........................................................................................................................183
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-3-
Table of Contents
11.1 Events Details...........................................................................................................................................184

11.1.1
Event Group: Calibration ..................................................................................................................184
11.1.2
Event Group: Controller ...................................................................................................................185
11.1.3
Event Group: Electrical System .......................................................................................................185
11.1.4
Event Group: Interlock .....................................................................................................................186
11.1.5
Event Group: Material Flow..............................................................................................................187
11.1.6
Event Group: MAX ...........................................................................................................................188
11.1.7
Event Group: Mechanic....................................................................................................................190
11.1.8
Event Group: MIN ............................................................................................................................193
11.1.9
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring .................................................................................................194
11.1.10 Event Group: System Message .......................................................................................................197
12 Default I/O Points.....................................................................................................................................199
12.1 Default Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................199
12.2 Default Digital Outputs..............................................................................................................................200
12.3 Default Analog I/O ....................................................................................................................................201
13 Trending Data .........................................................................................................................................203
14 Appendix .................................................................................................................................................207
14.1 Calculating the setpoint ............................................................................................................................207
14.2 Switch-on logic..........................................................................................................................................208
14.3 Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE) ......................................................................................................210
14.4 Feed rate controller (CTRL)......................................................................................................................214
14.5 Belt slip identification ................................................................................................................................218
14.5.1
Motion monitoring (BMM) .................................................................................................................218
14.5.2
2-sensor slip monitoring ...................................................................................................................218
14.6 Belt drift and slip identification via mark in the belt...................................................................................220
14.7 Monitoring the mechanism .......................................................................................................................222
14.8 Moist correction (MOIST) .........................................................................................................................223
14.9 The procedure for adjusting the frequency output....................................................................................223
14.10 PLC Functionality (Optional).....................................................................................................................224
14.10.1 Handling the Function Blocks...........................................................................................................225
14.10.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals ..................................................................................................225
14.10.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals .................................................................................................227
14.11 Serial Networks ........................................................................................................................................229
14.11.1 Ethernet Hardware ...........................................................................................................................230
14.11.1.1 Ethernet Addressing.........................................................................................................................231
14.11.2 RS-485 Hardware ............................................................................................................................233
14.12 Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling ...........................................................................................................235
14.12.1 Thoughts on the Cable Connections................................................................................................236
14.12.2 Screened Cables..............................................................................................................................236
14.12.3 Unscreened Cables..........................................................................................................................236
14.13 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation ...............................................................................236
14.14 Technical Data VCU 20103 ......................................................................................................................237
14.14.1 Dimensions and Position of the Plugs .............................................................................................238
14.14.2 General Technical Data ...................................................................................................................239
14.14.3 Power Supply ...................................................................................................................................239
14.14.4 Auxiliary Voltage for External Subscribers .......................................................................................240
14.14.5 Load Cell Input VME0120 ................................................................................................................240
14.14.6 Digital Connections ..........................................................................................................................243
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-4-
November 2013
Table of Contents
14.14.6.1 Digital inputs.....................................................................................................................................243

14.14.6.2 Digital Outputs..................................................................................................................................247
14.14.7 Analog Connections .........................................................................................................................250
14.14.7.1 Integrated Analog Input ....................................................................................................................250
14.14.7.2 Integrated Analog Outputs ...............................................................................................................250
14.14.7.3 Optional Analog Channels ...............................................................................................................250
14.15 Touchscreen Operating Panel VHM ........................................................................................................252
14.15.1 General Technical Data ...................................................................................................................253
14.15.2 Power Supply ...................................................................................................................................254
14.15.3 Data Interfaces .................................................................................................................................255
14.15.3.1 Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................255
14.15.3.2 Serial Interfaces: ..............................................................................................................................255
14.15.4 Housing Models ...............................................................................................................................256
14.15.4.1 Built-In Console Panel Units ............................................................................................................256
14.15.4.2 Portable Devices ..............................................................................................................................260
14.15.5 Connecting and Commissioning the Operating Panel .....................................................................263
14.15.5.1 Connecting the VHM Operating Panel via Ethernet ........................................................................263
14.15.5.2 Connection via RS-485 ....................................................................................................................264
14.15.5.3 Connection via Bluetooth .................................................................................................................265
14.16 Connecting EasyServe .............................................................................................................................266
14.17 Prefabricated system cables ....................................................................................................................266
14.18 WLAN access point ..................................................................................................................................270
14.19 Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling ...........................................................................................................271
14.19.1 Thoughts on the Cable Connections................................................................................................272
14.19.2 Screened Cables..............................................................................................................................272
14.19.3 Unscreened Cables..........................................................................................................................273
14.20 EC Declaration of Conformity ...................................................................................................................273
Index .......................................................................................................................................................275
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-5-
About This Manual
1 About This Manual

This instruction manual describes the controller VCU 20103 loaded with software VCF 20170. This type of controller is designed for controlling a weighbelt feeder, especially for feeding coal into a pulverizer. It is usually
used together with an operator panel type VHM.
For easy retrofits in existing installations with STOCK Equipment controller type 196NT a different type of
DISOCONT Tersus is provided. Please contact STOCK for details on that variant, if needed.
Additional details on the hardware components and the interfaces of the DISOCONT Tersus system are found
in the system manual BV-H2406 and the electrical schematics provided with the equipment.
For service purposes a PC or notebook with software EasyServe (type VPC 20150) can be connected. For details on EasyServe besides the information in this manual see instruction manual BV-H2185.
The controller provides optional means for communication via serial fieldbus of various types to the host plant
control. Details on this communication are found in the separate fieldbus interface manual BV-H2418.
Additional copies of these instructions may be ordered from the Parts Department at Stock Equipment
Company, Chagrin Falls, Ohio. Refer to Part No. ATPDT9VCU20103.
Proprietary Note
The information in this manual, including technical data and copies of drawings, contains information that is proprietary to Stock Equipment Company. This manual is provided to the user of equipment purchased from Stock
Equipment Company for use only in operation or maintenance of such equipment. Information in this manual is
not to be used, disclosed, copied, reproduced in whole or part for any use other than that indicated above, or for
any other purpose detrimental to the interests of Stock Equipment Company. Patents owned by Stock Equipment Company have been issued or are pending on some of the information in this manual. Any unauthorized
use of this subject matter of such patents is a violation of such patents and is prohibited by law.
Electrostatic Sensitive Decices

Caution: The electronic controls contain ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies that can
be damaged by static electricity. The following static control precautions are required when testing, servicing, or
repairing the electronic assemblies.
1. Disconnect power at the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
2. Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
3. Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis.
4. When replacing the electronic circuit board. Do not remove the board from the static shielding bag it came in
until you are ready to install the board.
5. When removing any electronic circuit board, immediately place it in static shielding bag.
6. Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory for repair
since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-1-
About This Manual
7. Contact the Stock Equipment Company Parts Department for a returns good authorization number to facilitate the return of an electronic circuit board. Returned components should be shipped in static shielding type
bags. If packing materials are used, they should be made of a static dissipative material.
Note: If you are not familiar with static control procedures, before replacing electronic components, refer to US
Department of Defense DOD - HDBK-263, Electrostatic Discharge Control Handbook for protection of electronic
parts, assemblies, and equipment.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-2-
November 2013
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally, you should observe:
Safety hints given in order-specific documentation
Safety hints relating to mechanical components
Instructions and safety tips for parts manufactured by sub-suppliers or that are not part of Schenck Process's
scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Application
The measuring system and its connected mechanical components are exclusively designed for weighing and
controlling tasks. Any use other than originally intended is considered inappropriate.
Sources of Risk
If the measuring system has been correctly installed and commissioned, it does not pose any danger during
weigh operations.
Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Potential
hazards may then arise from e.g. additional devices through which the weighed goods are passed or metered.
Minor risks may arise in these situations if the measuring system is used or operated by untrained personnel.
The measuring system can be part of a more complex plant. The system operating company is fully responsible
for the operating safety of the system.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the technical
documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions
given.
Changing Parameters
The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters. Only personnel familiar with the device's
mode of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Incorrectly set parameters may cause injury or material damage. Furthermore they may also cause considerable disruption to weigh
operations.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-3-
Safety notes
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating company must ensure that the password is handled safely.
Acknowledging Event Messages

Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any
connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.
Service and Maintenance

All warning and instruction signs on the scales must be observed.
The measuring system must be shut down before work is performed on mechanical equipment or peripheral
devices (control systems in particular). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring system cannot
be inadvertently restarted.
Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply.
The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.
Moisture and Humidity

All scales parts, electrical components in particular, must be protected from moisture and humidity when the
housing is opened for e.g. maintenance and service. In other respects the protection classes of the housing must
be observed.
Design Modifications
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process
voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which could
affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this requirement is
met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the warranty will
be void.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-4-
November 2013
Safety notes
2.1
Signal Words
2.1.1
Signal Words for Safety Warnings
Potential dangers will always exist when working with technical devices. Dangers will arise if the machine
is incorrectly installed,
is started up incorrectly,
is operated by untrained personnel or
is repaired by unqualified personnel
The following signal words indicate throughout this manual dangers that may arise when handling this machine:
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the most
severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up to
and including death.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium injuries.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-5-
Safety notes
2.1.2
Signal Words for Application Notes
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environmental
damage could occur.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product economically and at an optimal level of efficiency.
2.2
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems. Once
the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components.
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on live
components. Observe, among other things, the following:
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure them against inadvertent restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. Above 1 KV: earth and bypass the cables.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-6-
November 2013
Safety notes
2.3
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components

DANGER
Live damaged or defective components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are neither
damaged nor defective.
1. Qualified personnel must immediately replace or, if possible, repair damaged or defective electrical components.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-7-
Overview
3 Overview
This chapter explains the principle functions of the DISOCONT Tersus system used in conjunction with a Stock
coal feeder.
3.1
What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-9?
The DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile family of modular weighing electronics for use with weighing and feeding
systems.
The DISOCONT Tersus performs all weighing and processing functions required for the measuring and feeding
of bulk solids. It is designed for continuous measuring and control tasks as well as discontinuous batching.
Used in conjunction with the specific application software for weighing and feeding tasks, the DISOCONT Tersus
can be used in the following industries:
Power
Steel
Basic Materials
Cement
Food
Chemical.
In connection with the corresponding mechanical equipment, the following systems are supported:
Belt Scales
Weigh Feeders
Solids flow meters (chutes)
Solids flow feeders
Loss-in-weight, gain-in-weight feeders
Mass flow meters (Coriolis meters)
Mass flow feeders (Coriolis feeders)
Filling systems.
The Stock DT-9 configuration of the DISOCONT Tersus is a modified version, optimized for feeding coal in power plant environment. There are two different versions of the DT-9. One is a completely redesigned and updated
version that is used in new installations. The second one uses the same components and software but has been
optimized for use as an upgrade to existing Stock 8085, 196, and 196NT installations. This version uses the
196NT connectors and mounting footprint.
VCU 20103 Designed for new installations where backwards compatibility is not required. This version is identified by the steel mounting frame and screw type electrical connectors. A Touch Screen HMI is always used
when a VCU 20103 is installed.
VCU 20104 Designed as a drop in replacement for the 196NT in existing installations. This version is identified
by the brown Amp style electrical connectors. The VCU 20104 can be used with either a Touch Screen HMI or
with an existing 196NT display.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-9-
Overview
3.2
Definitions
The table below explains some basic terms used in this manual.
Abbreviation
Meaning
Explanation
Unit
Actual feed
rate
The actual amount of

material delivered per
unit time
Lbs/hr, Lbs/min, USTons/hr, Kg/hr,

Kg/min or Metric Tons/hr
Feedrate
setpoint
The desired amount of

material delivered per
unit time
Lbs/hr, Lbs/min, USTons/hr, Kg/hr,

Kg/min or Metric Tons/hr
Totalized
amount
Weight of material delivered since last counter reset
Lbs, US Tons, Kg or Metric tons
Belt speed
Feeder belt speed
Inches/sec, m/sec
Belt load
Weight of material per

unit of belt length.
Lbs/inch, Kg/m
QB
Platform load
Controller
magnitude
Output signal magnitude
Xd
Deviation
Difference between the %

actual feedrate and the
feedrate setpoint.
3.3
Lbs, Kg
mA
Measuring Principle
The belt weighing system is designed to continuously weigh the amount of material transported on the feeder
belt. The actual weight of material transported is calculated by multiplying the feeder belt load, in lbs/inch, times
the feeder belt speed. The systems used to measure these two values are described below.
Belt Load
The feeder weight signal is generated by two load cells that support a single weigh roller. Two weigh span rollers
are located on each side of the weigh roller to accurately define the length of belt (and amount of coal) being
supported by the weigh roller.
Since the load cells only support half of the weight on the weigh span (each load cell supports 25 percent of the
total weight) the effective platform length (Leff) is calculated as:
Leff = Lg / 2
Leff = Effective platform length
Lg = Total platform length
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 10 -
November 2013
Overview
The microprocessor computes the feeder belt load by repeatedly reading the voltage signal from each load cell
and converting the signal into a digital value (binary number) using an analog to digital (A/D) converter. Each
value is then compared to parameters stored in permanent memory to determine if the signal is within acceptable limits, and if it is, it is stored for use. The same operation is then performed on the other load cell, and the
signals are compared to each other to test their validity. If the signals are determined to be invalid, the feeder is
switched to volumetric operation and the controller uses a simulated belt load calculated from an historical average stored in memory. If the signals are determined to be valid, the two load cell signals are summed, the tare is
subtracted and the result is multiplied by a scaling factor based on the load cell data specified in P04.01 LC
Characteristic Value and P04.02 LC Rated Capacity to determine the nominal weight of material on the belt. This
nominal value is then multiplied by the three range correction factors (P10.03, P10.04 and P10.05) to determine
the actual weight (QB).
The belt load (Q) is computed from the total weight (QB) as follows:
Q = QB / Leff
Q = Belt load in kg/m

QB = W eight of load on platform in kg
Note: The 196NT parameter 10 Weigh Span Length is the full distance between the two weigh span rollers. The
DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is half the distance between the two weigh span rollers. For
any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
Belt Speed
During normal feeder operation, the belt speed is calculated from the motor RPM rather then being measured
directly. The relation ship between motor speed and belt speed is determined during calibration and is displayed
as P10.02 Pulses per length.
Feedrate Control and Totals

The weigh and speed information is used to calculate the actual feedrate as shown.
Feedrate (I) = Belt load (Q) x Belt Speed (V)
The feeder control accepts a feedrate set point from the source selected using parameter P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint . This signal is compared with a computed feedrate derived from measured weight and speed signals to
generate the system error signal which is used to adjust the speed of the motor. Compensation for system stability is provided in the software using parameters P11.01 P-Component KP and P11.02 I-Component TN. These
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 11 -
Overview
calculations are repeated periodically and at each iteration, the actual feedrate is multiplied by the time interval
to calculate the totalizer increment. Separate totals are kept for gravimetric and volumetric operation.
3.4
Operating Modes - Remote
The Remote Operating Mode is provided for normal operation, with the feeder feeding coal under control of the
plant control system. The source for the Start/Stop signal is designated by P03.01Feeder Start and the source
for the feedrate setpoint is designated by P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint. Analog feedback signals are generated
based on the entries to parameter block 14 Analog Outputs. Digital feedback signals (relay outputs) are generated based on the entries to parameter block 16 Digital Outputs.
While in the Remote Operating Mode, the feeder can use one of three systems to generate the required belt
speed set point.
Details for the different modes can be found in the appendix.
3.4.1
Gravimetric
Gravimetric Mode is the normal mode of operation. The feed rate is calculated using the belt speed and the actual belt load, and is controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control system. Parameter
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate, corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum feed rate is set by
parameter P03.06 Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate should always match parameter
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. The system can be set to produce an error if the demand signal is outside to normal
range.
3.4.2
Volumetric
Volumetric Mode is used when an error is detected in the weighing system. The actual feed rate is calculated
using the belt speed and an assumed belt load based on the average value over the last several hours, and is
controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control system. Parameter P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate, corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum federate is set by parameter P03.06
Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate should always match parameter P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate. The system can be set to produce an error if the demand signal is outside to normal range.
3.4.3
Volumetric Control
Volumetric Control Mode is a variation of the gravimetric mode that is used when the feeder weigh system is
working correctly but the material on belt switch indicates that the belt is empty. The displayed feedrate and the
customer feedback signal is still based on the actual material being fed and the gravimetric total is still being
incremented but the belt speed is determined as if the feeder were in volumetric mode. This mode is used to
prevent the feeder from running to maximum belt speed when material flow is lost.
3.5
Operating Modes OFF/Maintenance
The OFF/Maint mode is is provided so that the feeder can be isolated from the plant control system during
startup, calibration and other maintenance operations. In this operating mode, the plant start/stop and demand
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 12 -
November 2013
Overview
signals are ignored and feedback signals are not generated. The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode before a
system calibration can be performed. When the feeder is operated in the OFF/Maint mode, the belt speed is set
based on the value of parameter P02.16 Maintenance Speed. This is an open loop signal calculated as a percentage of the full scale signal to the motor speed control (see parameters P11.04 Lower Limit, P11.05 Upper
Limit and P01.06 Controller Magnitude Offset).
In OFF/Maint mode belt can be started via the buttons on the VHM, via the Local key on the 196NT keyboard or
a digital input as defined by P15.25 DI: Local Start .
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 13 -
DT-9 Setup
4 DT-9 Setup
This section describes the startup process when a new feeder is installed or when an existing DT-9 is replaced.
CAUTION
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier will damage the DT-9. The old style Load Cell Amplifier must be replaced with the new
version before the DT-9 can be used.
CAUTION
DO NOT connect a normal Ethernet cable to X96 (red RJ45 connector).
This connector uses normally unused wires in the CAT 5 cable to provide power
to the touch screen display. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage
to the DT-9 or to the attached network device.
HINT
The weigh span is specified using parameter P04.03 Effective Platform
Length.
This parameter is the distance between the weigh roller and either one of the
weigh span rollers. This is one-half the value used by the 196NT, which is the
distance between the weigh span rollers.
4.1
Setup Notes
This section is a general description of the feeder setup process. This process can be performed using either
the touch screen HMI or a PC loaded with the EasyServe software. Section Operation Using the Touch
Screen HMI [39] describes the Touch Screen HMI and Section Operation Using EasyServe [49] describes EasyServe.
Events (Error conditions) are usually defined using three parameters. The first, which is usually hidden by
default, defines the input signal that initiates the event, the second specifies the delay between the time
when the error is detected and the time when the event is generated, and the third, specifies the type of
event that is generated (A, W1, W2 or IG). In most cases, the Event (error) can be disabled by setting the
type of event to IG.
The DT-9 has 15 digital inputs (DI 1 through DI 15) and 13 digital outputs (DO 1 through DO 13). Each is
assigned to a specific function, and wired to the appropriate external device. These assignments are hidden
and should not be changed. See chapter Default I/O Points for a list of the default assignments.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 15 -
DT-9 Setup
The DT-9 has one analog input (AI 1) and two analog outputs (AO 1 and AO 2). AI 1 is normally used as the
customer demand signal, AO 1 is normally used to control the motor speed control and AO 2 is normally
used as the customer feedback signal. These assignments are hidden and should not be changed.
The DT-9 has four slots for auxiliary analog I/O cards (channels A10-A13). These channels are not normally
used. Contact Stock engineering if special analog I/O signals are required.
4.2
Startup and Functional Check
This procedure verifies that the feeder and its controls are operating properly, simulates feeder trip conditions,
and checks the principal input/output connections.
1. Apply power to the feeder.
2. Insure that the feeder is in OFF/Maint mode and that the touch screen HMI is set to the home screen.
3. Set the feeder parameters as described in section Setup Parameters [17].
4. Interpret event messages, if any, and correct faults.
5. Unbalance the load cells by engaging the calibration weight on one side of the weigh roller. The display
should indicate volumetric mode. Unbalance each load cell in order to check both sides, then remove the
calibration weight(s).
6. Press and maintain the Jog>> button to verify that belt travel is in the in correct direction.
7. Run the feeder in LOCAL mode by pressing the Run>> button. The feeder will operate at the maintenance
speed programmed in P02.16 Maintenance Speed. Check the motor speed for stability.
8. Run the feeder in LOCAL by pressing the Run>> button. Set the Belt Drive Motor (Run Enable) switch to the
STOP position. The feeder should stop and the display should show a IL01 Event: Run Disabled error message. Acknowledge the event and return the Belt Drive Motor switch to its normal position.
9. Stop the feeder and deflect the material-on-belt limit switch paddle to simulate a loaded belt. Run the feeder
in the LOCAL mode to verify that the feeder trips. If it does not, check the adjustment of the paddle switch
cams.
10. Check the event display or the event line on EasyServe. They should both show a W M12 Event: Coal on
Belt alarm message with a time stamp. Acknowledge the event and return the coal-on-belt paddle to its normal position
11. Calibrate the feeder as described in section Calibration [20].
12. Align the analog inputs and outputs as described in section Analog Trim Function [27].
13. Hang the calibration weights. Produce or simulate a feeder start permissive. Check feedrate and feedback
linearity by applying demand signals of 100, 75, 50, and 25 percent. Compare each demand signal applied
to the feedback signal output. Compare the demand feedrate setpoint (service value 4) with the measured
feed rate of the feeder for each signal.
14. Energize the feeder in the REMOTE mode and deflect the discharge pluggage alarm (or touch the discharge
pluggage sensor with a metal rod). After the preset delay in P15.10, the feeder should be de-energized. If
the feeder does not trip, check the adjustment of the cams for the paddle switch or the sensitivity setting of
the sensor according to the procedure in the original equipment manual.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 16 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
15. Check the event display or the event line on EasyServe. They should both show a W M07 Event: Discharge
Pluggage alarm with a time stamp. Acknowledge the event and return the discharge switch to its original
state.
16. Return the feeder to REMOTE operation.
4.3
Setup Parameters
The microprocessor controller is tailored to specific feeders and customers needs by the setup parameters.
Feeder-specific physical dimensions must be entered as well as user-selectable display modes and set points.
These values are stored in permanent memory and are only entered once. See section Parameters [59] for a
complete list and description of the parameters.
Note: In any given application, the majority of the DT-9 parameters are either not used, or fixed by the design of
the feeder and cabinet. These parameters can be viewed using EasyServe in expert mode (default password
7353) but should not be changed.
The controllers will come preprogrammed from Stock Equipment Company but if changes are needed, there are
two ways to do this:
Using EasyServe Software (See section Parameters [59])
Using the Touch Screen HMI (See Section The 'Setup' Screen [42])
4.3.1
Commonly Changed Parameters
The following is a list of parameters that are commonly changed during startup. Their values should be recorded
for future reference. See section Parameters [59] for a complete list and detailed descriptions.
P-No.
P-Name
Actual
The following parameters set the feedrate associated with a 100 % demand signal (usually 20 mA). They must
always be set to the same value. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P02.05
Nominal Flow Rate
P03.05
Maximum Feedrate
The following parameter is the belt speed associated with the nominal (maximum) feedrate and the nominal
material density. It is calculated as:
P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section
Inputs are in lbs/hour, lbs/cubic ft and square feet. Results are in inches/sec.
P02.06
Nominal Speed
The following parameter sets the minimum feedrate clamp. See project specific documentation for the correct
value.
P03.06
Minimum Feedrate
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 17 -
DT-9 Setup
P-No.
P-Name
Actual
The following parameter selects the text string displayed on the top line of the touch screen HMI.
P02.03
Scale Name
The following parameters select the units and formats that are used to display the various feeder information on
the display.
P02.01
Language
P02.02
Units
P02.07
Display Formats
P02.08
Flow Rate Units
P02.09
Counter 1 Unit
P02.10
Counter 2 Unit
P02.11
Counter 3 Unit
The following parameter selects the demand signal to the motor speed control when the feeder is running in
local mode. It is normally set to 50 %.
P02.16
Maintenance Speed
The following parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. It must be set to the distance between the first weigh span roller and the central weigh roller (one half the distance between the weigh
span rollers). See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P04.03
Effective Platform Length
The following parameter specifies the characteristics of the motor tachometer. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P04.09
Tachometer: Pulses per Rev
P/rev
The following parameter specifies the area under the leveling bar. See project specific documentation for the
correct value.
P04.10
Load cross section
P07.02 sets the maximum time between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pluses and P07.03 selects the type of event
that is generated when this limit is exceeded. Set P07.03 to IG if a BMM is not installed. See project specific
documentation for the correct values.
P07.02
Belt Motion Monitor Delay
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 18 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
P-No.
P-Name
P07.03
Event: Belt Motion Monitor
Actual
A / W1 / W2 / IG
The following parameter specifies the distance between the calibration probe bosses. See project specific
documentation for the correct value.
P10.01
Calibration Probe Span
The following parameter specifies the actual value of the calibration weigh. This value is stamped on the weight.
P10.08
Calibration Weight
The following parameters specify the cleanout conveyor duty cycle. Set P13.02 to zero to run the cleanout conveyor continuously.
P13.02
CleanOut ON Time
Hours
P13.03
CleanOut OFF Time
Hours
The following parameters control the Loss of Material on Belt event. Setting P05.14 to A causes the feeder trip
(stop the feeder) when the coal on belt signal is lost during normal operation. Setting P05.14 to W1 or W2 will
produce a warning. P05.13 sets the delay between the time that the signal is lost and the time that the event is
generated (This is normally set to one second). Set P05.14 to IG to disable this feature.
P15.13
Loss of Flow Trip Delay
P15.14
Event: Loss of material
A / W1 / W2 / IG
The following parameters are used to control the Level/Temperature Sensor event. The Level/Temperature
Sensor input is normally connected to either a flow monitor in the downspout or a temperature switch at the
feeder discharge. Setting P15.21 to A causes the feeder trip (stop the feeder) when the coal flow monitor indicates a loss of flow in the downspout. Setting P15.21 to W1 or W2 will produce a warning. P15.20 sets the delay
between the time that the signal is detected and the time that the event is generated. Set P15.20 to 100 lbs for a
quick response. Set P15.21 to IG to disable this feature. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P15.20
Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay
P15.21
Event: Coal Flow
A / W1 / W2 / IG
The following parameters specify the Ethernet communications address. The default values should not be
changed unless the DT-9 is connected to a local network.
P23.01
IP Address
P23.02
Net Mask
P23.03
Gateway
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 19 -
DT-9 Setup
4.4
Calibration
The feeder should be calibrated at startup, after one month of initial operation and every six months there after.
Calibration should also be performed following a weigh roller adjustment or replacement of the belt, the CPU
board, or a load cell module. The controller should also be calibrated after the controller firmware is updated or a
Load Default Values operation is performed. Calibration is accomplished in two separate steps.
Step one of calibration consists of the elimination of system tare, which includes the weight of the weigh roller,
load cell support assembly, and the feeder belt. It also involves measuring belt speed and its relationship to motor speed. Step two calibrates the load cell output with a known weight.
Cancellation of feeder tare is performed by measuring the average weigh system output over exactly two belt
revolutions (eight tape passes) and then subtracting this amount from the total weight measurement. When the
belt is running empty, it produces a zero average contribution to the totalized weight. In normal operation, the
average tare is automatically subtracted from the gross weight of the belt. Therefore, only the material weight on
the belt is reflected as totalized weight.
While the empty belt is being weighed, the belt speed is also being accurately measured. This is done by measuring the time it takes a retro-reflective marker, attached to the belt, to travel between two fixed points on the
feeder body. This parameter is measured eight times to determine repeatability and to compensate for variations
in belt thickness. From this data, the belt speed is calculated and the relationship between belt speed and motor
speed is established. The feeder operates with zero belt slippage. Therefore, the ratio of belt speed to average
motor speed is constant. This ratio is stored in memory and is used to determine the belt speed for any motor
speed.
The span of the weighing system is set after the tare has been measured. A known weight is applied to the
weigh roller and the average output over exactly two belt revolutions (eight tape passes) is measured. This calibrated span factor is stored in memory and used to accurately determine the value of the weight of the material
on the belt.
Note: The DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is the distance from either weigh span roller to the
central weigh roller, which is supported by the load cell. This is half the distance between the two weigh span
rollers. For any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
4.4.1
Performing Calibrations
The calibration process consists of the following three steps.

1. Weigh Roller Adjustment.
2. Basic (Cal 1) Belt speed and tare calibration.
3. Span (Cal 2) Belt Speed and span calibration.
Note: At least one Basic (Cal 1) must be performed prior to performing a Span (Cal 2).
The following special calibration processes can be preformed for testing or special maintenance operations, but
are not normally required.
1. TC: Span calibration - Chain test calibration.
2. LB: Pulses / Belt - Belt speed calibration.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 20 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
3. TA: Tare - Tare calibration.

Note: Calibration is considered a local operation. No totalization takes place and analog feedback signals are
set to minimum.
4.4.2
Weigh Roller Adjustment
For the feeder to weigh accurately, the central weigh roller must be aligned with the weigh span rollers within
0.002 inch (0.05 mm). Refer to Fig.
Note: The parts shown may differ from those that actually shipped. This figure is to be used as a general
guideline.
Weigh Roller Adjustment Procedure
1. Mount the calibration weight on both load cells.
2. Insert the checking bars (A2451-1) through the discharge end access door of the feeder, adjacent to the
sides of the belt, and with their machined surfaces resting on the weigh span and weigh rollers.
3. Beginning on either side, insert a 0.005 in. shim between each of the three rollers and the machined surface
of the checking bar (three places).
Fig. 1: Weigh Roller Adjustment

1 Weigh Roller
6 Adjustment Block
2 .005 SHIM
7 Plug
3 Checking Bar
8 Jam Nut
4 Belt
9 Drag Link
5 Load Cell
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 21 -
DT-9 Setup
1. Loosen the jam nut, and then turn the adjustment block to lower the weigh roller.
2. Slowly turn the adjustment block to raise the weigh roller until the shim is touching both checking bar and
weigh roller (slip fit). Tighten the jam nut.
3. Similarly, adjust the weigh roller on the opposite side of the feeder.
4. Remove the checking bars.
5. Remove the calibration weights.
6. The feeder must be recalibrated after weigh roller adjustment. (See procedure on next page.)
4.4.3
Basic (CAL 1)
This operation measures the tare factor and the belt speed factor and updates the following parameters.
P10.02 Pulses per length
P10.10 Basic Tare
P10.11 Belt Circuit No.
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy pressing
<Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Requirements:
The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete calibration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
Four retro-reflective tape clips must be installed on the belt.
The tape clips must be farther apart than the distance between the cal probes or a Probe Error will be
generated and the calibration will not complete.
Four tape clips are normally used but two can be used if the feeder is very shot or eight can be used if
the feeder is very long or slow. If two tape clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over four belt revolutions, instead of two, and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be twice the correct value. If eight tape clips are
used, the feeder will be calibrated over one belt revolution and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be half the
correct value.
The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
The feeder belt must be empty.
The calibration weights must NOT be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
Before starting the calibration, record the values of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.10 Basic Tare
1. These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 22 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
3. Select Basic (Cal 1)
4. Initiate the Basic (Cal 1) calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI, or the <CAL 1> button on the 196NT display.
5. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process.
The motor will first run at a one-half the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed, then at the full
value of P02.16.
6. After Stabilizing, the feeder will go through eight tape passes. The DT-9 will display the pass number and
tachometer pulses on the screen.
7. Upon completion of the calibration four values will be displayed on the screen:
Deviation (Variation between belt speed measurements)
Belt Circuit No (P10.11)
Basic Tare (P10.10)
Pulses per Length Value (P10.02).
8. After successful completion, the screen will prompt you to either save or cancel the calibration values.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration program
again.
9. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
10. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest values
of P10.02 and P10.10 to the previous values (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the
formula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.4
Span (CAL 2)
This operation measures the load cell span factor and the belt speed factor, and updates the following parameters.
P10.03 Range Correction TW
P10.11 Belt Circuit No.
Requirements:
The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 23 -
DT-9 Setup
Four retro-reflective tape clips must be installed on the belt

The tape clips must be farther apart than the distance between the cal probes or a Probe Error will be
generated and the calibration will not complete.
Four tape clips are normally used but two can be used if the feeder is very shot or eight can be used if
the feeder is very long or slow. If two tape clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over four belt revolutions, instead of two, and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be twice the correct value. If eight tape clips are
used, the feeder will be calibrated over one belt revolution and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be half the
correct value.
A Basic (Cal 1) had been performed.
Enter Parameter P10.08 Calibration Weight. Ensure that the value entered matches the total value stamped
on the calibration weight(s).
Mount the calibration weight(s) on the load cells.
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.03 Range
Correction TW. These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
3. Select Span (Cal 2)
4. Initiate the Span (Cal 2) calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI, or the <CAL 2> button on the 196NT display.
5. The screen will prompt to add the calibration weight. The top line of the display will show the value entered in
P10.08 and the bottom line show what the load cells are measuring based on the current calibration parameters. Press the <ENTER> or <Start> button to proceed with calibration.
6. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process
The motor will run at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
7. After Stabilizing the feeder will go through eight tape passes
The pass number and tachometer pulses will be displayed on the screen
8. Upon completion of the calibration, four values will be displayed on the screen.
Deviation (Variation between belt speed measurements)
Belt Circuit No (P10.11)
Range Correction TW (P10.03)
Pulses per length. Value (P10.02)
again.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 24 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
11. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest values
of P10.02 and P10.03 to the previous values (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the
formula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.5
TC: Span Calibration
This operation performs a chain calibration using the values in P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) and P10.09
Test Chain Weight. The results are used to update the following parameter.
P10.04 Range Correction TC.
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
The calibrated test chains must be installed.
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.04 Range Correction TC. This will be used
later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2.
If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
3. Select TC: Span Calibration.

4. Initiate the TC: Span Calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional) Touch
Screen HMI. This process cannot be performed using the 196NT display.
5. The screen will prompt to add the calibration weight (test chain). The top line of the display will show the
value entered in P10.09 and the bottom line show what the load cells are measuring based on the current
calibration parameters. Press the <Start> button to proceed with calibration.
The motor will run at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
7. After Stabilizing the feeder will run for the number of belt revolutions specified in P10.07.
The percentage complete will be displayed on the screen
8. Upon completion of the calibration, four values will be displayed on the screen.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 25 -
DT-9 Setup
TC: Ready (Simulated weight delivered)

Range Correction TC (P10.04)
again.
11. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest value
of P10.04 to the previous value (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the formula [100 x
(new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the
weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.6
LB: Pulses per Belt
The LB: Pulses per Belt calibration process is not intended for use in coal feeder applications and should not
normally be preformed.
4.4.7
TA: Tare
This operation measures the weight of the empty belt (tare factor) for a period of time based on the value of
P10.11 Belt Circuit No. times P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.), and updates the following parameter.
P10.10 Basic Tare
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
The calibration weights must NOT be installed.
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.10 Basic Tare. This will be used later to
verify that the calibration results are consistent.
3. Select TA: Tare calibration.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 26 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
4. Initiate the TA: Tare calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional) Touch
Screen HMI. This process cannot be performed using the 196NT display.
Run the motor at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
6. After Stabilizing, the feeder will run for the specified time (P10.07 times P10.11). The DT-9 will display the
percent completion and the current tare value as a percentage of the rated belt load. The nominal belt load is
defined as the nominal flow rate divided by the nominal belt speed.
7. Upon completion of the calibration two values will be displayed on the screen:
Deviation Percent deviation between the new tare value and the previous value.
Tare Tare value as a percentage of the nominal belt load.
again.
10. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest value
of P10.10 to the previous value (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the formula [100 x
(new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the
weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.5
Analog Trim Function
The feeder controls respond to a feed rate demand signal and return isolated analog feedback signals. W hen the
input and output modules associated with these signals are used with the plants control system, they must be
adjusted prior to operating the feeder under remote control. To perform this procedure, Stock Equipment Company recommends the Fluke Model 87 Digital Multimeter or equivalent. The DC accuracy for milliamps should be
0.2 % and the DC accuracy for voltage should be 0.1 % plus 1 digit. It also must have a 4 digit highresolution mode.
Setting analog trim values using the touch screen HMI (See section Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI
[39])
Setting analog trim values using EasyServe (See section Operation Using EasyServe [49])
Note: The plant combustion control system is the preferred source of the demand signal. This will precisely align
the feeder to the control system.
The DT-9 has one built in analog input (4 - 20 mA or 0 10 VDC) and two built in analog outputs (4 - 20mA only). These I/O channels are described below.
1. AI 1: Connected to wires SIG+ & SIG- (X6-3, X6-4 or X6-3, X6-5). This input is normally used for the customer demand signal. The value in P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint (normally hidden) should be set to AI 1.
2. AO 1: Connected to wires 142, 143 & 144 (X6-6 and X6-7). This output is normally used for the motor speed
control (VFD). The value in P11.03 AO: Motor Speed Control should be set to AO 1.
3. AO 2: Connected to wires 139, 140 & 141 (X6-8 and X6-9). This output is normally used for the customer
feedback signal. The value in P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate should be set to AO 2.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 27 -
DT-9 Setup
In addition to the built in analog channels, there are four slots in which analog I/O cards can be installed. Parameter group 1 is used to assign each slot to an analog I/O channel (AI 2 through AI 5 or AO 3 through AO 6). Slots
can be either input or output, depending on the type of card installed. Each card is individually isolated.
1. A10: Connected to terminal blocks X12-1 and X12-2. Can be assigned to AI 2 or AO 3.
4.6
Belt Monitoring
The DISOCONT Tersus has an expanded belt monitor integrated into it that monitors belt drift and slippage. Belt
drift monitoring is activated by configuring the source for the belt sensor in the P07.04 DI: Source Belt Sensor
parameters. Monitoring may only be activated if the conveyor is equipped with a belt with integrated triangular
markings and if the sensor has been installed.
Additionally, differences in weight across the belt, unavoidable despite its high quality, can be identified over one
belt circuit and be compensated for (BIC). This function is activated by the P07.05 BIC Active parameters.
Belt-drift switches feed to inputs used for the identification of external events. Furthermore, belt motion can be
monitored using additional (1 or 2) sensors (parameter group '2-Sensor Slip').
4.6.1
Belt Drift Monitoring
The sensor records the position relative to the feeder frame of the triangles integrated into the belt. The result is
presented after one complete belt circuit.
Fig. 2: Principle of belt-drift monitoring
The departure of the course of the belt from the neutral position can be shown in the operating area Setup.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 28 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
Activating the monitoring

Set the relevant parameters:
Parameters
Value and details
P07.04
Defines the input channel used to connect the sensor that monitors the triangle in the belt and
activates the function.
P07.08
Defines system behavior if the sensor and the triangles identify belt slippage.
P07.09
The length L of the triangle, measured in the direction of belt motion (value is given in the scales
data sheet), as per the diagram.
P07.10
The factory defaults are suitable for most situations.

The width W of the triangle, measured transverse to the direction of belt motion (value is given in
the scales data sheet), as per the diagram.
P07.11

P07.12
Measured value for the neutral position relative to the feeder frame. Upon commissioning, the
sensor must be set such that the display for deviation from the neutral position indicates zero.
Small deviations can be adjusted later via parameters.
P07.14 - P07.18
Tolerance thresholds and reactions to events belt-drift (advance warning) and belt-drift (critical
condition).
Tab. 1 : Parameter for BIC and for belt motion monitoring
Procedure to be followed
Step
Task
1
Enter the parameters as per the list given above
Set the scales so that the belt runs centered.
Execute the adjustment program 'LB: Pulses/Belt' and use the result after two complete belt circuits.
Set the sensor relative to the belt so that the course indicator shows zero. Small deviations can be adjusted
via P21.01.
For example:
For P07.12 = 0, display of belt drift = 0.2 then
For P07.12 = -0.2, display of belt drift = 0
By altering the value of P21.01, belt drift can be simulated and the system's reaction to this condition can be
observed.
Set P07.12 back to its original value after the test.
Tab. 2 : Sequence for adjustment and commissioning
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 29 -
DT-9 Setup
4.6.2
Belt Influence Compensation (BIC)
The automatic belt influence compensation (BIC = Belt Influence Ccompensation) monitors and corrects the
influence of the belt on the material weight measurement. As with belt monitoring, it requires a sensor and a
marking in the belt. BIC improves feed consistency and batch accuracy, if batch mode is preset.
For the initial commissioning, we recommend switching BIC off (P07.05 = NO). The belt-drift monitoring [28]
must be activated to enable this function.
After commissioning, BIC can be activated once normal bulk material conditions have been established on the
belt (P07.05 = YES). The parameters for the belt drift monitoring must have been set. The BIC will have measured the belt influence after around 10 belt circuits and will be able to correct the weight value accordingly. It
does not require setting.
4.6.3
Belt Slippage Monitoring
Belt slippage is defined as the difference between the speed of the belt as set by the head pulley and the actual
speed of the belt. Belt slippage can result from an excessively high removal force on the bulk material from the
hopper, from soiling of the drive roller or from excessively low belt tension. Slippage influences directly measuring and feeding accuracy, as the measured value for belt speed is calculated using the rotational speed of the
motor.
4.6.3.1 Monitoring Standstill after Startup

A carrying idler or the guide pulley is equipped with an impulse sensor. Standstill monitoring can only be used if
the feeder is run with a minimum feed rate setpoint. If the belt can be run with a feed rate of zero, a different
manner of belt slippage monitoring must be implemented if it is required.
After a short waiting period after the feeder is switched on, the signal sent to the input channel defined in P16.23
is evaluated. If this signal transmits no impulse within the time defined by P07.02, it will be assumed that the belt
is not moving. In this case the corresponding event is triggered (P07.03).
Belt slippage of only a few percent cannot be detected using this method.
4.6.3.2 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking

If using a belt with a belt marking, this marking can be used to measure belt motion. The comparison between
the belt motion expected as a result of the head pulley motion and the distance measured across the duration of
two belt marking measurements allows the slippage to be detected with high accuracy. This method also allows
errors in the belt speed to be identified that result from soiling of the drive roller.
However, this method can only produce results after one complete belt circuit. A different method must be used
if more rapid identification is required.
In order to harness this method, the belt drift monitoring [28], the belt slippage threshold (in P07.07) and the
reaction to the event (in P07.08 and P07.09) must be set.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 30 -
November 2013
DT-9 Setup
4.6.3.3 Two-Sensor Belt Slippage Monitoring

Two sensors whose signals supply information on the belt speed are required for this form of belt slippage monitoring. A comparison of both signals gives information on the reliability of each signal and the belt slippage between both measuring points. The information given by the impulse tachometer on the motor can be used for
one of the signals, and can also be used for the feed rate calculation. A second signal is generated by a pulse
sensor on a carrying idler or guide pulley. The ratio of the speeds measured by the two sensor signals gives a
measured value for belt slippage.
Setting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring
Parameter
Setting
P18.01
= YES activates the monitoring system
P18.02
Select the source for the first speed signal

Speed: the main tacho on the belt drive is used
DIxx: an additional sensor is used
P18.04
Characteristic value of the first sensor in impulses per section
P18.05
Signal input for the second measuring channel
P18.06
Characteristic value of the second sensor in impulses per section
P18.07
Tolerance threshold level for the difference of the speed measured across both measuring channels in relation to the actual speed.
P18.08
Definition of behavior if slippage above the permissible threshold is identified.
P18.09
Tab. 3 : Setting and adjusting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 31 -
Operating and Control Access
5 Operating and Control Access

DISOCONT Tersus can be operated using the following approaches:
Operating source
Operation under normal

circumstances
Service work
VHM touch
VHM touch
VHM Operating Panel
User Interface
Type
(fixed)
VHM Operating Panel
(mobile per cable or wireless)
Fieldbus from the control computer
(X)
Host computer
Web browser via PC
VHM with PC keyboard
EasyServe PC software
EasyServe
Tab. 4 : Operating access
DANGER
Feeding can be started with the operating panel. This switches on drives
and bulk material may flow. The operator must ensure that no damage can
be caused by beginning feeding before doing so.
Dangerous situations may arise if communication is interrupted while the
device is being operated via a non-permanent line (pluggable cable, wireless). Therefore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved
for service work only.
5.1
Connection between VHM Operating Panel and Scale Controller (VCU)
After a loss of power at the operating panel, the console will try automatically to reconnect to the scales with
which it was communicating before the power failure after a specific, adjustable period of time. During this time
the 'Feeder' page can again be selected to select a different scale.
If a data connection exists and communication with a different scales is to be activated, the existing connection
must first be closed. This can be done after logging on as a privileged user with the key '<->Scale'.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-established
after several attempts, the operating panel will open the configuration dialog.
The selection of a scales is shown in the following chapters, depending on the medium of communication.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 33 -
5.1.1
Connection via Ethernet Cable
Precondition: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the control unit
VCU is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
The channel 'Ethernet' must be selected in the operating panel configuration (Configuring the Communication
Path (Com)).
Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches for VCU controllers in the network and
displays the outcome on the page 'Feeder'. A scales can be selected and a data connection to it established by
pressing the corresponding key.
5.1.2
Connection via Bluetooth
Preconditions: A bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The scale
has to be in the range of the function. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BVH2406.
The Bluetooth channel has to be selected (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the configuration of
the operator panel.
Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for bluetooth adapters within range.
Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controller VCUs. The outcome is shown on the
page Feeder.
Note: A complete search for all bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is displayed
during the search. There will also be Bluetooth adapters shown that no connection can be established to, either
because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or there is already a different data connection.
Scales can be selected and a data connection to them established by pressing the corresponding key. It may
take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown in the header of
the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: Connection can be established to one scales only, assuming the scales are not already connected to another bluetooth adapter. The other connection may first need to be closed. If there is another connection, the
operating panel will try constantly to connect.
If bluetooth is used, the scales to whose bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only scales
with which communication can be made. The ethernet destination address may not be changed in the VHM.
5.1.3
Connection via RS485
Prerequisites: The operator panel and controller have to be in the same RS485 network. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)).
Once the communication path has been selected, the operator panel will switch to the Feeder page. This is
where the address of VCU is set. The last digits of the Ethernet address (P25.07) of the scale controller will be
used again for addressing at the RS485 bus.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 34 -
November 2013
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communication
can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking beside the address number.
Otherwise this marking will be red.
Communication with the scales can be established with the key 'Con.Scale'.
Note: The operating panel is the master at the bus. Therefore only one operating panel can be connected to the
bus at any one time.
5.2
Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU)
5.2.1
Connection via Ethernet
If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using ethernet.
Preconditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an ethernet cable to the scales network.
Note: Use either an uncoded VCU socket or, if using a red-coded socket, use a special cable (yellow) for the
connection.
The EasyServe address must be in the same ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. If necessary the address can be changed by EasyServe in the scanner. A scales can also be addressed using a router if the network has already been configured. The scales address would then be entered manually, not using the scanner.
The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork.
The EasyServe Connection I Ethernet (Scanner) menu item is the easiest way to select. This will display all of
the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be altered and a connection to the
scales made here.
If the scale is connected to a different subnet, it can be selected manually using Connection | Ethernet (manual)
and entering the IP address of the scale.
5.2.2
Connection via RS-232
RS-232 is used to make a connection in special cases only, e.g. when no connection can be made via ethernet.
It may be necessary to establish a connection via RS-232 if there is a power failure to a device while a software
program is being loaded into it in order to re-load the software.
Precondition: The PC serial interface (COM) is connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details see the
system manual BV-H2406.
Use the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...' to connect.
The only permissible transfer format is 38400 baud, 8-O-1. Select the PC COM port and the address of the
scales. The is stored in scales parameter P21.01 Own Address.
Note: A software update can take up to 20 minutes using the RS-232 interface. Other functions work slower than
they would if the connection was made using Ethernet.
5.2.3
Connection via WLAN
We recommend using W LAN to make a wireless connection to a scales.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 35 -
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a W LAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem has
been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales. The PC
also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP address.
In general the W LAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in the
modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet connection were made by cable.
5.2.4
A connection is more complicated to establish via bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be accessed is the one to whose bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Preconditions: Scales and PC are equipped with bluetooth adapters.
Establishing a connection:
1
Start the bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.
Select the desired scales from the list of adapters displayed.

Note: It will be necessary to restart the PC if the name of the scales was changed in order to display
the changed name.
Begin establishing a connection with the bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353.
The PC user must enter a PAN once the connection to the bluetooth adapter has been established.
The address of the bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other scales
in the network cannot be addressed.
5.3
Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller
Preconditions: The PC has an ethernet connection to the VCU. Java is installed on the PC and can be started.
Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages to occur.
Establishing the connection: The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser
address line. This URL arises as follows:
< Adresse>/hmi/start_<Skalierung>x.html
Address: VCU IP address
Scaling: size of the display on the screen. The values 2, 3 or 4 can be entered.
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start_2x.html
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 36 -
November 2013
The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel with the exception of the field in which a different scales can be selected, which is not available. The configuration dialogs for
the VHM operating panel itself are also not available. Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry
keyboard is not shown on the screen.
5.4
Web Server in the Scales Controller VCU
The controller comes with a web server that opens a scales 'homepage'. This homepage is available in English
only.
Preconditions: The PC has an ethernet connection to the VCU.
Establishing the connection: The IP address of the controller must be entered into the browser address line.
Various data from the controller can be called up in the left-hand navigation bar.
Navigation entry
Function
HMI_2x
Open at a different scale the same controller interface as is in the operating panel. Also
refer to: Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller [36]
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Events
Most recent stored events (alarms, warnings, etc.)
Parameter changes
Most recent parameter alterations
Command Log
List of certain commands, e.g. start / stop
Totalizer hourly
Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values can also be viewed
on the operating panel VHM.
The minute after the full hour at which the saving occurs can be set in P20.01.
Totalizer daily
Table of daily-saved totalizing integrators / counters.

The time after 00:00 at which the saving occurs can be set in P20.02.
Tab. 5 : Functions available on the controller web page
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are recorded with the entry time. The table is refreshed only
when it is called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with standard programs using selectcopy-paste.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 37 -
Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI
6 Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI

This chapter describes control of the DT-9 using the Touch Screen HMI (Human-Machine Interface).
Notes:
1. The following values and settings remain stored after power failure:
Counter readings
Parameter settings
Setpoints
Service values
Counter pulses pending.
2. This manual uses the abbreviations "[Button Name...] button", e.g. [HOME] button, to describe the buttons
displayed on the touch screen HMI.
3. Text entry fields on the HMI are indicated by a white box surrounded by a gray rectangle. To enter text, tap
the desired text entry field to select it. A keyboard will appear on the screen. W hen you have finished entering text, press the [OK] button to save your changes and exit the keyboard. To exit the keyboard without saving changes, press the [EXIT] button.
4. In the event of a power failure while the feeder was running in remote mode, the system will restart in remote
mode and, if the running contact is active, continue to feed coal.
6.1
Initial Configuration
When the DT-9 is first powered up, the HMI will automatically log in to the connected DT-9 controller. In order to
change the settings of the HMI itself, it is necessary to log out of the DT-9 and log into the HMI via the following
steps:
1. From the Home screen, press the [Login] button and enter the DT-9 password (the default is 7353). The
Home screen will reappear and the [Login] button will change to [Logout] to indicate that you have successfully logged in to the DT-9.
2. Press the [Sel. Scale] button. A prompt will appear asking if you really want to exit the scale. Press [YES].
3. The main HMI configuration screen will now appear. A list of available DT-9 controllers on the local subnet
will be displayed on the upper left portion of the screen, and the main function buttons will be displayed along
the right edge. The display function buttons are described in the following subsections. Most of the function
buttons will be grayed out and unavailable. To gain full access, press the [Login] button and enter the HMI
password (the default is 7353). Press the [Start] button to return to the main HMI configuration screen, or
press the [Change Password] button to change the display password. All of the function buttons will now be
available, indicating that you have successfully logged in to the HMI.
6.1.1
The 'Network' Screen
Press the [VHM Addr.] button to change the network settings of the HMI. This screen allows you to set the IP
Address, Subnet, and Gateway of the HMI. These settings should be obtained from your network administrator.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes you have made to these settings before exiting.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 39 -
6.1.2
The 'Display Settings' Screen
Press the [Display] button to adjust the HMI display settings. The Inactivity Timeout parameter defines the
length of time that the HMI will remain at full brightness after being touched before entering Sleep Mode and
dimming the display. The Working Brightness parameter adjusts the brightness of the display during normal
operation, and the Sleeping Brightness parameter adjusts the brightness of the display during Sleep Mode.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes you have made to these settings before exiting.
6.1.3
The 'Feeder' Screen
Press the [Feeder] button to select the DT-9 controller that the HMI will connect to. A list of all available DT-9
controllers on the local subnet will be displayed, and the selected controller will be indicated with a check mark.
To connect to a different DT-9, press the check box next to the desired controller and then press the [Select]
button. The HMI will then connect to the new DT-9 the next time it is power cycled or when the [Con. Scale] button is pressed. To rescan the local subnet, press the [Scan] button.
6.1.4
The 'Configuration' Screen
Press the [Config] button to adjust the networking options of the HMI. The URL of start page parameter defines
the start page of the DT-9s embedded web server. The Start timeout in seconds parameter defines the amount
of time that the HMI will attempt to connect to the attached DT-9 before defaulting to the HMI configuration
screen.
6.1.5
The 'Communication' Screen
Press the [Com] button to change the method by which the HMI will communicate with an attached DT-9 controller. The available options are Ethernet, Bluetooth, and RS485. The factory default is Ethernet, and this
should not be changed.
6.1.6
The 'Calibration' Screen
Press the [Calibration] button and follow the on-screen prompts to calibrate the touch screen.
6.1.7
Exiting HMI Configuration
Press the [Con. Scale] button to exit the HMI calibration screen and return to the DT-9 Home screen.
6.2
Display Functions
6.2.1
The 'Home' Screen
The Home screen is the first screen displayed after the HMI has finished booting. It displays the current status of
the feeder, and contains the main operating controls.
The Mode Select buttons are located on the bottom left of the Home screen, and are used to select the operating
mode of the feeder (See sections Operating Modes - Remote [12] and Operating Modes OFF/Maintenance
[12] for more information on operating modes).
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 40 -
November 2013
6.2.1.1 Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode

Press the [Off/Maint] button to place the feeder in Off/Maintenance mode. The background color of the Home
screen will turn yellow to indicate that Off/Maintenance mode has been selected. In this mode, the plant
start/stop signals and demand signals are ignored. The feeder can be run in the forward or reverse directions by
pressing the [Run >>] or [Run <<] buttons on the Home screen, as long as there is no material on the feeder
belt. The feeder will run in the desired direction at the speed defined in P02.16 Maintenance Speed. The [Stop]
button will stop the feeder. Pressing and holding the [<< Jog] or [Jog >>] buttons will cause the feeder to jog
backwards or forwards for as long as the button is pressed. The jog speed is the same as the Maintenance
Speed defined in P02.16. The feeder can be jogged with or without material on the belt.
6.2.1.2 Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode

Press the [Remote] button to place the feeder in Remote mode. The background color of the Home screen will
turn white to indicate that Remote mode has been selected. At this point, the feeder is ready to receive commands from the plants control system. Upon receipt of a feeder start command and a demand signal from the
control system, the feeder will begin to operate and the feeder graphic on the Home screen will indicate that the
feeder is running in the forward direction. As material fills the belt, the Belt Load and Material Total values displayed on the Home screen will begin to update. The feeder will respond automatically to the changing demands
of the plants control system until it receives a feeder stop command or until the [Off/Maint] button is pressed. If an
alarm occurs, it will be displayed in a banner across the top of the Home screen and can be cleared by pressing
the [Ack Event] button. If a trip occurs, the feeder will be stopped and the display will automatically switch to
Off/Maintenance mode. The trip can be cleared by resolving the problem that caused the trip and pressing the
[Ack Event] button. Remote mode can then be resumed by pressing the [Remote] button.
6.2.2
The 'Trend' Screen
The Trend screen is a customizable line graph that can be used to plot various data items that are logged by
the DT-9 over time. See Appendix C for a list of available data items.
6.2.3
The 'Values' Screen
The Values screen displays information about the feeder on two sub screens, which can be accessed by pressing the [Values] or [Totals] buttons.
The [Totals] button displays the following data:
Material Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder, and is the sum of the Gravimetric and
Volumetric Totals.
Gravimetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Gravimetric
Mode.
Volumetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Volumetric Mode.
The [Reset] button will reset all three totalizers. The total values cannot be recovered after the [Reset] button
is pressed.
The [Values] button displays the following data:
Belt Speed shows the current speed of the belt in feet or meters per second.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 41 -
Belt Load shows the weight of the material on the belt per unit of belt length in pounds per foot or kilograms
per meter.
Speed shows the shaft speed of the belt drive motor in revolutions per minute.
Density shows the currently calculated density of the material on the belt in pounds per cubic foot or kilograms per cubic meter.
6.2.4
The 'Setup' Screen
The Setup Screen is used to configure the DT-9 and to access the various log files that are stored by the controller.
The following buttons are initially shown on the Setup screen: [Data Log], [Event Log], [Param Log], [Parameter], and [] (Right Arrow).
Pressing the Right Arrow button causes the display to scroll to the following additional buttons: [Trim], [Defaults],
[Simulation], [Calibration], and [Set Time]. Pressing the Right Arrow button again will cause the display to scroll
back to the initial list of buttons.
The [Trim], [Defaults], and [Calibration] buttons will be grayed out and unavailable unless the user is logged in to
the DT-9. The user must also log in before changing any of the parameters that are accessed via the [Parameter] button.
To log in to the DT-9, press the [Login] button, enter the DT-9 password (the default is 7353), and press [Login]. The previously selected screen will reappear and the [Login] button will change to [Logout] to indicate that
you have successfully logged in to the DT-9.
The following subsections describe the various screens that are accessed via the buttons on the Setup screen.
6.2.4.1 Data Log Values

The Data Log Values screen displays the hourly and daily material totals in pounds or kilograms. The Up and
Down Arrow buttons can be used to scroll from hour to hour or day to day to view the previously saved totals.
6.2.4.2 Event Log Values

The Event Log Values screen displays the Event Log and Command Log. The Up and Down Arrow buttons can
be used to scroll through the various events and user commands that were recorded by the DT-9.
6.2.4.3 Parameter Log Values

The Parameter Log Values screen displays a log of all the DT-9 parameters that have been modified by the
user. The Up and Down Arrow buttons can be used to scroll through the various parameter changes that were
recorded by the DT-9.
6.2.4.4 Parameter Setup

The Parameter screen is used to display and edit the various parameters available on the DT-9. Refer to Section 9 of this manual for a detailed description of the available parameters and settings.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 42 -
November 2013
The top half of the Parameter screen displays the current Parameter Block. The bottom half of the screen displays the various parameters that are available in the selected Parameter Block. Press the Up and Down Arrow
buttons to scroll through the various blocks and parameters.
To change the value of a parameter, press the [Edit] button (Note: the user must be logged in to change parameter values). If the parameter contains a list of possible settings, a set of Up and Down Arrow buttons will appear
and can be used to scroll through the available options. If the parameter contains a discrete value, a text box will
appear. Press the [Save] button to save any changes that were made to the parameter value, or press the [Exit]
button to exit without saving any changes.
6.2.4.5 Trimming the Analog Inputs and Outputs

The Trim screen is used to trim the analog inputs and outputs.
Any active analog input or feedback must be matched or adjusted to the DT-9 controls. Two signals levels must
be adjusted for each channel used. The first signal level, MIN, corresponds to the lower value being adjusted
and is transmitted when the feed rate is at 0%. The second level, MAX, corresponds to the higher value being
adjusted and is transmitted when the feed rate is at 100 %.
Note: If the feeder is not equipped with a remote analog demand input, the input alignment can be omitted. If an
analog output signal is not present, the output alignment section can be omitted.
Note: Unlike the 196NT, it is necessary to trim the analog output channel (normally AO 1) that is used to control
the motor speed control.
I/O Channel Adjustment
When setting the output channels use a meter to measure the signal on:
AO 1: Connected to wires 142, 143 & 144 (X6-6 and X6-7)
AO 2: Connected to wires 139, 140 & 141 (X6-8 and X6-9).
When setting the input channel source the signal to:
AI 1: Connected to wires SIG+ & SIG- (X6-3, X6-4 or X6-3, X6-5).
Follow These Steps:
1. Press [Trim] to initiate the Trim function. Analog Output Channel 1 is always the first one displayed. To access other channels use the arrow up or down buttons. Press [Exit] to get back to the main screen.
2. When aligning the output channels, the minimum and maximum analog signals are sent by the DT-9. The
user measures and enters the actual values. The AO 1 values are stored in P17.11 and P17.12, and the AO
2 values are stored in P17.13 and P17.14.
a) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the measure mode for output channel AO 1 Min. The DT-9 will
output the minimum signal value. The display will ask for the measured value. Enter the value measured on
your meter in the Analog value measured text box then press [Save] to store.
b) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the measure mode for output channel AO 1 Max. The DT-9 will
output the maximum signal value. The display will ask for the measured value. Enter the value measured on
your meter in the Analog value measured text box then press [Save] to store.
c) Repeat steps a. and b. for output channel AO 2.
d) Press the [Exit] button to exit the Trim function.
3. When aligning the input channel AI 1, the minimum and maximum analog demand signals are applied to the
input signal wires of the DT-9. The analog demand is measured then stored in P17.01 Analog Input 1 Min
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 43 -
and P17.02 Analog Input 1 Max.

a) Press [Trim] then use the arrow keys to select Analog Input 1 Min. Press [Start] to enter the measure
mode. The first value measured is the minimum analog demand signal AI 1. Use either a precision source or,
preferably, a minimum demand signal directly from the combustion control system. The display will show the
value being measured from the source. Press [Save] to store the value.
b) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the maximum analog demand signal AI 1 and press [Start] to enter the measure mode. Use either a precision source or, preferably, a maximum demand signal directly from
the combustion control system. The display will show the value being measured from the source. Press
[Save] to store the value.
6.2.4.6 Restoring the Factory Default Settings

The Defaults screen allows the user to overwrite all parameter settings with the factory default values. The
[Custom] button will overwrite all parameters with the original values as set by Stock Equipment at the time that
the feeders were shipped. The [Factory] button will overwrite all parameters with the factory default values. In
general, the [Custom] button should always be used when resetting the parameters.
6.2.4.7 Simulation Mode

The Simulation Mode allows for operation of the feeder without material for test purpose, training or demonstration.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
The feedrate indicated and the feedback signal differ from the real rate of
flow.
Wrong of missing coal feeding. Wrong material totalizer.
When Simulation Mode the loadcell signal and the speed signal will be simulated in a way that the actual rate
shown follows the demand signal. This allows for.
Check of the interface to the plant control
Check of fieldbus signals
Demonstration and training
For coal feeding operation the Simulation Mode must be switched off again.
6.2.4.8 Calibrating the Feeder

The Calibration screen allows the user to access the various calibration functions. Refer to Section Calibration
[20] of this manual for a complete description of the available calibration functions. Press the Up and Down
Arrow buttons to select the desired calibration function, then press the [Start] button and follow the on-screen
instructions. W hen the calibration function has completed, press the [Save] button to save the new calibration
values or press the [Exit] button to exit without saving.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 44 -
November 2013
6.2.4.9 Setting the Current Time and Date

The [Set Time] button allows the user to edit the current Date and Time. The current values are displayed, and
can be edited via a text box.
6.3
Typical Operating Procedures
1. When filling the bunker, first close the inlet valve to minimize the filling pressure on the feeder and to avoid
compaction of the material at the feeder inlet. This precaution is unnecessary if the bunker is refilled while at
least 8 to 10 feet (2.43 to 3.05 meters) of material remain in it.
2. When starting the feeder, open the inlet valve slowly to load the belt at a controlled rate and to minimize
compaction at the feeder inlet.
3. Energize the feeder controls at the disconnect switch in the control cabinet. Observe that the HMI is illuminated.
4. From the [HOME] screen, press the [Remote] button. Upon receipt of a customer-generated feeder start
command and a demand signal from the combustion control system, the feeder begins to operate and the
display indicates that the feeder is running forward.
5. As material fills the feeder belt, the display indicates that the feeder is feeding material.
6. The DT-9 will begin totalizing the weight and updating the current feeder information.
7. The feeder will respond automatically to the changing demands of the combustion control system until it is
de-energized.
8. For a brief stop with a loaded belt, press the [OFF/Maint.] button
9. For a clean shutdown with an empty belt, close the inlet valve while the feeder is still running. When the belt
is emptied, press the [OFF/Maint] button. This procedure is recommended whenever the feeder will be inactive for a long period of time, since it eliminates the possibility of material compaction at the feeder inlet due
to consolidation caused by its own weight.
10. To jog the feeder belt forward, press the [OFF/Maint] button followed by the [Jog >>] button on the microprocessor keyboard for as long as motion is required. Pressing the [<< Jog] button will jog the feeder belt backwards.
11. To operate the feeder in the MAINTENANCE mode for inspection or servicing, press the [OFF/Maint] button
followed by the [Run >>] button. The feeder will run forward at the speed programmed in P02.16 Maintenance Speed. Pressing the [<< Run] button will cause the feeder to run backwards at the same speed.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 45 -
Operation Using the 196NT Display
7 Operation Using the 196NT Display

The VCU20103 does not support the 196NT display.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 47 -
Operation Using EasyServe
8 Operation Using EasyServe

This chapter describes control of the DT-9 using EasyServe.
See Schenck Process EasyServe Operation Manual (BV-H2185GB)
8.1
Program EasyServe VPC 20150
Designed as PC program for DISOCONT commissioning and servicing, EasyServe lets you perform any operat
ing and calibrating operation. The program is operable under Microsoft W indows 2000/XP/Vista/7 operating
systems. The control unit lets you perform all controlling and calibrating operations without restrictions. The menu
control permits flexible and easy adjustment, lets you access service data, operate the scale for servicing,
and customize the menu texts on PC screen and all operator units.
8.2
Minimum System Requirements
Pentium or CPU-compatible
900MB free hard disk space
VGA display, 32768 color monitor recommended
Operating systems Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 with latest service packs
Mouse or other type of pointer
CD-ROM drive.
8.3
Installation
EasyServe
Insert CD VPC20150 into CD-ROM drive. Normally, installation starts automatically. If not, open Windows explorer select your CD-ROM drive. To open, double click on file. The automatic installation program prompts you
through a number of dialogs, for you to confirm.
Upgrade
If an old EasyServe version is available on your PC it must be removed (using Control Panel | Add or Remove
Programs) before the installation can be performed.
Attention
To be able to install the EasyServe program, your name must be registered as user in the group of administra
tors under W indows 2000/XP/Vista/7. To execute program, main user rights are required.
8.4
Start Program and Connect to Feeder
Before EasyServe can be used it must be installed on a laptop or PC, an Ethernet cable must be installed between the DT-9 and the PC and the PC must be configured for direct Ethernet communications. This process is
described below.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 49 -
CAUTION
DO NOT use the RJ45 connector marked X96 to connect the DT-9 to a laptop or PC.
This connector is designed to supply power for the Touch Screen HMI through
normally unused connections. Connecting a PC to X96 could cause damage to
the DT-9, the PC or both. A red cover is normally installed over this connector to
prevent it from being used with a PC.
8.4.1
Connecting to Feeder
The EasyServe program and an Ethernet connection are used for most DT-9 Programming operations. The DT9 cannot generate an IP address for the computer running EasyServe so the PC must be set to a static IP address. The DT-9 default IP address is 192.168.240.1 and the PC must be on the same subnet. Set the PC address to 192.168.240.254 as starting point. One of several ways to do this is listed below.
Windows XP
1. Select Network Connections in Control Panel
2. Double click on the Local Area Connection line to bring up Local Area Connection Status dialog box. If you
have more then one Local Area Connection you probably want to select the one that is not connected.
3. Click on the Properties button (under the General tab) in the Local Area Connection Status dialog box. This
will bring up the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.
4. Under the General tab, scroll down to Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) line, select this line then press the Properties button. This will bring up the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.
5. In the General tab, the Obtain an IP address automatically button will normally be set, and the Alternate Configuration tab will be visible. Select the Alternate Configuration tab.
6. If an alternate IP address has already been entered, record this value. Select the User Configured button
then enter the IP address (192.168.240.254) and the Subnet mask (255.255.255.0) to use with the DT-9.
Leave the Default gateway field blank.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the alternate IP address once the DT-9 update has been completed.
When the Ethernet port is configured as described above, the PC/Laptop can be connected to a DT-9 or a
company network without changing the settings.
7. If the Ethernet port has been set to a fixed IP address, the Obtain an IP address automatically button will not
be set and the Alternate Configuration tab will not be visible. In this case either the fixed IP address can be
changed, by changing the IP address and Subnet mask fields in the Use the following IP address: box, or by
selecting the Obtain an IP address automatically button and following steps 5 and 6. In either case, the previous IP address and Subnet mask should be recorded prior to making any changes.
8. Select OK and back out.
9. Make the physical connection to the DT-9 by installing a CAT 5 cable (either straight through or crossover)
between the PC Ethernet port and any of the RJ45 connectors on the DT-9 except X96. X96 uses normally
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 50 -
November 2013
unused connection to supply power to the Touch Screen HMI and connecting a PC to X96 could cause
damage to the DT-9, the PC or both. See the warning above.
10. Start EasyServe and select the Connection | MODBUS TCP (Scanner) option. The controller if connected
should be displayed. Select the controller and select Connect.
11. If there are more than one Ethernet connection on the computer EasyServe may have a problem deciding
which one to use. Rebooting the computer (not just logging out) while the DT-9 is connected and running will
usually fix this problem. If this doesnt work the other connection may have to be disabled.
Windows Vista
1. Select Network Connections in Control Panel.
2. Double click on Network and Sharing Center.
3. Click on the Manage Network Connections line, on the left side of the window.
4. Double click on the network connection that will be used to communicate with the DT-9. This is normally
marked Local Area Connection.
5. In the Local Area Connection Status window, click on the Properties button. This will bring up the Local Area
Connection Properties dialog box.
6. Proceed to step 4. above.
8.4.2
Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters
Once a feeder connection has been established, you have to register to make any parameter changes or operate the feeder. To do this click on the red lock toolbar button it will change to a yellow key (or go to Edit Register or press F2 on the keyboard).
HINT
Once registered any parameter changes or commands are sent to the
feeder immediately.
To unregister click the yellow key toolbar button and make it go back to red lock (or go to Edit Unregister or
press F3 on the keyboard).
8.5
Parameter Set
Once connected to a DT-9 go to View Parameter set: Online to access the parameter set. Its displayed along
the left side of the screen organized by parameter block. To view the parameters click on a block and they will be
displayed on the right.
At the bottom of the parameter set the events and hardware configuration can be accessed.
Events
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 51 -
All the events for the DT-9 are listed here in groups similar to the parameters. Click on a group to see the
event names and numbers on the right. The parameter that corresponds to the event will be listed after
the name. If you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that controls it.
Hardware configuration
This contains a list of all the Analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs/outputs and Load Cells. Just like the
event list if you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that controls it.
8.5.1
.PAR Files
Feeder files for EasyServe are saved as .PAR files. To load a .PAR go to File | Open. Once the file has been
opened, the parameters can be viewed and changed. The background color remains a bluish-gray as long as
you are just editing a .PAR file and have not loaded it to a DT-9.
To send the file, a feeder connection is required. Once the connection has been established, the background
changes to white and displays the parameter set currently on the DT-9. Open the .PAR file you wish to load or
go if it was already opened you can just go to View and select the parameter set by name. The background
should go back to the bluish gray color as before. Go to File | Transmit, check the box of the parameter set to be
loaded and click OK. Click OK on the next pop up saying it may take a minute.
8.5.2
Read/change Parameters
1. Loaded .PAR file

Once a file has been loaded, the parameters can be viewed and edited. The parameter set file will be
displayed on the left hand side. Click on a parameter block on the left to display the parameters on the
right. To edit the parameter click in the box and enter using the keyboard or use the pull down tab to set
the desired value.
2. Connected to feeder controller
Once a connection has been established and you have registered the parameters can be edited as described in item 1).
8.5.3
Loading Custom Default Parameters
A set of custom default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. Loading custom defaults will load the
parameters setup by Stock Equipment.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Edited parameters and calibrating values are reset.
We recommend that you print parameters using the Print Parameters function
before loading default values.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 52 -
November 2013
To load:
Go to Tools | Commissioning | Load Custom Defaults. EasyServe will ask for verification that you want to
load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
8.5.4
Loading Factory Default Parameters
A set of Factory default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. These are the controller default values,
NOT the initial Stock values.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
The Load Default Parameters operation will reset all calibration values and
any parameters that have been edited, and will also reset the Custom Default Parameters.
Stock recommends that parameters be printed or saved to disk before loading
default values. Stock does not recommend loading factory defaults except after
a firmware update, or when a memory error is detected.
To load:
Go to Tools Commissioning Load Custom Defaults. EasyServe will ask for verification that you want to
load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
8.5.5
Expert Mode
Parameter access permissions can be modified using expert mode. The three options available are:
R: Read access only. The parameter cannot be edited.
W: Writable. The parameter can be viewed and edited.
H: Hide. The parameter cannot be viewed or edited unless in Expert mode.
To access Expert mode click Edit | Expert Mode (or press F6). EasyServe will prompt for a password to enter
Expert Mode. The default password is 7353. Press enter or click ok once the password is entered. Now when
viewing parameters, there will be a square to the left of the parameter value with one of the above letters in it
representing the parameter state. Click on the square to change status.
8.5.6
Print Parameters
A printout of the parameter set can be done by going to File | Print. A window will pop up giving you a few
checkbox options for what to include on the printout:
Only changed Parameters Parameters that have been changed since the last loading of a parameter file.
Only visible Parameters Does not print any parameters that have been set to hidden in expert mode.
Hardware configuration This will add a list of the analog/digital inputs/outputs, and Load cells to the end of
the parameter set on the printout
Click print when ready to proceed with printout.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 53 -
8.6
Operating the Feeder
8.6.1
Scale Operation Screens
The main screen of EasyServe can either display the parameter set (as described above) or Scale (feeder) Operation 1 and 2. To change this go to View then select one of the options above the line on the pull down
menu. A DT-9 connection is required to access the scale operation or online parameter set screens.
Scale Operation 1:
This is the screen to use when operating the feeder from EasyServe. The feeder can be placed in remote, local and jog from this screen. Feeder operation is the same as it is when using the 196NT display
(See section Operation using the 196NT Display). This is also where the totalizers can be reset. Along
with this real time feeder, information is displayed on the right side.
Note: To operate the feeder, you must have a connection and be registered.
Remote - Click the remote button to put the feeder in REMOTE mode. The button will change to
OFF/Maint and Remote will be displayed to the left. Click the button again to put the feeder back in OFF
mode.
Local - Click the RUN>> button to run the feeder in LOCAL mode. Click the button again to stop the
feeder and place it back in OFF mode. The RUN<< button will run the feeder in reverse.
Jog - Click and hold to JOG>> the feeder. Click and hold the JOG<< to jog the feeder in reverse.
Reset Totalizer - Click button to reset the totalizer.
Scale Operation 2:
This screen gives status information only. The feeder can not be controlled. Along with normal operational info, the load cells can be monitored if they are connected.
8.6.2
Events
Events will be displayed across the bottom of the EasyServe screen (The event can also be viewed by going to
View | Events, bringing up the event window). Alarms and warnings can be acknowledged, after correcting the
situation, by clicking on the red X toolbar button. The event message on the bottom will go back to No Events.
8.6.3
Calibration
See section Calibration [20] for feeder calibration instructions.
8.6.4
Service Values
The service values on EasyServe are displayed in pop-up windows. Up to ten windows can be opened at one
time. To open a service value window go to View Service Values, and select one. There is no difference in the
ten windows the same information can be accessed from any of them. The values are divided up by eight tabs
across the top to access different information as listed below.
1. MV 1
Load cell info
Tachometer Hz
Speed set point
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 54 -
November 2013
Belt load info.

2. MV 2
Software info
Hardware info
Totalizer pulses
Belt motion monitor.
3. AI
Analog input signals.
4. AO
Analog output signals.
5. V103-DI
Digital input status.
6. V103-DO
Digital output status.
7. OP1
Feedrate info
Totalizers
Belt speed and load
Density.
8. OP2
Does not contain any values with current DT-9 version.
8.6.5
Trends
Like the service values, ten trend windows can be opened. W ithin each trend window the following values can be
viewed.
Feeder On
Flow Rate
Totalizer 1
Totalizer 2
Belt Load
Belt Speed
Actual Setpoint
Deviation
To open a trend window, add the desired values, and modify the trend, follow these steps.
1. Go to View Trend and select one of the ten trends.
2. The trend window will pop up. W hatever the last selected values were, for that trend window number, will be
displayed.
3. To change the scaling of the graph or add a name click the third button from the left on the top of the trend
window (the modify button). A window will pop up, edit the fields in the top right to the desired values.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 55 -
4. While still in the modify window click on value 1 on the left side.
5. Here you can select what you want to appear on the trend. To add this value to the trend make sure the display field is set to yes. Next, click the signal source button. A window will pop up where you can select one of
the above mentioned values. Select the one you want and click apply.
6. The name and color can be modified for each value also in the fields below the signal source button.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add as many values as you want to the trend.
8. Click save and close to apply the settings to the trend.
Note: The first two buttons at the top left are for starting record and stopping the trend. The fourth button (red X)
deletes the recorded trends.
8.6.6
Setting Time
To adjust the date/time of the DT-9, go to Tools | Commissioning | Adjust Date/Time. Select the date/time in the
window that pops up then click OK.
8.6.7
Options
The EasyServe options can be accessed by going to Tools | Options. The options window opens and has 4 tabs.
This window lets you change language preferences, communication settings, display settings, print settings and
working folder for the parameter set loaded. You can also load the factory default parameters, STOCK DOES
NOT RECOMMEND LOADING FACTORY DEFAULTS.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 56 -
November 2013
Testing
9 Testing
9.1
Calibration Weight Test
Calibration weight testing performs the following functions:

Check for mechanical or electrical errors.
Can check system linearity.
Requirements
Calibration weight.
Follow these steps:
Enter effective check weight into Parameter P10.08 Calibration Weight.
Call up the "TW: Weight Check" calibrating function (see Calibration [20] item).
Deviations of measured value from actual value may be caused by
Platform distortion
Improper alignment
Interferential forces acting on load cell cable.
9.2
Chain Test
Chain testing performs the following functions:

Check for mechanical or electrical errors.
Can check system linearity.
Check for weigh system alignment errors.
Requirements
Calibration chain.
Follow these steps:
Enter chain test weight in Parameter P10.09 Test Chain Weight.
Call up the "TC: Span Calibration" calibrating function (see Calibration [20] item).
Deviations of measured value from actual value may be caused by
Platform distortion
Improper alignment
Interferential forces acting on load cell cable.
Weight roller mis-alignment.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 57 -
Testing
9.3
Material Test
No check or calibration using check weights can perfectly simulate actual conditions. The actual accuracy can
only be determined with a material test. The DT-9 allows errors found during this testing to be easily corrected
using Parameter P10.05 Range Correction TM.
Requirements
Handling route from weighing platform to material collecting point is totally clean.
No material is diverted during the test.
If feed screws or air slides are provided between platform and collecting point, run the system with material
for approx. 30m minutes before starting the material test. This will allow the normal build-ups to form on feed
units.
Do not remove dust or clean the equipment during the test.
Hoppers or vehicles transporting the material to a legal-for-trade commercial scale have been cleaned and
re-weighed before filling (tare weight).
Example:
The figure shows the operating principle of a material test.
Within a certain period of time, e.g. 15 min., an actual material amount MW of 4.9 t is fed. The material value MA
displayed on DISOCONT is 5.0 t. The new value of P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN is computed using the
following formula:
Parameter P09.01 (new) = Parameter P09.01 (old) * MW / MA
In our example, value is 0.98.
Enter new value into Parameter P10.05 Range Correction TM.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 58 -
November 2013
Parameters
10 Parameters
This chapter discusses the parameters available with DT-9. Some parameters are not normally used on Stock
coal feeders. These parameters are hidden by default and are marked as Normally Hidden in the parameter list
below. These parameters can be viewed, modified or made visible using the Expert Mode in EasyServe. Use the
Edit | Expert Mode menu selection or the F6 key. The default password is 7353.
10.1
General Information
Parameters are variable features or data used to adapt DT-9 to the application.
There are two principal types of parameter:
Selection parameters - for selection from multiple Options
Select characteristic values (e.g., display unit, control behavior)
Select event classes (determine reaction on events)
Select hardware configuration (source, unit, channel, level)
Numeric parameters - for direct input of numeric values
Parameters can be changed during operation. However, parameters influencing measuring result, e.g., display
filters, must not be changed.
Default Values:
The DT-9 controller saves two different sets of default parameter value, referred to as Factory Defaults and Custom Defaults. Factory Defaults are set in the controller firmware and cannot be modified. These values provide a
common starting point for new systems. Custom Defaults can be modified in the field and can store the custom
settings used for a particular installation. Custom Defaults are set during factory testing.
All parameters are preset with default values that dont normally need to be changed. You can recall default values using the "Load Factory Defaults" function and the Load Custom Defaults function.
Identification:
Parameters are organized by function group and identified as follows:
"Group number - parameter number - parameter name", e.g., P01.02 Event: Communication ARM7.
Parameters Attributes:
The DT-9 is versatile system that can be user programmed for a variety of application and many of the parameters required for one application are not required for others. To simplify operation, each parameter has a parameter attribute that can be set to hidden (H), read only (R) or read/write (W). Special parameters that are not normally used in Stock feeders are factory set to default values and then hidden. Their current values, default values and hidden status can be changed in EasyServe, using Expert Mode (Menu: Edit | Expert Mode). The default password is 7353.
Dependencies:
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 59 -
Parameters
There are parameters whose availability depends on other parameters setting values. These dependencies are
stated in the header of every parameter description.
Abbreviations:
Hardware Devices
Description
VCU
Main control unit type VCU 201xx
VHM
Operator Panel (control unit)
ARM7
Redundant volumetric control processor in VCU
196NT
Former controller generation
DT-9
DISOCONT Tersus system for coal feeding
Signal
Source/Destination
Description
FB
Fieldbus (optional interface required)
OP
Operator Panel (control unit type VHM)
DI
Digital Input
DO
Digital Output
AI
Analog Input
AO
Analog Output
LC
Load Cell
LS
Logical Signal
VCU1
Located on main VCU 20100
VCU2
Located on first extension VCU 20100
VCU3
Located on second extension VCU 20100
V103
Located on VCU20103
V104
Located on VCU20104
FRQ
Frequency Output
R-L
Raise and Lower Contact Input
n/a
Not assigned (signal not used or generated internally
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 60 -
November 2013
Parameters
Event Classes
Description
Alarm (Stops feeder)
W1
Warning 1 (acknowledgement required)
W2
Warning 2 (no acknowledgement required)
IG
Ignore No event message but contact outputs
Signals
Description
Flow rate
Belt load
VB
Belt speed
TCI
Totalizer Counter Increments
FRI
Remote frequency output
VAP
Delay of control command till point of discharge
PLS
Host plant control
FCB
Function block in mini-PLC
Procedure for Setting Inputs and Outputs

Step
Description
1.
Select source or destination of signal DI, DO ...,...

"n/a" means "not assigned", i.e. function is not available.
2.
Select unit VCU ...

Display only shows units activated in parameter block 1.
3.
Select channel number DI 1 ...
4.
Select signal level LOW or HIGH

(N/C or N/O contact)
Hardware Configuration
When signal path configuration parameters are set, the source/destination determines whether unit, channel and
level must be additionally indicated or not. The following table applies:
Possible hardware configurations:
Source
Unit
Channel
Level
FB
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 61 -
Parameters
Source
Unit
Channel
VCU103
AI1 - AI4
VCU104
AI1 - AI3
VCU1
AI1 - AI2
VCU2
AI1 - AI2
VCU3
AI1 - AI2
VCU103
AO1 - AO4
VCU104
AO1 - AO4
VCU1
AO1 - AO3
VCU2
AO1 - AO3
VCU3
AO1 - AO3
Level
OP
v
n/a
AI
AO
LC
VCU103
VCU104
VCU1
LC1 - LC2
VCU2
VCU3
DI
VCU103
VCU104
VCU1
VCU2
VCU3
DO
VCU103
VCU104
VCU1
VCU2
DI1 - DI12
DI1 - DI12
DI1 - DI7
HIGH, LOW
DI1 - DI7
DI1 - DI7
DO1 - DO13
DO1 - DO14
DO1 - DO8
DO1 - DO8
HIGH, LOW
DO1 - DO8
VCU3
Fieldbus (FB), control unit (OP), speed (v), not assigned (n/a) and the low-resolution analog input (DI4) does not
require additional specification for unit, channel or level.
Analog inputs (AI), outputs (AO) and load cell (LC) require the unit to be specified.
Digital inputs (DI) and outputs (DO) require unit, channel and level to be specified.
Example:
Parameter P 16.21 determines the relay output that indicates that a warning (W 1 or W2) event is active.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 62 -
November 2013
Parameters
P16.21 DO: WARNING
Default: DO 13 High
Options:
n/a (not used)

DO 1 thru DO 14 - High/Low
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, the output relay is either DO 8 for
the VCU 20103, or DO 13 for the VCU 20104. The available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions are shown
in the next two rows.
Event Messages
Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.
There are four different event classes:

Event Class
Code
Display / Effect
Alarm
All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1
W1
The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2
W2
The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been corrected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore
IG
Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Event Group
Symbol
System message
SY
Sequence monitoring
SC
Electrical system
WE
Mechanical system
WM
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 63 -
Parameters
Event Group
Symbol
Material flow
MF
Interlocking
IL
Controllers
CO
Calibration
CA
Maximum
HI
Minimum
LO
Example:
Some parameters specify the response to an error event.
Parameter P01.02 determines the response to event SY12, Event: Communication ARM7.
P01.02 Event: Communication ARM7
Event Group: SY
Number: 12
Options:
IG
Default: A
A (Stop feeder)
W1 (Warning Manual reset)
W2 (Warning Automatic reset)
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, an alarm is generated and the
feeder is stopped. The second row shows the event group and number (SY12), and the third row shows the
available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions. All of the normal event options are available for this event.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 64 -
November 2013
Parameters
10.2
DT-9 Parameter List
A complete set of DT-9 parameters is listed below with options, default values and descriptions. The factory default values are selected based on either, the requirements of the existing wiring groups or the most commonly
used values. Some parameters are shown as Hidden. These parameters are not visible from the feeder display
and it should not normally be necessary to changed them. If it is necessary to view or modify these parameters
set EasyServe to Expert mode (View | Expert Mode). The default password is 7353. This will make the parameters visible in EasyServe and allow the parameter attributes (H-Hidden, R-Read only & W-Read/Write) to be
changed.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 65 -
Parameters
10.2.1 Parameter Overview

VCF20170-008 0643
01 - Hardware Modules
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P01.01 [82]
Event: Communication HMI 1
W2
4218
P01.02 [82]
Event: Communication ARM7
5752
P01.03 [82]
Analog Channel A10
NO
5746
P01.04 [82]
Analog Channel A11
NO
5747
P01.05 [82]
Analog Channel A12
NO
5748
P01.06 [82]
Analog Channel A13
NO
5749
02 - Feeder Definition
Number:
Name
Default
P02.01 [84]
Language *
ENGLISH
4224
P02.02 [84]
Units *
English
4225
P02.03 [84]
Scale Name *
DISOCONT TERSUS CF
6238
P02.04 [84]
Password *
10000
4292
P02.05 [84]
Nominal Flow Rate *
50000 lb/h
4226
P02.06 [84]
Nominal Speed *
3 inch/s
4227
P02.07 [84]
Display Formats *
SELECTABLE
4228
P02.08 [84]
Flow Rate Units *
----.- lb/h
4229
P02.09 [84]
Counter 1 Unit *
------- lb
4230
P02.10 [84]
Counter 2 Unit *
------- lb
4232
P02.11 [84]
Counter 3 Unit *
------- lb
4233
P02.12 [84]
DO: Pulse Counter *
DO
4239
P02.13 [84]
Totalizer Increment *
100 lb
4254
P02.14 [84]
Pulse Length Total *
0.1 s
4231
P02.15 [84]
Event: Remote TCI too small *
W2
5745
P02.16 [84]
Maintenance Speed *
50 %
5670
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 66 -
Customer
Sys ID
November 2013
Parameters
P02.17 [84]
DO: FRI Frequency *
DO
5753
P02.18 [84]
Remote FRI Frequency *
10 Hz/(t/h)
5708
P02.20 [84]
Codepage *
Unicode UTF-8
6242
P02.21 [84]
DC_Mode *
NO
6243
03 - Control Sources
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P03.01 [91]
Feeder Start *
DI
4241
P03.02 [91]
Feedrate Setpoint *
AI
4242
P03.03 [91]
Setpoint Range *
20 mA
4243
P03.04 [91]
Setpoint Offset *
4 mA
4244
P03.05 [91]
Maximum Feedrate *
50000 lb/h
5686
P03.06 [91]
Minimum Feedrate *
5000 lb/h
5687
P03.07 [91]
DI: Raise Setpoint *
n/a
5722
P03.08 [91]
DI: Lower Setpoint *
n/a
5723
P03.09 [91]
Raise/Lower Response Time *
30 s
5709
P03.10 [91]
Source Run Enable *
DI
4245
P03.11 [91]
Event: Run Disabled *
W2
4246
P03.12 [91]
Mode Select Enable/Disable *
Keyb.,Remote & Local
5707
P03.13 [91]
Speed Setpoint *
200 rpm
5682
P03.14 [91]
Run Mode Select *
Frate Setpoint
5684
P03.15 [91]
Density Setpoint *
50.955 lb/ft3
5815
Number:
Name
Default
P04.01 [97]
LC Characteristic Value *
3 mV/V
4257
P04.02 [97]
LC Rated Capacity *
100 lb
4258
P04.03 [97]
Effective Platform Length *
18 inch
4259
P04.04 [97]
Lever Ratio *
4260
P04.05 [97]
Angle *
0 degree
4261
P04.06 [97]
Speed Measurement *
DI
4262
04 - Rated Data
November 2013
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 67 -
Parameters
P04.07 [97]
Source Load Cell *
LC
4263
P04.08 [97]
Source Load Cell 2 *
LC
4269
P04.09 [97]
Tachometer: Pulses per Rev *
60 P/rev
5690
P04.10 [97]
Load cross section *
157 inch2
5730
Number:
Name
Default
P05.01 [100]
Volum on LC failure
YES
4270
P05.02 [100]
Event: Volum. caused by LC-error
IG
4271
P05.03 [100]
Afterflow Measurement Time
0s
4274
P05.04 [100]
Zero Drop-Out Active
NO
4679
P05.05 [100]
Zero Drop-Out Limit
1%Q
4680
05 - Feeder control
Customer
Sys ID
06 - Feeder Monitoring
Number:
Name
Default
P06.01 [101]
Event: Stand-By
IG
4289
P06.02 [101]
Stand-By Limit Value
0 % Io
4290
P06.03 [101]
Event: Tachometer Input
4291
P06.04 [101]
Event: Error LC Input
IG
4293
P06.05 [101]
Event: LC Input < MIN
IG
4294
P06.06 [101]
Event: LC Input > MAX
IG
4295
P06.07 [101]
Event: Setpoint Limited
IG
4296
P06.08 [101]
Event: Power Failure
IG
4297
P06.09 [101]
Time Deviation
20 s
4298
P06.10 [101]
Threshold Deviation
5%
4299
P06.11 [101]
Factor Deviation
4320
P06.12 [101]
Event: Deviation
W2
4300
P06.13 [101]
Event: Controller Limited
IG
4301
P06.14 [101]
Event: Memory
W1
4302
P06.15 [101]
Event: Analog Input < Offset
IG
5418
P06.16 [101]
DO: Dual Tacho active
n/a
4304
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 68 -
Customer
Sys ID
November 2013
Parameters
P06.17 [101]
Event: Primary Tacho Failure
IG
4305
Number:
Name
Default
P07.01 [108]
DI: Belt Motion Monitor
n/a
5724
P07.02 [108]
10 s
5698
P07.03 [108]
IG
5725
P07.04 [108]
DI: Source Belt Sensor
n/a
4497
P07.05 [108]
BIC Active
NO
4498
P07.06 [108]
DI: BIC freeze
n/a
4499
P07.07 [108]
Slip Value
10 % LB
4507
P07.08 [108]
Event: Slip
IG
4508
P07.09 [108]
DO: Belt Slip
n/a
4511
P07.10 [108]
Sensor Length
3.23 inch
4500
P07.11 [108]
Sensor Width
4.73 inch
4501
P07.12 [108]
Sensor Offset
0 inch
4502
P07.13 [108]
Belt Drift
1.18 inch
4503
P07.14 [108]
Event: Belt Drift
W1
4504
P07.15 [108]
Belt Skew
1.58 inch
4505
P07.16 [108]
Event: Belt Skew
4506
P07.17 [108]
DO: Belt Drift
n/a
4509
P07.18 [108]
DO: Belt Skew
n/a
4510
Number:
Name
Default
P08.01 [113]
LC Filter
3s
4334
P08.02 [113]
Filter: Actual Flow Rate
1s
4328
P08.03 [113]
Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
1s
4329
P08.04 [113]
Feedback Filter Override Threshold 15 %
5702
P08.05 [113]
Filter: Belt Load
1s
4331
P08.06 [113]
Filter: Belt Speed
1s
4332
07 - Belt Monitoring
Customer
Sys ID
08 - Filters
November 2013
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 69 -
Parameters
P08.07 [113]
Filter: Deviation
1s
4333
Number:
Name
Default
P09.01 [114]
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
5 % Io
4337
P09.02 [114]
Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN
IG
4338
P09.03 [114]
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
120 % Io
4339
P09.04 [114]
Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX
IG
4340
P09.05 [114]
Limit: Load MIN
60 % Q
4341
P09.06 [114]
Event: Load MIN
IG
4342
P09.07 [114]
Limit: Load MAX
120 % Q
4343
P09.08 [114]
Event: Load MAX
IG
4344
P09.09 [114]
Limit: Speed MIN
5%V
4345
P09.10 [114]
Event: Speed MIN
IG
4346
P09.11 [114]
Limit: Speed MAX
120 % V
4347
P09.12 [114]
Event: Speed MAX
IG
4348
P09.13 [114]
Temperature MAX
80 C
5518
P09.14 [114]
Event: Temperature-MAX
IG
5519
09 - Limit Values
Customer
Sys ID
10 - Calibration Data
Number:
Name
Default
P10.01 [118]
36 inch
5693
P10.02 [118]
Pulses per length
300 P/inch
4256
P10.03 [118]
Range Correction TW
5731
P10.04 [118]
Range Correction TC
5732
P10.05 [118]
Range Correction TM
5733
P10.06 [118]
Belt Circuit Time
60 s
4353
P10.07 [118]
Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.)
5703
P10.08 [118]
Calibration W eight
70 lb
4354
P10.09 [118]
Test Chain W eight
4.3 lb/inch
5715
P10.10 [118]
Basic Tare
0 lb/inch
4355
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 70 -
Customer
Sys ID
November 2013
Parameters
P10.11 [118]
Belt Circuit No.
1000000 P/B
4357
Number:
Name
Default
P11.01 [121]
P-Component KP
0.05 mA/%
4369
P11.02 [121]
I-Component TN
1s
4370
P11.03 [121]
AO: Motor Speed Control
AO
4400
P11.04 [121]
Lower Limit
4 mA
4371
P11.05 [121]
Upper Limit
20 mA
4372
P11.06 [121]
Controller Magnitude Offset
4 mA
4373
P11.07 [121]
Position at STOP
Lower Limit
4374
P11.08 [121]
KP speed controller
0.07 mA/%
5734
P11.09 [121]
VAP Active
NO
4480
P11.10 [121]
Platform Dis.Length
0 % LB
4482
P11.11 [121]
CC_FC speed controller
0.01 mA/Hz
5920
P11.12 [121]
Control Offset speed controller
0 mA
5921
P11.13 [121]
Bypass
0 mA
4375
P11.14 [121]
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord
0s
4378
P11.15 [121]
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord
0s
4379
P11.16 [121]
Adaptation 1
NO
4382
P11.17 [121]
Adaptation 2
NO
4383
Number:
Name
Default
P12.01 [125]
Moisture Active
NO
5386
P12.02 [125]
Moisture Select
n/a
5399
P12.03 [125]
AI: Moisture Measurement
n/a
5387
P12.04 [125]
Nominal Moisture
10 %
5388
P12.05 [125]
Moisture Offset
4 mA
5389
P12.06 [125]
Moisture Range
20 mA
5390
P12.07 [125]
DO: Moisture active
n/a
5400
11 - Rate controller
Customer
Sys ID
12 - Moisture
November 2013
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 71 -
Parameters
P12.08 [125]
Moisture MAX
20 %
5391
P12.09 [125]
DO: Moisture MAX
n/a
5392
P12.10 [125]
Event: Moisture MAX
IG
5393
P12.11 [125]
AO: Flow Rate corrected
n/a
5394
P12.12 [125]
AO: Flow Rate Offset
4 mA
5395
P12.13 [125]
AO: Flow Rate Range
20 mA
5396
P12.14 [125]
Pulse Counter corrected
NO
5397
13 - Cleanout control
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P13.01 [128]
DO: CleanOut Timer
n/a
4277
P13.02 [128]
CleanOut ON Time
1h
4278
P13.03 [128]
CleanOut OFF Time
1h
4279
P13.04 [128]
DI: Chain Motion Monitor
n/a
4404
P13.05 [128]
Chain Motion Delay
20 s
4405
P13.06 [128]
Event: Chain Motion Monitor
IG
4406
Number:
Name
Default
P14.01 [130]
AO: Setpoint
n/a
4385
P14.02 [130]
Setpoint Offset
4 mA
4386
P14.03 [130]
Setpoint Range
20 mA
4387
P14.04 [130]
AO: Actual Flow Rate
AO
4388
P14.05 [130]
Flow Rate Offset
4 mA
4389
P14.06 [130]
Flow Rate Range
20 mA
4390
P14.07 [130]
AO: Belt Load
n/a
4391
P14.08 [130]
Belt Load Offset
4 mA
4392
P14.09 [130]
Belt Load Range
20 mA
4393
P14.10 [130]
AO: Speed
n/a
4394
P14.11 [130]
Speed Offset
4 mA
4395
P14.12 [130]
Speed Range
20 mA
4396
14 - Analog Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 72 -
Customer
Sys ID
November 2013
Parameters
P14.13 [130]
AO: Deviation
n/a
4397
P14.14 [130]
Deviation Offset
4 mA
4398
P14.15 [130]
Deviation Range
20 mA
4399
P14.16 [130]
AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd)
n/a
4306
P14.17 [130]
AO: Density
n/a
5924
P14.18 [130]
Density Offset
4 mA
5925
P14.19 [130]
Density Range
20 mA
5926
Number:
Name
Default
P15.01 [134]
DI: Acknowledge Events
n/a
4419
P15.02 [134]
DI: Local Mode
n/a
4420
P15.03 [134]
Event: External Event 1
IG
4417
P15.04 [134]
DI: External Event 1
n/a
4418
P15.05 [134]
Event: NAMUR Error V103-DI13
IG
5904
P15.06 [134]
IG
5905
P15.07 [134]
DI: Reset Totalizer 1
n/a
5414
P15.08 [134]
n/a
5415
P15.09 [134]
DI: Discharge Pluggage
DI
5716
P15.10 [134]
Discharge Pluggage Delay
2s
5697
P15.11 [134]
Event: Discharge Pluggage
5717
P15.12 [134]
DI: Coal on belt switch
DI
5718
P15.13 [134]
1s
5704
P15.14 [134]
Event: Loss of Material
IG
5719
P15.15 [134]
Event: Coal on Belt
5754
P15.16 [134]
Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive
prop to Rate
5705
P15.17 [134]
DI: Motor feedback
DI
5720
P15.18 [134]
Event: Motor Start
5721
P15.19 [134]
DI: Coal Flow Monitor
DI
5726
P15.20 [134]
100 lb
5699
P15.21 [134]
Event: Coal Flow
5727
15 - Digital Inputs
November 2013
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 73 -
Parameters
P15.23 [134]
DI: Remote CTRL
n/a
5735
P15.24 [134]
DI: OFF/Maint CTRL
n/a
5736
P15.25 [134]
DI: Local Start
n/a
5737
P15.26 [134]
DI: Jog forward
n/a
5738
P15.27 [134]
DI: Jog backward
n/a
5739
P15.28 [134]
IG
4430
P15.29 [134]
n/a
4431
P15.30 [134]
IG
4730
P15.31 [134]
n/a
4731
P15.32 [134]
IG
4732
P15.33 [134]
n/a
4733
P15.34 [134]
DI: Volumetric Mode
n/a
4421
P15.35 [134]
DI: Mode Switch Lock
n/a
5922
Number:
Name
Default
P16.01 [143]
DO: Scale Start
DO
4433
P16.02 [143]
DO: Feeder Started
n/a
4434
P16.03 [143]
DO: Feeder running (2nd)
n/a
5671
P16.04 [143]
DO: Feeder Run Forward
DO
5740
P16.05 [143]
DO: Feeder Run Forward (2nd)
n/a
5672
P16.06 [143]
DO: Feeder Run Reverse
DO
5741
P16.07 [143]
DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd)
n/a
5673
P16.08 [143]
DO: Start Prefeeder
n/a
4435
P16.09 [143]
DO: ALARM
DO
4436
P16.10 [143]
DO: ALARM (2nd)
n/a
5674
P16.11 [143]
DO: Deviation
n/a
4437
P16.12 [143]
DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN
n/a
4438
P16.13 [143]
DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX
n/a
4439
P16.14 [143]
DO: Load MIN
n/a
4440
P16.15 [143]
DO: Load MAX
n/a
4441
16 - Digital Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 74 -
Customer
Sys ID
November 2013
Parameters
P16.16 [143]
DO: Speed MIN
n/a
4442
P16.17 [143]
DO: Speed MAX
n/a
4443
P16.18 [143]
DO: Volumetric Mode
DO
4444
P16.19 [143]
DO: Volumetric Mode (2nd)
n/a
5675
P16.20 [143]
DO: Local Mode
n/a
4445
P16.21 [143]
DO: W ARNING
DO
4759
P16.22 [143]
DO: W ARNING (2nd)
n/a
5676
P16.23 [143]
DO: Feeding
DO
5742
P16.24 [143]
DO: Feeding (2nd)
n/a
5677
P16.25 [143]
DO: Remote CTRL
DO
5750
P16.26 [143]
DO: Remote CTRL (2nd)
n/a
5678
17 - Analog calibration
Number:
Name
Default
P17.01 [150]
Analog Input 1 Min
4 mA
5755
P17.02 [150]
Analog Input 1 Max
20 mA
5756
P17.03 [150]
Analog Input 2 Min
4 mA
5757
P17.04 [150]
Analog Input 2 Max
20 mA
5758
P17.05 [150]
Analog Input 3 Min
4 mA
5759
P17.06 [150]
Analog Input 3 Max
20 mA
5760
P17.07 [150]
Analog Input 4 Min
4 mA
5761
P17.08 [150]
Analog Input 4 Max
20 mA
5762
P17.09 [150]
Analog Input 5 Min
4 mA
5763
P17.10 [150]
Analog Input 5 Max
20 mA
5764
P17.11 [150]
Analog Output 1 Min
4 mA
5765
P17.12 [150]
Analog Output 1 Max
20 mA
5766
P17.13 [150]
Analog Output 2 Min
4 mA
5767
P17.14 [150]
Analog Output 2 Max
20 mA
5768
P17.15 [150]
Analog Output 3 Min
4 mA
5769
P17.16 [150]
Analog Output 3 Max
20 mA
5770
P17.17 [150]
Analog Output 4 Min
4 mA
5664
November 2013
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 75 -
Parameters
P17.18 [150]
Analog Output 4 Max
20 mA
5665
P17.19 [150]
Analog Output 5 Min
4 mA
5666
P17.20 [150]
Analog Output 5 Max
20 mA
5667
P17.21 [150]
Analog Output 6 Min
4 mA
5668
P17.22 [150]
Analog Output 6 Max
20 mA
5669
P17.23 [150]
Analog Output 1 Test Value
0 mA
5908
P17.24 [150]
0 mA
5909
P17.25 [150]
0 mA
5910
P17.26 [150]
0 mA
5911
P17.27 [150]
0 mA
5912
P17.28 [150]
0 mA
5913
Number:
Name
Default
P18.01 [154]
2-Sensor Slip active
NO
5433
P18.02 [154]
Source Sensor 1
Speed
5434
P18.03 [154]
DI: Sensor 1
n/a
5435
P18.04 [154]
Characteristic Value Sensor 1
100 P/inch
5436
P18.05 [154]
DI: Sensor 2
n/a
5437
P18.06 [154]
100 P/inch
5438
P18.07 [154]
Slip Value 2
2 % LB
5439
P18.08 [154]
Event: Slip 2
IG
5440
P18.09 [154]
DO: Slip 2
n/a
5443
18 - 2-Sensor Slip
Customer
Sys ID
19 - Maintenance interval
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P19.01 [156]
Maintenance Electric
3000 h
4465
P19.02 [156]
Event: Maint. Electric
IG
4466
P19.03 [156]
Maintenance Feeder Run
3000 h
4467
P19.04 [156]
Event: Maint.Feeder Run
IG
4468
20 - Data Logging
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 76 -
November 2013
Parameters
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P20.01 [157]
Hourly Total Time
0 min
5743
P20.02 [157]
Daily Total Time
0 min
5744
P20.03 [157]
Logger cycle time
1 min
6288
P20.04 [157]
Data Log Value 1
752
6289
P20.05 [157]
Data Log Value 2
755
6290
P20.06 [157]
Data Log Value 3
1872
6291
P20.07 [157]
Data Log Value 4
1874
6292
P20.08 [157]
Data Log Value 5
1876
6293
P20.09 [157]
Data Log Value 6
2316
6294
P20.10 [157]
Data Log Value 7
1880
6295
P20.11 [157]
Data Log Value 8
1894
6296
P20.12 [157]
Data Log Value 9
2230
6297
P20.13 [157]
Data Log Value 10
2232
6298
21 - Communication EasyServe
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P21.01 [159]
Own Address
4520
P21.02 [159]
Baud Rate
38400
4521
P21.03 [159]
Format Data
8-N-1
6189
22 - Communication Fieldbus
Number:
Name
Default
P22.01 [160]
Protocol Type
NO
4528
P22.02 [160]
Timeout Host
5s
4529
P22.03 [160]
Event: Cyclic Communication
4530
P22.04 [160]
Modbus-Version
compatible Stock
5729
P22.05 [160]
Word Sequence
I:std/L:std
6246
P22.06 [160]
Byte Sequence
High - Low
6245
P22.07 [160]
Configuration
FIXED_8_16
4661
P22.08 [160]
Address
4531
P22.09 [160]
Resolution
4096
4533
November 2013
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 77 -
Parameters
P22.10 [160]
Baud rate
19200
4535
P22.11 [160]
Data Format
8-O-1
4656
P22.12 [160]
Physics
RS232
6186
P22.13 [160]
Address
16
4539
P22.14 [160]
FLOAT-Format
IEEE
4540
P22.15 [160]
Address
63
4541
P22.16 [160]
Baud rate
125K
4542
P22.17 [160]
Parameter
NO
4658
P22.18 [160]
Preset Count
4734
P22.19 [160]
READ_ID Count
4659
P22.20 [160]
Access Rights Limitation FB
NO
4786
P22.21 [160]
Remote IP Address FB
192.168.240.250
4787
P22.22 [160]
Event: Acyclic Communication
W2
5680
P22.23 [160]
Configuration
PARA_ID_6_15
5923
Number:
Name
Default
P23.01 [165]
IP Address
192.168.240.1
6235
P23.02 [165]
Net Mask
255.255.255.0
6236
P23.03 [165]
Gateway
0.0.0.0
6237
Number:
Name
Default
P24.01 [166]
DO: PLC 1
n/a
4662
P24.02 [166]
DO: PLC 2
n/a
4663
P24.03 [166]
DO: PLC 3
n/a
4664
P24.04 [166]
DO: PLC 4
n/a
4665
P24.05 [166]
DO: PLC 5
n/a
4666
P24.06 [166]
DO: PLC 6
n/a
4667
P24.07 [166]
DO: PLC 7
n/a
4668
P24.08 [166]
DO: PLC 8
n/a
4669
23 - Ethernet
Customer
Sys ID
24 - PLC Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 78 -
Customer
Sys ID
November 2013
Parameters
P24.09 [166]
AO: PLC 1
n/a
4670
P24.10 [166]
AO: PLC 2
n/a
4671
25 - Fixed mode configuration

Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P25.01 [168]
ID Preset Value 1
320
6247
P25.02 [168]
ID Preset Value 2
352
6248
P25.03 [168]
ID Preset Value 3
384
6249
P25.04 [168]
ID Preset Value 4
592
6250
P25.05 [168]
ID Preset Value 5
6251
P25.06 [168]
ID Preset Value 6
6252
P25.07 [168]
ID Preset Value 7
6253
P25.08 [168]
ID Preset Value 8
6254
P25.09 [168]
ID Read Value 1
752
6256
P25.10 [168]
ID Read Value 2
816
6257
P25.11 [168]
ID Read Value 3
1552
6258
P25.12 [168]
ID Read Value 4
1872
6259
P25.13 [168]
ID Read Value 5
1894
6260
P25.14 [168]
ID Read Value 6
2230
6261
P25.15 [168]
ID Read Value 7
2232
6262
P25.16 [168]
ID Read Value 8
2234
6263
P25.17 [168]
ID Read Value 9
6264
P25.18 [168]
ID Read Value 10
6265
P25.19 [168]
ID Read Value 11
6266
P25.20 [168]
ID Read Value 12
6267
P25.21 [168]
ID Read Value 13
6268
P25.22 [168]
ID Read Value 14
6269
P25.23 [168]
ID Read Value 15
6270
P25.24 [168]
ID Read Value 16
6271
26 - FCB analog outputs
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 79 -
Parameters
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P26.01 [172]
FCB_AO 01
n/a
P26.02 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 1
4 mA
6272
P26.03 [172]
Range FCB_AO 1
20 mA
6273
P26.04 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 1
1000
6274
P26.05 [172]
FCB_AO 02
n/a
P26.06 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 2
4 mA
6275
P26.07 [172]
Range FCB_AO 2
20 mA
6276
P26.08 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 2
1000
6277
P26.09 [172]
FCB_AO 03
n/a
P26.10 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 3
4 mA
6278
P26.11 [172]
Range FCB_AO 3
20 mA
6279
P26.12 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 3
10000
6280
P26.13 [172]
FCB_AO 04
n/a
P26.14 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 4
4 mA
6281
P26.15 [172]
Range FCB_AO 4
20 mA
6282
P26.16 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 4
1000
6283
P26.17 [172]
FCB_AO 05
n/a
P26.18 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 5
4 mA
6284
P26.19 [172]
Range FCB_AO 5
20 mA
6285
P26.20 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 5
1000
6286
P26.21 [172]
FCB Variant
Empty
5902
P26.22 [172]
Event: FCB-Error
5903
20481
20482
20483
20484
20485
27 - FCB digital outputs

Number:
Name
Default
P27.01 [177]
FCB_DO 01
n/a
20529
P27.02 [177]
FCB_DO 02
n/a
20530
P27.03 [177]
FCB_DO 03
n/a
20531
P27.04 [177]
FCB_DO 04
n/a
20532
P27.05 [177]
FCB_DO 05
n/a
20533
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 80 -
Customer
Sys ID
November 2013
Parameters
P27.06 [177]
FCB_DO 06
n/a
20534
P27.07 [177]
FCB_DO 07
n/a
20535
P27.08 [177]
FCB_DO 08
n/a
20536
P27.09 [177]
FCB_DO 09
n/a
20537
P27.10 [177]
FCB_DO 10
n/a
20538
P27.11 [177]
FCB_DO 11
n/a
20539
P27.12 [177]
FCB_DO 12
n/a
20540
P27.13 [177]
FCB_DO 13
n/a
20541
P27.14 [177]
FCB_DO 14
n/a
20542
P27.15 [177]
FCB_DO 15
n/a
20543
P27.16 [177]
FCB_DO 16
n/a
20544
P27.17 [177]
FCB_DO 17
n/a
20545
P27.18 [177]
FCB_DO 18
n/a
20546
P27.19 [177]
FCB_DO 19
n/a
20547
P27.20 [177]
FCB_DO 20
n/a
20548
28 - Configuration HMI Values

Number:
Name
Default
P28.01 [180]
HMI Value 01
1884
6299
P28.02 [180]
HMI Value 02
1880
6300
P28.03 [180]
HMI Value 03
2276
6301
P28.04 [180]
HMI Value 04
2292
6302
P28.05 [180]
HMI Value 05
2236
6303
P28.06 [180]
HMI Value 06
2234
6304
P28.07 [180]
HMI Value 07
2224
6305
P28.08 [180]
HMI Value 08
2226
6306
P28.09 [180]
HMI Value 09
1904
6307
P28.10 [180]
HMI Value 10
1960
6308
November 2013
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 81 -
Parameters
10.2.2 Parameter Details

10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules
Parameters in this group are used to select the error conditions that are generated by communication errors and
to indicate to the controller which I/O module has been installed in each of the analog I/O slots. The analog I/O
channels that are defined here are used in later parameter groups.
The VCU 20103 has three built in analog channels and four slots for analog I/O modules. On the VCU 20103
channel A10 is closest to the power supply and channel A13 is farthest from the power supply.
P01.01
Event: Communication HMI 1
Event Group: SY
Default: W2
Number: 07
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch screen HMI
must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located toward the center of
the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
The parameter should be set to W2 (Warning with automatic reset).
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?
P01.02
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 12
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not operate when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 82 -
November 2013
Parameters
P01.03
Analog Channel A10
Alternative:
NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the analog I/O card that is installed in position A10. It is connected
to terminal blocks X12-1 and X12-2.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
P01.04
Analog Channel A11
Alternative:
NO
AI3 (Analog In 3)
AO4 (Analog Out 4)
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A11. It is connected to terminal blocks X12-3 and X12-4.
NO.
P01.05
Analog Channel A12
Alternative:
NO
AI4 (Analog In 4)
AO5 (Analog Out 5)
Default: NO
NO.
P01.06
Analog Channel A13
Alternative:
NO
AI5 (Analog In 5)
AO6 (Analog Out 6)
Default: NO
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 83 -
Parameters
NO.
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition

This parameter group is used to specify the rating of the components in the weighing system.
P02.01
Language
Alternative:
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
Default: ENGLISH
This parameter selects the language used in DT 9 displays. W hen it is set to OTHER the
individual display strings can be set using EasyServe.
P02.02
Units
Alternative:
Metric
English
Default: English
This parameter selects the units used for displays and parameter inputs. Either SI (metric)
or normal American (English) units may be selected.
P02.03
Scale Name
Default: DISOCONT TERSUS

CF
This parameter specifies the text string to identify the feeder and is shown on the top line of
the touch screen HMI.
This parameter is set according to customer preference.
P02.04
Min: 1000
Password
Default: 10000
Max: 9999
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 84 -
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the password used to restrict access to various controller functions.
Note: This parameter can be changed using EasyServe in the event that the password is
lost.
Note: Some functions may require an alternate password. The default value is 7353.
P02.05
Min: 0 lb/h
Nominal Flow Rate
Default: 50000 lb/h
Max: 220000000 lb/h
This parameter is used to specify the feeder design feedrate. It is similar to 196NT Setup
05 (Maximum Feedrate) and is used for limit alarms and display outputs. It should always
be set to the same value as parameter P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. It is also used to scale
the analog I/O channels and to calculate the simulated load when the controller is installed
on a volumetric feeder.
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project manual or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is
selected.
Note: If both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 are set to Not Used,
the load cells will be disabled and the system will operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Speed as shown below.
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Speed)
P02.06
Nominal Speed
Min: 0.001 inch/s
Default: 3 inch/s
Max: 500 inch/s
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 85 -
Parameters
This parameter is used to scale the belt speed analog output (i.e., Maximum analog signal
= Nominal speed) and serves as the reference value for limit value monitoring. Nominal
speed, together with nominal feedrate, is used to calculate the nominal belt load.
Nominal speed is calculated as:
(P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section)
Note: If both P04.07 Belt LC Left and P04.08 Belt LC Right are set to Not Used, the load
cells will be disabled and the system will operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9 will calculate an assumed belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Belt
Speed as shown below.
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Belt Speed)
P02.07
Display Formats
Alternative:
STANDARD
SELECTABLE
Default: SELECTABLE
This parameter allows the operator to either, accept the standard set of display formats
(determined by the controller based on the P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) or to select the
display formats individually using parameters P02.08 through P02.11.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference. The default value is
STANDARD, which is suitable for most applications.
P02.08
Flow Rate Units
Alternative:
------ lb/h
----.- lb/h
---.-- lb/h
--.--- lb/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
----.-- lb/min
------ lb/s
----.- lb/s
---.-- lb/s
--.--- lb/s
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 86 -
Default: ----.- lb/h
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter selects the format used to display feedrate values. It is only visible when
parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference.
P02.09
Counter 1 Unit
Alternative:
------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Default: ------- lb
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 1. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.
P02.10
Counter 2 Unit
Alternative:
------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Default: ------- lb
P02.11
Counter 3 Unit
Default: ------- lb
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 87 -
Parameters
Alternative:
------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
P02.12
DO: Pulse Counter
Alternative:
DO
n/a
Default: DO V103.DO12 High
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Total Coal Integrator (TCI).
The TCI cycles continuously while the feeder is in operation. To prevent premature failure
of the output relay this parameter should always be set to DO 12 (Reed Relays - Terminal
blocks X16-3 through X16-6).
P02.13
Min: 0 lb
Totalizer Increment
Default: 100 lb
Max: 100000 lb
This parameter sets the weight associated with each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is
the same as 196NT Setup 07 (Remote Totalizer Data Logging Increment).
The TCI output frequency is based on parameter P02.11, parameter P02.12 and the actual
feedrate. If the values selected for these parameters require an output frequency greater
then the maximum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be generated. See parameter P02.12 for more information.
This parameter is normally set to either 100 Lbs or 100 Kg.
P02.14
Min: 0 s
Pulse Length Total
Default: 0.1 s
Max: 10 s
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 88 -
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter sets the duration of each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is the same as
196NT Setup 35 (Remote Totalizer Pulse W idth).
The TCI output frequency is based on this parameter, parameter P02.11 and the actual
feedrate. If this combination of values requires an output frequency greater then the maximum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be generated.
The maximum pulse frequency can be calculated as:
Frequency = (P03.05 Maximum Feedrate) / ((3600) x ( P02.11))
When the TCI output is directed to an open collector or reed relay output the maximum
possible pulse frequency is 10 Hz (P02.12 set to 0.05 sec). When the TCI output is directed
to a mechanical relay output the maximum possible pulse frequency is 1.0 Hz (P02.12 set
to 0.5 sec). W hen the pulse length (P02.12) is increased, these values are reduced.
The maximum possible frequency (in Hz) is calculated as:
Max. possible freq. = 1 / (2 X P02.12 (in sec))
To insure that the TCI output works correctly the maximum pulse frequency must always be
less then the maximum possible frequency.
P02.15
Event: Remote TCI too small
Event Group: MF
Default: W2
Number: 14
The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the Total
Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can operate. See
parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
This parameter should be set to W2.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a smaller value.
P02.16
Min: 0 %
Maintenance Speed
Default: 50 %
Max: 100 %
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 89 -
Parameters
This parameter determines the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal used during
maintenance (local, calibrate, jog) operations. It is similar to 196NT Setup 01 (Speed Setpoint) except that the MSC demand signal is set rather then the actual motor speed (open
loop operation). The actual motor RPM is determined by the characteristics of the motor
and the MSC.
This parameter is normally set to 50% which will produce a motor speed of approximately
900 RPM with a 4 pole, 60 Hz motor.
P02.17
DO: FRI Frequency
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Feed Rate Indicator (FRI). This
parameter output can only be set to DO 13 (terminal block X6-1 and X6-2) which is an isolated, unpowered, transistor output.
P02.18
Min: 0 Hz/(t/h)
Remote FRI Frequency
Default: 10 Hz/(t/h)
Max: 2000000 Hz/(t/h)
The value of this parameter is used to calculate remote Feedrate Indicator (FRI) output
frequency. It must be selected so that the FRI output at the minimum feedrate (see P03.06)
is greater then 1.0 Hz and the FRI output at the maximum feedrate (see P03.06) is less
then 1000 Hz.
This parameter is normally set to 10.0 Hz / Ton/hr
P02.20
Codepage
Alternative:
Standard (8859-1)
Latin-2 (8859-2)
Cyrillic (1251)
Japanese Shift-JIS
Chinese 936 (GBK)
Chinese EUC-CN
Unicode UTF-8
Unicode UTF-16
P02.21
DC_Mode
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 90 -
Default: Unicode UTF-8
Default: NO
November 2013
Parameters
Alternative:
NO
YES
This parameter allows for changing of the type of load cell excitation voltage.
When set to NO, the load cell is supplied by a rectangular AC voltage. This mode should be
used in case the load cell is connected straight to the load cell interface of the controller.
This mode provides best suppression of thermal effects in the load cell cable and terminals.
When set to YES, the load cell is supplied by a DC voltage. This mode requires the installation of an external load cell amplifier close to the load cell with a transmission of the DC
output signal on a higher voltage and current level to suppress thermal effects in the load
cell cable and terminals.
10.2.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources

This parameter group is used to select the control sources for use during Remote mode operation.
P03.01
Feeder Start
Alternative:
DI
OP
FB
Default: DI V103.DI2 High
This parameter selects the digital input used as the feeder start command.
Caution: This is a static input! Switching to remote control mode with the start input activated will start the feeder.
This parameter is normally set to DI 2 High (terminal block X1-4) and is connected to wire
112.
P03.02
Feedrate Setpoint
Alternative:
AI
OP
FB
R-L
Default: AI V103.AI1
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 91 -
Parameters
This parameter selects the source for the feedrate demand signal and can be set to the
following values:
AI 3 for use with an analog (usually 4-20mA) input signal on SIG+ and SIGR-L for use with the Raise/Lower input signals (See P03.07 and P03.08). The demand signal is set to its lower limit in case the feeder is switched off.
OP for use with EasyServe
FB or remote control using a Field Bus
This parameter is normally set to AI 3. Check the certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
P03.03
Min: 0 mA
Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 100% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA or 0-10V input.
This parameter is normally set to 20.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an
analog input signal.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.
P03.04
Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 0% signal level for the analog input channel.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an analog input signal. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.
P03.05
Min: 0 lb/h
Maximum Feedrate
Default: 50000 lb/h
Max: 220000000 lb/h
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 92 -
November 2013
Parameters
This is the maximum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate above this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 05 (Maximum Feedrate). It should always be set to the same values as parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value
is selected.
P03.06
Min: 0 lb/h
Minimum Feedrate
Default: 5000 lb/h
Max: 220000000 lb/h
This is the minimum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate below this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 06 (Minimum Feedrate).
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the minimum motor speed.
Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
P03.07
DI: Raise Setpoint
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the raise feedrate setpoint command.
This parameter is only active if P03.02 is set to R-L.
This parameter is normally set to DI 3 High (terminal block X1-2), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 113.
P03.08
DI: Lower Setpoint
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 93 -
Parameters
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the lower feedrate setpoint command.
This parameter is normally set to DI 11 High (terminal block X4-5), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 114.
P03.09
Min: 5 s
Raise/Lower Response Time
Default: 30 s
Max: 300 s
This parameter determines the speed at which the feedrate setpoint changes when the
raise or lower input is active. The value represents the approximate time, in seconds, for
the setpoint to go from 0% to 100%. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 28 (Raise/Lower Response Time).
P03.10
Source Run Enable
Alternative:
DI
n/a
FB
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the belt motor start permissive.
When it is enabled, (set to a digital input) an active signal on the designated input is required to start the belt drive motor. When it is set to n/a, this feature is disabled.
This parameter is normally set to DI 8 - High (terminal block X3-4) and is connected to (wire
111).
Caution: Setting this parameter to n/a will disable the Run Enable feature and create an
unsafe operating condition. The Run Enable input must ALWAYS be enabled and connected to a user accessible stop switch.
P03.11
Event: Run Disabled
Event Group: IL
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 94 -
Default: W2
Number: 01
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the Run
Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run Enable
feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
The parameter is normally set to W2 so that there is an indication on the display when the
feeder is disabled.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to
DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This switch is used to
stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or disconnected.
Action:
- Check the position of the Run Enable switch.
- Check the wiring to the Run Enable switch.
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT display and in this
case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
P03.12
Mode Select Enable/Disable
Alternative:
Keyboard only
Keyboard & Local
Keyb.,Remote & Local
Default: Keyb.,Remote & Local
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 95 -
Parameters
This parameter is used to enable the Remote (P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL) and Local
(P15.25 DI: Local Start) digital inputs. The Remote and Local digital inputs are edge triggered, meaning that their function is initiated by the transition from OFF to ON or, ON to OFF
rather then by their state. This type of operation allows the feeder to be stopped due to an
error condition or a keyboard input, even when the digital input is active.
The operation of the Remote and Local digital inputs is described below.
Keyboard Only - Both the Remote and Local digital inputs are ignored at all times.
Keyboard & Local - The Remote input is ignored but the Local input is active. If the feeder
is in OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will cause the feeder to run
in Local mode. If the feeder is in OFF/Maint mode and running, de-energizing the Local
input will cause the feeder to stop.
Keyboard, Remote & Local - Both the Remote and Local input are active. If the feeder is in
OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will start the feeder in Local mode
and energizing the Remote input will force the feeder into Remote mode. If the feeder is in
OFF/Maint mode and running, the Remote input will be ignored and de-energizing the Local
input will stop the feeder. If the feeder is in Remote mode, the Local input is ignored and deenergizing the Remote input will force the feeder into OFF/Maint mode.
The keyboard is always enabled regardless of the value selected for this parameter.
This parameter is normally set to Keyboard Only.
P03.13
Min: 10 rpm
Speed Setpoint
Default: 200 rpm
Max: 30000 rpm
This parameter is used to set motor RPM when P03.14 Run Mode Select is set to Speed
Setpoint.
P03.14
Run Mode Select
Alternative:
Frate Setpoint
Speed Setpoint
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 96 -
Default: Frate Setpoint
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter allows the feeder to operate in remote at a fixed motor speed. It is normally
set to Frate Setpoint for normal control and when in this mode the controller responds to
the Analog input or Raise/Lower contacts. When Speed Setpoint is selected the motor
speed is fixed at the value specified in P03.13 Speed Setpoint and the controller does not
respond to either the analog input or the Raise/Lower contacts. Selecting Speed Setpoint is
similar to setting 196NT Setup 03 (Run Mode Select) to 5 (RPM Setpoint).
This parameter MUST be set to Frate Setpoint
P03.15
Min: 1 lb/ft3
Density Setpoint
Default: 50.955 lb/ft3
Max: 100000 lb/ft3
This parameter specifies the bulk material density in weight per volume. The value is relevant during the very first startup of the feeder and in case the feeder doesn't have load cells
to deternine the belt load.
10.2.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data

The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics.
P04.01
LC Characteristic Value
Min: 0.01 mV/V
Default: 3 mV/V
Max: 10 mV/V
This parameter specifies the Load cell rated output. Both load cells must have the same
output value. Our normally use 3.000 mV/V load cells.
P04.02
Min: 0.5 lb
LC Rated Capacity
Default: 100 lb
Max: 220000000 lb
This parameter specifies the rated capacity of each load cell. Both load cells must have the
same capacity. Our normally use 100.0 Lbs (50 kg) load cells but smaller load cells may be
used for low capacity feeders or feeders with a short weigh span.
This parameter is normally set to 100.0 Lbs (50 kg). Check the project manual or certified
drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
P04.03
Effective Platform Length
Min: 0.1 inch
Max: 50 inch
Default: 18 inch
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 97 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. Our use a
three roller weighing system with one weighing roller, supported by the load cells, and two
fixed weigh span rollers. In this configuration, one half of the weight between the weigh
span rollers is supported by the load cells and this parameter must be set to one half of the
distance between the weigh span rollers.
This parameter must be set to the value of 196NT Setup 10 W eigh Span Length, normally 18 inches (45.7cm) on new feeder installations and 19.146 (48,6 cm) on mechanical
feeder conversions.
P04.04
Min: 0.01
Lever Ratio
Default: 1
Max: 2
This parameter is used to specify the ratio of weigh on the load cell and total platform weigh
on multi weigh roller systems.
This parameter MUST be set to 1.000.
P04.05
Min: 0 degree
Angle
Default: 0 degree
Max: 60 degree
This parameter is used to specify the feeder inclination and is used to adjust the weight
signal when the load cell is mounted perpendicular to the belt on an inclined feeder. The
load cells in our are always mounted vertically, to eliminate weighing errors, and this adjustment is not necessary.
The parameter must be set to 0.00 degrees.
P04.06
Speed Measurement
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter selects the digital input used for the tachometer input signal.
This parameter is normally set to DI 15 (terminal block X5-1 & X5-2) and is connected to
(wires 145 & 146).
Note: If DI 14 is selected, a NAMUR type sensor must be used, and connected to X5-3 &
X5-4.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 98 -
November 2013
Parameters
P04.07
Source Load Cell
Alternative:
LC
n/a
Default: LC V103.LC1
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the left side of the
feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
This parameter should always be set to LC 1.
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and
P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P04.08
Source Load Cell 2
Alternative:
LC
n/a
Default: LC V103.LC2
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the right side of
the feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
This parameter should always be set to LC 2.
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and
P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P04.09
Min: 1 P/rev
Tachometer: Pulses per Rev
Default: 60 P/rev
Max: 1000 P/rev
This parameter specifies the number of pulses generated by the tachometer for each revolution of the motor. It is similar to 196NT Setup 09 tachometer type.
This parameter is set based on the type or tachometer that is installed. In most (but not all)
cases, feeders that use a VFD control use a tachometer that produces 60 pulses per revolution and feeders that use an Eddy Current Clutch use a tachometer that produces 12
pulses per revolution. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that
the proper value is selected.
P04.10
Load cross section
Default: 157 inch2
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 99 -
Parameters
Min: 0.1 inch2
Max: 100000 inch2
This parameter specifies the area under the inlet leveling bar.
This parameter is normally set to 157.0 square inches (1013 square cm). Check the project
specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
10.2.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control

This parameter group specifies the actions to be taken when error conditions are detected.
P05.01
Volum on LC failure
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: YES
This parameter allows the DT-9 to force the feeder into volumetric mode in the event of a
weighing system failure. Volumetric mode is independent of the event generated in P05.02
Event: Volum. caused by LC-error.
This parameter should always be set to YES.
P05.02
Event Group: CO
Default: IG
Number: 05
The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a
weighing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing system.
Action to be taken:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
P05.03
Min: 0 s
Afterflow Measurement Time
Default: 0 s
Max: 2000 s
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 100 -
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the amount of time that the feeder continues to totalize after the
belt has stopped.
This parameter should always be set to 0.0 sec.
P05.04
Zero Drop-Out Active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
This parameter is used to specify that the DT-9 should stop totalizing and set the weight
signal to zero when the load on the belt reaches a low limit specified by P05.05 Zero DropOut Limit
This parameter must be set to NO.
P05.05
Min: 0 % Q
Zero Drop-Out Limit
Default: 1 % Q
Max: 10 % Q
This parameter specifies the limit at which the weight signal will be set to zero and the DT-9
will stop totalizing if P05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active is set to YES.
This parameter should be set to 1.00%.
10.2.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring

This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm (A)
and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2).
P06.01
Event: Stand-By
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 02
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 101 -
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt drive motor is stopped
because the motor demand signal is less than the limit specified in P06.02 Stand-By Limit
Value.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter P06.02
Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
P06.02
Min: 0 % Io
Stand-By Limit Value
Default: 0 % Io
Max: 100 % Io
If the motor speed control (MSC) demand signal goes below the limit specified by this parameter, the required motor speed is set to zero and the motor start contact is deenergized. There is a 3 second delay before the motor is stopped and no delay before it is
restarted.
Setting this parameter to 0% deactivates this function.
This parameter should normally be set to 5%.
P06.03
Event Group: CA
Default: A
Number: 02
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is lost or
is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
P06.04
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 102 -
Default: IG
November 2013
Parameters
Event Group: CA
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the load cell signal is invalid. If
P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric
mode, regardless of the value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn device
off and restart.
P06.05
Event Group: LO
Default: IG
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.
P06.06
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 01
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 103 -
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this
condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
- Check material infeed.
P06.07
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand signal is
greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravimetric mode,
the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate or P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. In volumetric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
Depending on selected mode:
a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal value.
c) Emergency setpoint is active.
P06.08
Event Group: W E
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 104 -
Default: IG
Number: 01
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after a
loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during normal
remote mode operation.
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization takes
place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
P06.09
Min: 0 s
Time Deviation
Default: 20 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter specifies the maximum time that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation before an error is
generated.
This parameter is normally set to 20 sec.
P06.10
Min: 0 %
Threshold Deviation
Default: 5 %
Max: 100 %
This parameter specifies the minimum amount that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint without generating an error. The error is generated after a delay specified
by P06.09 Time Deviation.
This parameter is normally set to 5.0 %.
P06.11
Min: 0
Factor Deviation
Default: 1
Max: 1
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 105 -
Parameters
This parameter allows P06.10 Threshold Deviation to be adjusted based on the feedrate
setpoint. This allows the effective threshold to be reduced as the feedrate setpoint is reduced.
When P06.11 is set to 1.0 there is no adjustment and the effective threshold is always
equal to P06.10 Threshold Deviation. W hen P06.11 is set to 0.0 the effective deviation is
calculated by multiplying P06.10 Threshold Deviation by a factor equal to the (feedrate
setpoint) / (P02.05 (Nominal Flow Rate).
This parameter should be set to 1.0.
P06.12
Event: Deviation
Event Group: HI
Default: W2
Number: 05
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can differ
from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation for a time
greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W 2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.
P06.13
Event Group: CO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 106 -
Default: IG
Number: 01
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control demand
signal reaches its upper limit.
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After some
time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
1. Material flow missing or irregular.
2. External feed rate controller wrongly set.
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed rate, Y
should be 10 to 14mA.
P06.14
Event: Memory
Event Group: SY
Default: W1
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller detects an error in
the internal non-volatile memory. Reload the non-volatile memory by using the "Load
Default Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists, the controller must
be replaced.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop feeder).
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal parameters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all parameters
must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels must be retrimmed.
P06.15
Event Group: W E
Default: IG
Number: 08
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 107 -
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate demand
signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance space
of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted with noisy
input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
P06.16
DO: Dual Tacho active
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the digital output used to switch to the secondary tachometer in a
dual tachometer system. The output is reset when the feeder is switched off.
This parameter should be set to n/a in a single tachometer system and DO 3 in a dual tachometer system. DO 3 is normally used by P16.07 DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) which
must be set to not used.
P06.17
Event Group: CA
Default: IG
Number: 09
Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during normal operation.
10.2.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring

The parameters in this group control the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
P07.01
DI: Belt Motion Monitor
Alternative:
n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 108 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter selects the digital input used for the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
This parameter is normally set to DI 12 - High (terminal block X4-2) and is connected to
wire 115.
P07.02
Min: 0 s
Default: 10 s
Max: 50 s
This parameter sets the maximum delay between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulses before
a BMM error (P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor) is generated. It is the same as 196NT
Setup 17 (Belt Motion Monitor Delay). The interval is determined when the feeder is operating at its minimum design feed rate and is equal to the time necessary for the pulley or
roller which inputs the sensor to make one complete revolution, divided by two, plus ten
percent. Therefore, time intervals for motion monitors mounted to the tension roll or belt
take-up pulley will be considerably longer than those for sensors mounted to the weigh
span roller.
Example: If the motion monitor is mounted to the weigh span roller which make revolution
every 20 seconds at minimum feed rate, the time interval between pulses before the belt is
certain not to be moving is: 20 / 2 = 10 + 10% = 11.
Note: To disable this function if a belt motion monitor is not installed set P07.03 Event: Belt
Motion Monitor to IG.
P07.03
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 10
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor (BMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a BMM is installed. Setting it to IG (Ignore) will disable the BMM feature.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
P07.04
DI: Source Belt Sensor
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 109 -
Parameters
The digital input for the belt sensor. This function can be checked with the corresponding
service value.
DI: Sensor input DI13 or DI14 should be used.
n/a: BIC and the belt monitoring functions are inactive. This is used if a belt with V-guide
and without mark in the belt is installed.
P07.05
BIC Active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
This parameter is used to activate the Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) system. The BIC
system is used in batching feeders to tare individual sections of the belt separately so that
batches that are less then a full belt length are weighted accurately.
The BIC feature is not used in continuous feeding systems and this parameter should always be set to NO.
P07.06
DI: BIC freeze
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter is used to specify a digital input that is used to freeze the tare value while
the BIC feature is active.
This parameter is normally set to n/a.
P07.07
Min: 0 % LB
Slip Value
Default: 10 % LB
Max: 20 % LB
This parameter specifies the maximum amount that the belt speed measured by the belt
slip input can differ from belt speed measured by the tachometer input, without generating
an error.
This parameter is normally set to 10.0 % LB.
P07.08
Default: IG
Event: Slip
Event Group: WM
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 110 -
Number: 02
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the limit
specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
The parameter is normally set to IG.
P07.09
DO: Belt Slip
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the digital output that is energized when the Belt Slip event is active.
This parameter is normally set to IG.
P07.10
Min: 0.01 inch
Sensor Length
Default: 3.23 inch
Max: 400 inch
Length of the metallic markings worked into the belt in the direction of belt travel.
P07.11
Min: 0.01 inch
Sensor Width
Default: 4.73 inch
Max: 400 inch
Width of the metallic markings worked into the belt at right angles to the direction of belt
travel.
P07.12
Min: -400 inch
Sensor Offset
Default: 0 inch
Max: 400 inch
The zero point of recording the belt drift can be corrected with the offset. Unfortunately, this
restricts the maximum display zone. This is why greater differences should be calibrated by
mechanically shifting the sensor.
The new display = the old display - the offset
P07.13
Min: 0.01 inch
Belt Drift
Default: 1.18 inch
Max: 400 inch
Threshold value for belt misalignment identification to generate an event message Event:
Belt Drift.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 111 -
Parameters
P07.14
Event: Belt Drift
Event Group: WM
Default: W1
Number: 04
The belt has exceeded the tolerance levels set.

Steps:
1. Remove any soiling to the tail and drive pulleys
2. Align the belt
Monitoring may also be subject to error. Therefore: keep an eye on the service value for the
belt motion sensor and correct any errors that may arise.
Related threshold value: Belt Drift
P07.15
Min: 0.01 inch
Belt Skew
Default: 1.58 inch
Max: 400 inch
Threshold of the belt drift for detection of event Event: Belt Skew.
P07.16
Event: Belt Skew
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 03
Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable.

Action: See Event: Belt Drift
Related threshold: Belt Skew
P07.17
DO: Belt Drift
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Digital output to show the 'off-track running' event.

Also refer to: P07.13 Belt Drift and P07.14 Event: Belt Drift
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
P07.18
DO: Belt Skew
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 112 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
Digital output to show the belt drift event.

Also refer to: P07.15 Belt Skew and P07.16 Event: Belt Skew
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
10.2.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters

The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the time set
if there is an abrupt change in the signal.
Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display.
P08.01
LC Filter
Min: 0.25 s
Default: 3 s
Max: 300 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the load cell signals. It is similar
to the 196NT Setup 19 W eight Signal Filter.
P08.02
Min: 0 s
Filter: Actual Flow Rate
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate value displayed on
the display, EasyServe and field bus interface. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback
Signal Filter.
P08.03
Min: 0 s
Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate signal sent to the
analog output channel. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback Signal Filter.
P08.04
Min: 0 %
Feedback Filter Override Threshold
Default: 15 %
Max: 200 %
This parameter specifies point at which the point at which the feedback filter is overridden
and the actual feedrate is displayed. This is used so that large changes are displayed
quickly. This parameter is the same as 196NT Setup 21 (Feedback filter override
threshold).
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 113 -
Parameters
P08.05
Min: 0 s
Filter: Belt Load
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt load signal sent to the
analog output channel.
P08.06
Min: 0 s
Filter: Belt Speed
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt speed signal sent to the
P08.07
Min: 0 s
Filter: Deviation
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the deviation signal sent to the
10.2.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values

The parameters in this group are used to set the limit points at which various events are generated as well as
selecting the type of event that are generated when the limit points are reached.
Note: Limit values are only checked after the feeder has been running for 10 seconds.
P09.01
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
Min: -10 % Io
Max: 200 % Io
Default: 5 % Io
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum feedrate event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 5 % of the nominal flow rate (P02.06).
P09.02
Event Group: LO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 114 -
Default: IG
Number: 02
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
P09.03
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Min: -10 % Io
Max: 200 % Io
Default: 120 % Io
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum feedrate event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal flow rate (P02.06).
P09.04
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 02
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX.
This parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
P09.05
Limit: Load MIN
Min: -10 % Q
Max: 200 % Q
Default: 60 % Q
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 60 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the nominal
flow rate and the nominal belt speed).
P09.06
Event: Load MIN
Event Group: LO
Default: IG
Number: 03
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 115 -
Parameters
than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN. Set this value to W 2 to simulate the
196NT low density alarm.
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
P09.07
Limit: Load MAX
Min: -10 % Q
Max: 200 % Q
Default: 120 % Q
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the nominal flow rate and the nominal belt speed).
P09.08
Event: Load MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 03
the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX.
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
P09.09
Limit: Speed MIN
Min: -10 % V
Max: 200 % V
Default: 5 % V
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt speed event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 5 % of the nominal belt speed (P02.06).
P09.10
Event: Speed MIN
Event Group: LO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 116 -
Default: IG
Number: 04
November 2013
Parameters
than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
P09.11
Limit: Speed MAX
Min: -10 % V
Max: 200 % V
Default: 120 % V
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt speed event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt speed (P02.06).
P09.12
Event: Speed MAX
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 04
the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
P09.13
Min: 30 C
Temperature MAX
Default: 80 C
Max: 90 C
Maximum allowed temperatur inside the VCU. W hen the actual temperature exceeds the
threshold event Event: Temperature-MAX is generated.
See also: P09.14 Event: Temperature-MAX
P09.14
Event Group: MF
Default: IG
Number: 13
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 117 -
Parameters
The event will be detected in case the actual temperature is above the threshold (P09.13
Temperature MAX). The controller might fail to function.
Countermeasures:
- Check temperatur of environment
- Install cooler close to the controller
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data
10.2.2.10
The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values that
have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No readjustment
is necessary.
P10.01
Min: 0.01 inch
Default: 36 inch
Max: 500 inch
This parameter specifies the distance between the two calibration probe bosses. It is the
same as the 196NT Setup 12 Calibration Probe Span
This parameter must match the physical characteristics of the feeder but in most cases, it is
set to 36 inches (91,5 cm) for new feeder installations or 38.7 inches (98,3 cm) on mechanical weighing feeder conversions.
P10.02
Pulses per length
Min: 1 P/inch
Max: 1000000 P/inch
Default: 300 P/inch
This parameter indicates the number of tachometer pulses per lenght unit of belt travel. It is
calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration process based on the time it takes for a calibration tape to travel between the two calibration probes.
This parameter should not normally be changed by the operator.
P10.03
Min: 0.5
Range Correction TW
Default: 1
Max: 2
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 118 -
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
dead weight calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration process based on the weigh system characteristics specified in Parameter Group 4,
and on the calibration weight specified in P10.08 Calibration Weight.
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Group 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.04
Min: 0.5
Range Correction TC
Default: 1
Max: 2
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
chain calibration (TC: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration
process based on the weigh system characteristics specified in Parameter Block 4, and on
the test chain weight specified in P10.09 Test Chain Weight.
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.05
Min: 0.5
Range Correction TM
Default: 1
Max: 2
This parameter specifies the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
material test. It is calculated by the operator based on the difference between the totalized
value, indicated by the DT-9, and the actual value, determined by an external static scale.
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.06
Min: 1 s
Belt Circuit Time
Default: 60 s
Max: 9999 s
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 119 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the duration of the LB: Pulse/Belt calibration process. This process counts the number of tachometer pulses received during the specified time and place
the result in P10.11 Belt Circuit No..
P10.07
Min: 0.5
Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.)
Default: 2
Max: 5000
This parameter specifies the duration, in belt revolutions, of the TC: Span Calibration process. This process performs a span calibration using P10.09 Test Chain Weight as the
calibration weight, and places the result in P10.04 Range Correction TC.
This parameter should be set to 2.0 belt revolutions.
P10.08
Calibration Weight
Min: 0.001 lb
Max: 22000 lb
Default: 70 lb
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration weight used during the span portion of
a feeder calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is the same as the 196NT Setup 13 Calibration W eight
The correct value is normally stamped on the calibration weight.
P10.09
Test Chain Weight
Min: 0 lb/inch
Max: 22000 lb/inch
Default: 4.3 lb/inch
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration chain used when a chain calibration
(TC: Span Calibration) is preformed. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 36 Test Chain W eight
P10.10
Basic Tare
Min: 0 lb/inch
Max: 10000 lb/inch
Default: 0 lb/inch
This parameter indicates the weight of the empty belt. It is calculated by the DT-9 during
the tare portion of the calibration process (BS: Tare/Belt Speed).
P10.11
Min: 0 P/B
Belt Circuit No.
Default: 1000000 P/B
Max: 9000000 P/B
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 120 -
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter indicates the total number of tachometer pulses in one complete belt revolution. It is calculated by the DT-9 during the tare portion of the calibration process (BS:
Tare/Belt Speed).
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller
10.2.2.11
The parameters in this group are used to control the operation of the Motor Speed Control (MSC).
P11.01
P-Component KP
Min: 0 mA/%
Max: 1000 mA/%
Default: 0.05 mA/%
This parameter specifies the proportional gain of the speed control loop. Increasing this
value produces a faster response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation. Reducing this value increases stability but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN.
P11.02
Min: 0 s
I-Component TN
Default: 1 s
Max: 60000 s
This parameter specifies the integral gain of the speed control loop. The value specified
here is the reciprocal of the actual gain value. Decreasing this parameter produces a faster
response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation and increasing it increases stability but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN.
P11.03
AO: Motor Speed Control
Alternative:
AO
n/a
Default: AO V103.AO1
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 121 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the analog output channel used to control the Motor Speed Control (MSC).
This parameter is normally set to AO 1 (terminal blocks X6-7 and X6-6) and is connected to
wires 142 through 144.
P11.04
Min: 0 mA
Lower Limit
Default: 4 mA
Max: 20 mA
This parameter determines the lower limit of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal. It should always be set to the same value as P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
P11.05
Min: 0 mA
Upper Limit
Default: 20 mA
Max: 20 mA
should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA and 0-10V input.
P11.06
Min: 0 mA
Controller Magnitude Offset
Default: 4 mA
Max: 20 mA
should always be set to the same value as P11.04 Lower Limit.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
P11.07
Position at STOP
Alternative:
0
Lower Limit
Default: Lower Limit
This parameter specifies the value of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal (see
P11.03 Controller Magnitude Y) when the belt drive motor is not running.
This parameter should always be set to Lower Limit.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 122 -
November 2013
Parameters
P11.08
KP speed controller
Min: 0 mA/%
Max: 1000 mA/%
Default: 0.07 mA/%
This parameter specifies the speed control gain used during the volumetric startup period.
P11.09
VAP Active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
When this parameter is set to YES the feedrate and total calculations are time shifted to
adjust for the delay between the time that the material is weighed and the time that it is
discharged.
This feature is useful when small batches are being delivered but is not used on Stock feeders. It should always be set to NO.
P11.10
Min: 0 % LB
Platform Dis.Length
Default: 0 % LB
Max: 50 % LB
This parameter specifies the distance between the center of the weigh platform and the
material discharge point in percentage of total belt length.
This parameter is only used when P11.09 VAP Active is set to YES. It should always be set
to 0.0% Lb.
P11.11
CC_FC speed controller
Min: 0 mA/Hz
Max: 1000 mA/Hz
Default: 0.01 mA/Hz
Relation of control output to resulting frequency of the tachometer. This value is determined
by the adjustment programm Basic (Cal1). The value takes effect during the volumetic startup phase of the controller after power recovery only.
P11.12
Min: -1000 mA
Control Offset speed controller
Default: 0 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Control output resulting in a tachometer frequency of 0 Hz.This value is determined by the

adjustment programm Basic (Cal1). The value takes effect during the volumetic startup
phase of the controller after power recovery only.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 123 -
Parameters
P11.13
Min: 0 mA
Bypass
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
The constant for the setpoint bypass (also refer to the controller figure in the appendix). The
bypass instantaneously passes on a portion of the flow rate setpoint to the controller magnitude to the feed drive. This parameter contains the current at which the prefeeder just supplies the nominal flow rate (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate).
Setting: operate the feeder volumetrically and set the bypass so that actual flow rate = setpoint. This value should be approximately 10 ... 15 mA. Otherwise the external flow rate
controller should be adjusted.
P11.14
Min: 0 s
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord
Default: 0 s
Max: 6000 s
The time constant for a 1st-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller
through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.14 and P11.15
delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a
delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.14 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.15
Min: 0 s
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord
Default: 0 s
Max: 6000 s
The time constant for a second filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller
through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.14 Setpoint
Filter 1st Ord and P11.15 delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller
magnitude output without a delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.15 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 124 -
November 2013
Parameters
P11.16
Adaptation 1
Alternative:
NO
V
1/Q
1/W
Default: NO
Controlled adaption of the controller input.

The adaption means that the controller can be adapted to variable route reinforcements or
the guidance behavior can be improved.
P11.17
Adaptation 2
Alternative:
NO
W
Default: NO
Regulated adaptation of the controller output.

Alternatives: NO, W
10.2.2.12
Parameter Block 12 - Moisture
Parameters in this group supply the information required when material moisture compensation is used. W e do
not currently supply moisture measurement equipment and these parameters should always be disabled.
P12.01
Moisture Active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
This parameter is used to activate the moisture compensation system. At present Stock
does not supply moisture measurement equipment and these parameters should always be
disabled.
This parameter should always be set to NO.
P12.02
Moisture Select
Alternative:
n/a
DI
FB
Default: n/a
With factory default value "n/a" , the correction is not active.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 125 -
Parameters
P12.03
AI: Moisture Measurement
Alternative:
n/a
AI
Default: n/a
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture content.
Also refer to:
P12.04 Nominal Moisture
P12.05 Moisture Offset
P12.06 Moisture Range
P12.04
Min: 0 %
Nominal Moisture
Default: 10 %
Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight.

Also refer to:
P12.03 AI: Moisture Measurement
P12.05 Moisture Offset
P12.06 Moisture Range
P12.05
Moisture Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Current for a correction value of 0%

Reference value: P12.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P12.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P12.06 Moisture Range
P12.06
Min: 0 mA
Moisture Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Current for a correction value of 100%

Reference value: P12.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P12.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P12.05 Moisture Offset
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 126 -
November 2013
Parameters
P12.07
DO: Moisture active
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Definition of the output channel for signal 'Correction active'.

Also refer to: P12.02 Moisture Select
P12.08
Min: 0 %
Moisture MAX
Default: 20 %
Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P12.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P12.09
DO: Moisture MAX
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has
exceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P12.08 Moisture MAX, P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P12.10
Event: Moisture MAX
Event Group: MF
Default: IG
Number: 05
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by P12.08
Moisture MAX.
P12.11
AO: Flow Rate corrected
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 127 -
Parameters
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P12.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P12.13 AO: Flow Rate Range
P12.12
AO: Flow Rate Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Output current for an output of 0 %.

Reference value: P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
P12.13
Min: 0 mA
AO: Flow Rate Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Output current for an output of 100 %.

Reference value: P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
P12.14
Pulse Counter corrected
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter.

NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity
YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction
factor, e.g. moisture.
10.2.2.13
Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control
The parameters in this group control the cleanout conveyor timer and Chain Motion Monitor (CMM).
P13.01
DO: CleanOut Timer
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 128 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to energize the cleanout conveyor motor
starter when the cleanout timer feature is enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
P13.02
CleanOut ON Time
Min: 0.01 h
Default: 1 h
Max: 1000 h
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor ON time when the cleanout timer feature is
enabled.
remote mode.
P13.03
Min: 0 h
CleanOut OFF Time
Default: 1 h
Max: 1001 h
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor OFF time when the cleanout timer feature
is enabled.
remote mode.
P13.04
DI: Chain Motion Monitor
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
P13.05
Min: 1 s
Chain Motion Delay
Default: 20 s
Max: 1000 s
This parameter sets the maximum delay between Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulses before a CMM error (P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor) is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 20 sec. To disable this function if a CMM is not installed
set P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor to IG.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 129 -
Parameters
P13.06
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 06
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ignore) if
not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
10.2.2.14
Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs
The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels.
P14.01
AO: Setpoint
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Setpoint: The Setpoint value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently attempting to meet.
The source of the setpoint signal is determined by P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint. The analog
output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
P14.02
Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
P14.03
Min: 0 mA
Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
P14.04
AO: Actual Flow Rate
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 130 -
Default: AO V103.AO2
November 2013
Parameters
Alternative:
AO
n/a
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
P14.05
Flow Rate Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P14.06
Min: 0 mA
Flow Rate Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
P14.07
AO: Belt Load
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Belt Load: The Belt Load value is the current weight of material on the belt per unit length.
The analog output is scaled to the nominal belt load, which is calculated using P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P14.08
Belt Load Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P14.09
Min: 0 mA
Belt Load Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 131 -
Parameters
P14.10
AO: Speed
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Speed: The Speed value is the current belt speed. The analog output is scaled to P02.06
Nominal Speed.
P14.11
Speed Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P14.12
Min: 0 mA
Speed Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
P14.13
AO: Deviation
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Deviation: The Setpoint value indicates the amount that the actual feedrate deviates from
the feedrate setpoint.
P14.14
Deviation Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
See P14.15 Deviation Range.
P14.15
Min: 0 mA
Deviation Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 132 -
November 2013
Parameters
The output signal is generated as follows:

Current = 10 mA + (P14.14/ 2) + (P14.16 - P14.15) X (Deviation / 100)
Note: Deviation can have either a positive or a negative value.
P14.16
AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
This parameter is used when a second analog output proportional to feedrate is required. A
second analog output card is required and is normally installed in position A10. In this case
both parameter P01.03 Analog Channel A10 and P14.16 AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd) must
be set to AO 3.
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
P14.17
AO: Density
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Definition of the output channel for the measured density of the bulk material.
For the adjustment of the signal see P14.18 Density Offset and P14.18 Density Offset.
P14.18
Density Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Output signal for an empty belt (= density zero).

See also:
P14.17 AO: Density
P14.19 Density Range
P14.19
Min: 0 mA
Density Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 133 -
Parameters
Output signal for measured density = rated density. Not to physically limit the output at the
rated density, P14.17 should be set below 20 mA.
See also:
P14.17 AO: Density
Service value Nominal Density
10.2.2.15
Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs
The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired on
the controller and cannot be changed.
P15.01
DI: Acknowledge Events
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely acknowledge error conditions.
This function is not normally used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.02
DI: Local Mode
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the VMO is in local mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should always be set to n/a (not used).
P15.03
Event Group: SC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 134 -
Default: IG
Number: 05
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.04 DI:
External Event 1 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 ) is active.
P15.04
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 1.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.05
Event Group: W E
P15.06
Number: 15
Event Group: W E
Default: IG
Default: IG
Number: 16
P15.07
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 1. The totalizer is
reset on the rising edge of the signal.
P15.08
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 135 -
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 2. The totalizer is
reset on the rising edge of the signal.
P15.09
DI: Discharge Pluggage
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the discharge pluggage switch (LSFD). It
is internally programmed as a failsafe input. W hen the parameter is set to HIGH, open
contact (low signal) on the input will produce an event.
109.
P15.10
Min: 0 s
Discharge Pluggage Delay
Default: 2 s
Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a discharge pluggage is detected
and the time that the discharge pluggage event is generated. It is the same as Setup 16
(Discharge Pluggage Delay) on the 196NT.
P15.11
Event Group: WM
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 136 -
Default: A
Number: 07
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is detected.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the feeder discharge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
P15.12
DI: Coal on belt switch
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Coal on belt switch (LSFB),
108 if a coal on belt switch is installed on the feeder. It can be set to n/a (not use) to disable
the coal on belt input.
P15.13
Min: 0 s
Default: 1 s
Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material on the belt is
detected (coal on belt switch is inactive) and the time that the Loss of material event is generated. It is the same as Setup 39 (Loss of Flow Delay) on the 196NT.
Note: The loss of flow event can be disabled by setting P15.14 Event: Loss of Material to
IG (Ignore).
P15.14
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 08
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 137 -
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is detected
(coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while running in
Remote.
P15.15
Event: Coal on Belt
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 12
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run in
Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop feeder).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running in local
or calibrate mode.
P15.16
Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive
Alternative:
prop to Rate
Low. Lim. if empty
Default: prop to Rate
This parameter specifies the source for the feedback signal when a loss of material (coal on
belt switch is inactive) on the belt is detected. If it is set to Prop to Rate, the feedback signal
always follows the actual feedrate value; if it is set to Low Lim if Empty, the feedback signal
is set to zero when a loss of material is detected (coal on belt switch is inactive). It is similar
to Setup 24 (Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive) on the 196NT.
Note: This parameter should always be set to Low Lim. If Empty when the DT-9 is used on
a volumetric feeder.
P15.17
DI: Motor feedback
Alternative:
DI
n/a
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 138 -
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the motor speed control has
been energized.
110.
P15.18
Event: Motor Start
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 09
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback signal
(P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop Feeder)
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the controller.
P15.19
DI: Coal Flow Monitor
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the coal flow monitor has
detected a loss of flow.
This parameter is normally set to DI 10 High (terminal block X4-7) and is connected to
wire 116.
P15.20
Min: 0 lb
Default: 100 lb
Max: 10000000 lb
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material flow is indicated
by the coal flow monitor (P15.19) and the time that the Coal Flow Error event is generated.
It is specified in units of weight so that a head seal can be maintained regardless of the
feedrate. It is similar to Setup 18 (Level/Temperature Sensor Delay) on the 196NT.
This parameter is normally set to 100 lbs (50 kg) to provide a quick response without nuisance trips.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 139 -
Parameters
P15.21
Event: Coal Flow
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 11
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material flow is
detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed and
IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout above
the feeder.
P15.23
DI: Remote CTRL
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Remote mode.
118.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
to Keyboard, Remote & Local.
P15.24
DI: OFF/Maint CTRL
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Off mode.
P15.25
DI: Local Start
Alternative:
n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 140 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Local mode.
Attention: This input start the belt drive!
119.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
to Keyboard & Local or Keyboard, Remote & Local.
P15.26
DI: Jog forward
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder forward.
P15.27
DI: Jog backward
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder in reverse.
P15.28
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 06
Cause of event:
P15.29
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 141 -
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DI
P15.30
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 11
Cause of event:
P15.31
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
P15.32
Event Group: SC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 142 -
Default: IG
Number: 12
November 2013
Parameters
Cause of event:
P15.33
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
P15.34
DI: Volumetric Mode
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter defines the digital input to force the feed rate control into volumetric mode.
The beltspeed is not influenced by the beltload in volumetric control operation.
P15.35
DI: Mode Switch Lock
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
Definition of the input signal that prevents modem switching (Remote <-> Off/Service) using
the VHM keyboard. The signal can be given by i.e. a key switch.
10.2.2.16
Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs
The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P16.01
DO: Scale Start
Alternative:
DO
n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 143 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder.
This parameter is normally set to DO 11 High and is connected to wires 7 and 8.
P16.02
DO: Feeder Started
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (Not used).
P16.03
DO: Feeder running (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running. This
output is a duplicate of P16.02 DO: Feeder Started.
P16.04
DO: Feeder Run Forward
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder running forward. This
output is similar to the K6 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 7 High and is connected to wires 177-179.
P16.05
DO: Feeder Run Forward (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the second digital output used to start the feeder running forward.
This output is a duplicate of P16.04 DO: Feeder Run Forward.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 144 -
November 2013
Parameters
P16.06
DO: Feeder Run Reverse
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder in reverse. This output is
similar to the K2 relay on the 196 NT.
P16.07
DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the second digital output used to start the feeder in reverse. This
output is a duplicate of P16.06 DO: Feeder Run Reverse.
P16.08
DO: Start Prefeeder
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the pre-feeder.
P16.09
DO: ALARM
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is similar to the K1 relay on the 196 NT.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 1 Low to simulate the K1 failsafe function of the 196NT.
P16.10
DO: ALARM (2nd)
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 145 -
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is a duplicate of P16.09 DO: ALARM.
P16.11
DO: Deviation
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a deviation event is active.
P16.12
DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low flow rate event is
active.
P16.13
DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high flow rate event is
active.
P16.14
DO: Load MIN
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 146 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt load event is
active.
P16.15
DO: Load MAX
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt load event is
active.
P16.16
DO: Speed MIN
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt speed event is
active.
P16.17
DO: Speed MAX
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt speed event is
active.
P16.18
DO: Volumetric Mode
Alternative:
DO
n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 147 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is similar to the K4 relay on the 196 NT.
P16.19
DO: Volumetric Mode (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is a duplicate of P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode.
P16.20
DO: Local Mode
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in VMO Mode.
P16.21
DO: WARNING
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W 1 or W2). This output is similar to the K7 relay on the 196 NT.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 8 Low to simulate the K7 failsafe function of the 196NT.
P16.22
DO: WARNING (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 148 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W 1 or W2). This output is a duplicate of P16.21 DO: WARNING.
P16.23
DO: Feeding
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is running and there is material on the belt. This output is similar to the K5 relay on the 196 NT.
P16.24
DO: Feeding (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is running and there is material on the belt. This output is a duplicate of P16.23 DO: Feeding.
P16.25
DO: Remote CTRL
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote mode. This output is similar to the Kx relay on the 196 NT.
P16.26
DO: Remote CTRL (2nd)
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 149 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote mode. This output is a duplicate of P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL.
10.2.2.17
Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration
The parameters in this group are used to trim the analog output values. They can be set manually but they are
normally set using the Analog Trim Function.
P17.01
Min: 1 mA
Analog Input 1 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
See section Analog Trim Function.
P17.02
Min: 17 mA
Analog Input 1 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.03
Min: 1 mA
Analog Input 2 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.04
Min: 17 mA
Analog Input 2 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.05
Min: 1 mA
Analog Input 3 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.06
Min: 17 mA
Analog Input 3 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 150 -
November 2013
Parameters
P17.07
Min: 1 mA
Analog Input 4 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.08
Min: 17 mA
Analog Input 4 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.09
Min: 1 mA
Analog Input 5 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.10
Min: 17 mA
Analog Input 5 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.11
Min: 1 mA
Analog Output 1 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.12
Min: 17 mA
Analog Output 1 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.13
Min: 1 mA
Analog Output 2 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 151 -
Parameters
P17.14
Min: 17 mA
Analog Output 2 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.15
Min: 1 mA
Analog Output 3 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.16
Min: 17 mA
Analog Output 3 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.17
Min: 1 mA
Analog Output 4 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.18
Min: 17 mA
Analog Output 4 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.19
Min: 1 mA
Analog Output 5 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.20
Min: 17 mA
Analog Output 5 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 152 -
November 2013
Parameters
P17.21
Min: 1 mA
Analog Output 6 Min
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.22
Min: 17 mA
Analog Output 6 Max
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.23
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termination of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
P17.24
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.25
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.26
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 153 -
Parameters
P17.27
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.28
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
10.2.2.18
Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip
The parameters in this group control the DT-9 belt slip sensor system.
P18.01
2-Sensor Slip active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
This parameter is used to enable the DT-9 slip sensor system.
P18.02
Source Sensor 1
Alternative:
Speed
DI
Default: Speed
This parameter specifies the type of input used for the first of the two sensors used in slip
detection.
P18.03
DI: Sensor 1
Alternative:
n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 154 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the first slip sensor. It is only active if
P18.02 Source Sensor 1 is set to DI.
P18.04
Min: 0.01 P/inch
Default: 100 P/inch
Max: 1000000 P/inch
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the first slip sensor generates in one
inch (or cm) of belt travel.
P18.05
DI: Sensor 2
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the second slip sensor.
P18.06
Min: 0.01 P/inch
Default: 100 P/inch
Max: 1000000 P/inch
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the second slip sensor generates in one
inch (cm) of belt travel.
P18.07
Min: 0 % LB
Slip Value 2
Default: 2 % LB
Max: 10 % LB
This parameter specifies the minimum difference between the two sensors (in percent of
total belt length, LB) required to generate a belt slip event.
P18.08
Event: Slip 2
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 05
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sensor 2
(P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 155 -
Parameters
P18.09
DO: Slip 2
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output that is activated when a belt slippage event is
generated.
10.2.2.19
Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval
The parameters in this group allow an event to be generated to indicate that periodic maintenance is required.
P19.01
Min: 1 h
Maintenance Electric
Default: 3000 h
Max: 10000 h
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the DT-9 is powered.
P19.02
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 04
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
This parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
P19.03
Min: 1 h
Maintenance Feeder Run
Default: 3000 h
Max: 10000 h
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the belt drive motor is energized.
P19.04
Event Group: SC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 156 -
Default: IG
Number: 03
November 2013
Parameters
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
The parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval elapsed, a
message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required.
10.2.2.20
Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging
The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
P20.01
Min: 0 min
Hourly Total Time
Default: 0 min
Max: 59 min
This parameter specifies the time that the hourly total is saved to the total data logging
system. It is the same as Setup 37 (Hourly total time) on the 196NT.
P20.02
Min: 0 min
Daily Total Time
Default: 0 min
Max: 1439 min
This parameter specifies the time that the daily total is saved to the total data logging system. It is the same as Setup 38 (Daily total time) on the 196NT.
P20.03
Min: 1 min
Logger cycle time
Default: 1 min
Max: 1439 min
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P20.04 ... P20.13.
P20.04
Data Log Value 1
Default: 752
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 157 -
Parameters
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in
the 'data communication' manual.
Also refer to:
P20.03 Logger cycle time
These manuals:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P20.05
Data Log Value 2
Default: 755
Similar to P20.04 Data Log Value 1
P20.06
Data Log Value 3
Default: 1872
P20.07
Data Log Value 4
Default: 1874
P20.08
Data Log Value 5
Default: 1876
P20.09
Data Log Value 6
Default: 2316
P20.10
Data Log Value 7
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 158 -
Default: 1880
November 2013
Parameters
P20.11
Data Log Value 8
Default: 1894
P20.12
Data Log Value 9
Default: 2230
P20.13
Data Log Value 10
Default: 2232
10.2.2.21
Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe
The parameters in this group control serial communication between EasyServe and the DT-9.
Note: EasyServe is normally connected using Ethernet and these parameters are not used.
P21.01
Min: 1
Own Address
Default: 1
Max: 1
This parameter specifies the serial loop address of the DT-9. This address and baud rates
(see below) much match the address specified in EasyServe.
Note: The station address is designed for systems with Service bus. If Service bus is not
used, select address 1.
P21.02
Baud Rate
Alternative:
38400
Default: 38400
This parameter specifies the baud rate used for serial communication with EasyServe.
P21.03
Format Data
Default: 8-N-1
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 159 -
Parameters
Alternative:
8-N-1
This parameter specifies the communications protocol used for serial communication
between EasyServe and the DT-9.
Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus
10.2.2.22
The parameters in this group are used to control the various types of fieldbus communications that are supported by the DT-9. Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
Note: Fieldbus communications are disabled and hidden by default.
P22.01
Protocol Type
Alternative:
NO
Modbus-RTU
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Modbus-TCP
PROFINET IO
Ethernet/IP
Default: NO
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card. Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual BV-H2406. The
manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communication' (BV-H2468) contains further information
on the data structures.
NO: MODBUS/TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
MODBUS: Modbus RTU protocol; RS232-, RS422- or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface
card VSS 28020 must be installed.
P22.02
Min: 1 s
Timeout Host
Default: 5 s
Max: 600 s
Monitors the interface

A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in
P22.02 is greater than zero.
P22.03
Event Group: SY
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 160 -
Default: A
Number: 08
November 2013
Parameters
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P22.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
P22.04
Modbus-Version
Alternative:
compatible Stock
STANDARD
P22.05
Word Sequence
Alternative:
I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
Default: compatible Stock
Default: I:std/L:std
The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word.

I denotes IEEE 754 values (floating-point values)
L denotes LONG values (4 byte integer values)
std will not swap the word order
swp will swap the word order
P22.06
Byte Sequence
Alternative:
High - Low
Low - High
Default: High - Low
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.
P22.07
Configuration
Default: FIXED_8_16
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 161 -
Parameters
Alternative:
NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
FIXED_8_8
FIXED_4_4
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
FIXED COMPATIBLE
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a detailed description in the manuals for data communication:
The contents of the data have to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is
compatible to one another!
P22.08
Min: 1
Address
Default: 1
Max: 254
Address of the device as a slave at the modbus.

Each address may be used at a bus once only.
P22.09
Min: 1
Resolution
Default: 4096
Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value transferred.
The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
P22.10
Baud rate
Alternative:
9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
Default: 19200
Data transfer rate at Modbus-RTU.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 162 -
November 2013
Parameters
P22.11
Data Format
Alternative:
8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
Default: 8-O-1
Modbus-RTU always uses an 11-bit character frame.

Example: 8-O-1 means:
1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit
N = No parity
O = Odd parity
E = Even parity
P22.12
Physics
Alternative:
RS485-2-wire
RS485-4-wire
RS232
Default: RS232
Selects the electrical interface type (Modbus RTU)
P22.13
Min: 0
Address
Default: 16
Max: 126
Address of the slave at the PROFIBUS
P22.14
FLOAT-Format
Alternative:
IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Default: IEEE
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parameters.
P22.15
Min: 0
Address
Default: 63
Max: 63
The address of the weighing electronics on DeviceNet
P22.16
Baud rate
Default: 125K
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 163 -
Parameters
Alternative:
125K
250K
500K
Data transfer rate of the DeviceNet.
P22.17
Parameter
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P22.18
Min: 2
Preset Count
Default: 2
Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order
plant control system.
P22.19
Min: 0
READ_ID Count
Default: 6
Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales master) that are
queried in a telegram.
P22.20
Access Rights Limitation FB
Alternative:
NO
FIRST WRITE
REMOTE IP
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 164 -
Default: NO
November 2013
Parameters
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a
controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights.
The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P22.21
Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
P22.21
Remote IP Address FB
Default: 192.168.240.250
IP address of the subscriber with control rights for Modbus-TCP.

Also refer to: P22.20 Access Rights Limitation FB
P22.22
Event Group: SY
Default: W2
Number: 10
Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.

Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
P22.23
Configuration
Alternative:
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
Default: PARA_ID_6_15
Selection of the data structure used in fieldbus interface PROFINET.

See also: Communication manual of DISOCONT TERSUS
10.2.2.23
Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet
The parameters in this group control the DT-9 Ethernet ports.

P23.01
IP Address
Default: 192.168.240.1
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 165 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the DT-9 IP address.

This parameter should be set to the default value of 192.168.240.1 for normal communication with EasyServe and the (optional) touch screen display.
P23.02
Default: 255.255.255.0
Net Mask
This parameter specifies the DT-9 subnet mask.
P23.03
Default: 0.0.0.0
Gateway
This parameter specifies the network gate way used to connect the DT-9.
10.2.2.24
Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs
This parameter group is used to specify analog and digital output channels that are under Fieldbus control.
Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
P24.01
DO: PLC 1
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.
P24.02
DO: PLC 2
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P24.01 DO: PLC 1
P24.03
DO: PLC 3
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 166 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
P24.04
DO: PLC 4
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.05
DO: PLC 5
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.06
DO: PLC 6
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.07
DO: PLC 7
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.08
DO: PLC 8
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.09
AO: PLC 1
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 167 -
Parameters
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
P24.10
AO: PLC 2
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Corresponds to P24.09 AO: PLC 1
10.2.2.25
Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration
This parameter group is used to specify fixed data points that are used with Fieldbus communication. Contact us
for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
P25.01
ID Preset Value 1
Default: 320
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the Fieldbus telegram. It cannot be changed in this parameter.
The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the 'data communication' manual:
P25.02
ID Preset Value 2
Default: 352
Corresponds to P25.01 ID Preset Value 1
P25.03
ID Preset Value 3
Default: 384
P25.04
ID Preset Value 4
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 168 -
Default: 592
November 2013
Parameters
P25.05
ID Preset Value 5
Default: 0
P25.06
ID Preset Value 6
Default: 0
P25.07
ID Preset Value 7
Default: 0
P25.08
ID Preset Value 8
Default: 0
P25.09
ID Read Value 1
Default: 752
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The
number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual:
P25.10
ID Read Value 2
Default: 816
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 169 -
Parameters
As P25.09 ID Read Value 1
P25.11
ID Read Value 3
Default: 1552
P25.12
ID Read Value 4
Default: 1872
P25.13
ID Read Value 5
Default: 1894
P25.14
ID Read Value 6
Default: 2230
P25.15
ID Read Value 7
Default: 2232
P25.16
ID Read Value 8
Default: 2234
P25.17
ID Read Value 9
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 170 -
Default: 0
November 2013
Parameters
P25.18
ID Read Value 10
Default: 0
P25.19
ID Read Value 11
Default: 0
P25.20
ID Read Value 12
Default: 0
P25.21
ID Read Value 13
Default: 0
P25.22
ID Read Value 14
Default: 0
P25.23
ID Read Value 15
Default: 0
P25.24
ID Read Value 16
Default: 0
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 171 -
Parameters
Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs
10.2.2.26
This parameter group is used to associate Function Block analog outputs with physical I/O points. Contact us for
a detailed description of Function Control Blocks.
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.
P26.01
FCB_AO 01
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P26.02
Offset FCB_AO 1
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Output current for a PLC signal of 0.
P26.03
Range FCB_AO 1
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Output current for a PLC signal of 100%

Reference value: P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
See also: P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.04
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 1
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output.

Also refer to: P26.01 FCB_AO 01, P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.05
FCB_AO 02
Alternative:
n/a
AO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 172 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
Corresponds to P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.06
Offset FCB_AO 2
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.07
Range FCB_AO 2
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.08
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 2
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.09
FCB_AO 03
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
P26.10
Offset FCB_AO 3
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 173 -
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.11
Range FCB_AO 3
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.12
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 3
Default: 10000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.13
FCB_AO 04
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
P26.14
Offset FCB_AO 4
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 174 -
November 2013
Parameters
P26.15
Range FCB_AO 4
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.16
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 4
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.17
FCB_AO 05
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
P26.18
Offset FCB_AO 5
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.19
Min: 0 mA
Range FCB_AO 5
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 175 -
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.20
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 5
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.21
FCB Variant
Default: Empty
Name of the required function block link. This name is automatically transferred to the parameter when a new link is loaded. W hen the system is started after turning on the voltage,
it checks to see whether the name of the function block link loaded is the same as the
name entered in the parameter. Event P26.22 Event: FCB-Error is identified if the names
are different.
This check serves as a control if a replacement part is used.
Also refer to: P26.22 Event: FCB-Error
P26.22
Event: FCB-Error
Event Group: IL
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 176 -
Default: A
Number: 10
November 2013
Parameters
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link
stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states
may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P26.21 FCB Variant. No further
links can be loaded as long as this event is identified. If in this error state a link with a different name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into P26.21.
10.2.2.27
Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs
This parameter group is used to associate Function Block digital outputs with physical I/O points. Contact us for
a detailed description of Function Control Blocks.
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.
P27.01
FCB_DO 01
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.02
FCB_DO 02
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.03
FCB_DO 03
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 177 -
Parameters
P27.04
FCB_DO 04
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.05
FCB_DO 05
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.06
FCB_DO 06
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.07
FCB_DO 07
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.08
FCB_DO 08
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.09
FCB_DO 09
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.10
FCB_DO 10
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 178 -
Default: n/a
November 2013
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DO
P27.11
FCB_DO 11
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.12
FCB_DO 12
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.13
FCB_DO 13
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.14
FCB_DO 14
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.15
FCB_DO 15
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.16
FCB_DO 16
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 179 -
Parameters
P27.17
FCB_DO 17
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.18
FCB_DO 18
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.19
FCB_DO 19
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P27.20
FCB_DO 20
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
10.2.2.28
Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values
The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the operating
panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus.
On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation map in
the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data communication:
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 180 -
November 2013
Parameters

P28.01
HMI Value 01
Default: 1884
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.
P28.02
HMI Value 02
Default: 1880
P28.03
HMI Value 03
Default: 2276
P28.04
HMI Value 04
Default: 2292
P28.05
HMI Value 05
Default: 2236
P28.06
HMI Value 06
Default: 2234
P28.07
HMI Value 07
Default: 2224
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 181 -
Parameters
P28.08
Default: 2226
HMI Value 08
P28.09
HMI Value 09
Default: 1904
P28.10
HMI Value 10
Default: 1960
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 182 -
November 2013
Event (Error) Messages
11 Event (Error) Messages

Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.
There are four different event classes:

Event Class
Code
Display / Effect
Alarm
All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1
W1
The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2
W2
The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been corrected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore
IG
Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Event Group
Symbol
System message
SY
Sequence monitoring
SC
Electrical system
WE
Mechanical system
WM
Material flow
MF
Interlocking
IL
Controllers
CO
Calibration
CA
Maximum
HI
Minimum
LO
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 183 -
Note: In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
11.1
Events Details
11.1.1 Event Group: Calibration

CA01
(P06.04)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the load cell signal is invalid. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder
into volumetric mode, regardless of the value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn
device off and restart.
CA02
(P06.03)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is
lost or is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
CA09
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 184 -
(P06.17)
November 2013
Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during normal operation.
11.1.2 Event Group: Controller

CO01
(P06.13)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control
demand signal reaches its upper limit.
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After
some time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
1. Material flow missing or irregular.
2. External feed rate controller wrongly set.
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed
rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA.
CO05
(P05.02)
The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a
weighing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing system.
Action to be taken:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
11.1.3 Event Group: Electrical System

WE01
(P06.08)
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 185 -
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after
a loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during
normal remote mode operation.
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization
takes place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
WE08
(P06.15)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate demand signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance
space of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted
with noisy input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
WE15
(P15.05)
WE16
(P15.06)
11.1.4 Event Group: Interlock

IL01
Event: Run Disabled
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 186 -
(P03.11)
November 2013
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the
Run Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run
Enable feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
The parameter is normally set to W2 so that there is an indication on the display
when the feeder is disabled.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be
set to DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This
switch is used to stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or disconnected.
Action:
- Check the position of the Run Enable switch.
- Check the wiring to the Run Enable switch.
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT display and
in this case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
IL10
Event: FCB-Error
(P26.22)
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the
link stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating
states may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P26.21 FCB Variant. No
further links can be loaded as long as this event is identified. If in this error state a
link with a different name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into
P26.21.
11.1.5 Event Group: Material Flow

MF05
Event: Moisture MAX
(P12.10)
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 187 -
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by
P12.08 Moisture MAX.
MF13
(P09.14)
The event will be detected in case the actual temperature is above the threshold
(P09.13 Temperature MAX). The controller might fail to function.
Countermeasures:
- Check temperatur of environment
- Install cooler close to the controller
MF14
Event: Remote TCI too small
(P02.15)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the
Total Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can operate. See parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
This parameter should be set to W2.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a smaller value.
11.1.6 Event Group: MAX

HI01
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 188 -
(P06.06)
November 2013
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is
set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the
value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
- Check material infeed.
HI02
(P09.04)
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX.
This parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
HI03
Event: Load MAX
(P09.08)
exceeds the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX.
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
HI04
Event: Speed MAX
(P09.12)
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 189 -
exceeds the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
HI05
Event: Deviation
(P06.12)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can
differ from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation for a time greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W 2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.
11.1.7 Event Group: Mechanic

WM02
Event: Slip
(P07.08)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the
limit specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
The parameter is normally set to IG.
WM03
Event: Belt Skew
(P07.16)
Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable.

Action: See Event: Belt Drift
Related threshold: Belt Skew
WM04
Event: Belt Drift
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 190 -
(P07.14)
November 2013
The belt has exceeded the tolerance levels set.

Steps:
1. Remove any soiling to the tail and drive pulleys
2. Align the belt
Monitoring may also be subject to error. Therefore: keep an eye on the service value
for the belt motion sensor and correct any errors that may arise.
Related threshold value: Belt Drift
WM05
Event: Slip 2
(P18.08)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is
detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sensor 2 (P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2.
WM06
(P13.06)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor
(CMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ignore) if not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
WM07
(P15.11)
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 191 -
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is
detected.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the feeder
discharge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is
lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
WM08
(P15.14)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is detected (coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while
running in Remote.
WM09
Event: Motor Start
(P15.18)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback
signal (P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop Feeder)
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the
controller.
WM10
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 192 -
(P07.03)
November 2013
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor
(BMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a BMM is installed. Setting it to
IG (Ignore) will disable the BMM feature.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
WM11
Event: Coal Flow
(P15.21)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material
flow is detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed
and IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout
above the feeder.
WM12
Event: Coal on Belt
(P15.15)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run
in Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop feeder).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running
in local or calibrate mode.
11.1.8 Event Group: MIN

LO01
(P06.05)
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 193 -
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to
YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value
selected here.
LO02
(P09.02)
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
LO03
Event: Load MIN
(P09.06)
less than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN. Set this value to W 2 to simulate the 196NT low density alarm.
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
LO04
Event: Speed MIN
(P09.10)
less than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
11.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring

SC01
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 194 -
(P06.07)
November 2013
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand signal is greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravimetric mode, the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate or P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate. In volumetric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
Depending on selected mode:
a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal
value.
c) Emergency setpoint is active.
SC02
Event: Stand-By
(P06.01)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt drive motor is
stopped because the motor demand signal is less than the limit specified in P06.02
Stand-By Limit Value.
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter
P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
SC03
(P19.04)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
The parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval
elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is
required.
SC04
(P19.02)
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 195 -
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
This parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
SC05
(P15.03)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.04 DI: External Event 1 is active.
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 )
is active.
SC06
(P15.28)
Cause of event:
is active.
SC11
(P15.30)
Cause of event:
is active.
SC12
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 196 -
(P15.32)
November 2013
Cause of event:
is active.
11.1.10 Event Group: System Message

SY01
Event: Memory
(P06.14)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller detects an
error in the internal non-volatile memory. Reload the non-volatile memory by using
the "Load Default Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists,
the controller must be replaced.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop feeder).
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal
parameters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all parameters must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels
must be re-trimmed.
SY07
Event: Communication VHM serial
(P01.01)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch
screen HMI must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located
toward the center of the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
The parameter should be set to W2 (Warning with automatic reset).
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?
SY08
(P22.03)
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 197 -
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P22.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10
(P22.22)
Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.

Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
SY12
(P01.02)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not
operate when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 198 -
November 2013
Default I/O Points
12 Default I/O Points

12.1
Default Digital Inputs
Note: The default parameter must be set to n/a if the digital input is reallocated.
Input
Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
Comments:
DI 1
X1-6
118
P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL
Not normally used. P03.12 must be set to

Keyboard Only or Keyboard & Local if this
point is reallocated.
DI 2
X1-4
112
P03.01 Feeder Start
Start contact from customer DCS
DI 3
X1-2
113
P03.07 DI: Raise Setpoint
Not Normally used. Must be enabled when

P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint is set to R-L.
DI 4
X2-6
110
P15.17 DI: Motor feedback
Running contact from motor speed control
DI 5
X2-4
109
P15.09 DI: Discharge Pluggage Limit Switch Feeder Discharge (LSFD)
DI 6
X2-2
117
P15.22 DI: Configuration Lock
Keyboard lock
DI 7
X3-6
108
P15.12 DI: Coal on belt switch
Limit Switch Feeder Belt (LSFB)
DI 8
X3-4
111
P03.10 Source Run Enable
Must be enabled when (optional) touch

screen HMI is used.
DI 9
X3-2
119
P15.25 DI: Local Start
Not normally used. P03.12 must be set to

Keyboard Only if this point is reallocated.
DI 10
X4-7
116
P15.19 DI: Coal Flow Monitor
Set P15.21 Event: Coal Flow to A, W1 or

W2 to enable the coal flow monitor or IG to
disable it.
DI 11
X4-5
114
P03.08 DI: Lower Setpoint
Not Normally used. Must be enabled when

P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint is set to R-L.
DI 12
X4-2
115
P07.01 DI: Belt Motion Monitor
Set P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor to A,

W1 or W2 to enable the belt motion monitor
or IG to disable it.
DI 13
X5-5
n/a
NAMUR BMM input
n/a
P04.06 Speed Measurement
NAMUR Tachometer input
X5-6
DI 14
X5-3
X5-4
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 199 -
Default I/O Points
Input
Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
DI 15
X5-1
145
X5-2
146
12.2
Comments:
Can only be used for tachometer input.
Default Digital Outputs
Note: The default parameter must be set to n/a if the digital output is reallocated.
Each output is a single form C contact (NO, C, NC).
Output Terminal
Number Block
DO 1
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
X10-1 thru 150-152
P16.09 DO: ALARM
Comments:
Feeder has tripped.
X10-3
DO 2
X10-4 thru 156-158

X10-6
DO 3
DO 4
P16.06 DO: Feeder Run Reverse
X11-3
P16.07 DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd)
X11-4 thru 162-164
P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL
Feeder is ready for normal (remote) operation.
P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode
Weigh system error. Feeding in volumetric

mode.
P16.23 DO: Feeding
Running in Remote with coal on the belt.
X11-1 thru 159-161
X11-6
DO 5
X13-1 thru 165-167

X13-3
DO 6
X13-4 thru 171-173

X13-6
DO 7
DO 8
X14-3
P16.04 DO: Feeder Run Forward
X14-4 thru 180-182
P16.21 DO: WARNING
Minor error condition.
n/a
Spare Contact
X14-1 thru 177-179
X14-6
DO 9
X15-1 thru 194-196

X15-3
DO 10
X15-4 thru 197-198
P13.01 DO: CleanOut Timer
X15-6
DO 11
X16-1
7, 8
P16.01 DO: Scale Start
X16-2
DO 12
X16-3 thru 186-189
P02.12 DO: Pulse Counter
Pulsed based on amount of coal delivered.
X16-6
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 200 -
November 2013
Default I/O Points
Output Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
Comments:
DO 13
134, 135 P02.17 DO: FRI Frequency
Frequency signal proportional to feedrate.
X6-1
X6-2
12.3
Default Analog I/O
I/O
Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Number
AI 1
Sig +, Sig- P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint
X6-3
Default
Parameter
Comments:
Customer Demand Signal
X6-4
AO 1
X6-8
142-144
P11.03 AO: Motor Speed

Control
139-141
P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
Customer Feedback Signal
n/a
P01.03 Analog Channel A10
Not used
n/a
Not used
n/a
Not used
n/a
Not used
X6-9
AO 2
X6-7
X6-8
A 10
X12-1
X12-2
A 11
X12-3
X12-4
A 12
X12-5
X12-6
A 13
X12-7
X12-8
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 201 -
Trending Data
13 Trending Data
This item lists the most important data addresses available with the trending display.
Data
Address:
Data Value:
Unit Comments:
1872
Feedrate
lb/h
1874
Totalizer 1
lb
1876
Totalizer 2
lb
1878
Totalizer 3
lb
1880
Belt Load
lb/f
1884
Belt Speed
f/s
1894
Setpoint
lb/h
1904
Deviation
1906
Moisture
1908
Corrected Feedrate
lb/h
1910
Totalizer 1 corrected
lb
1912
lb
1914
lb
1920
Analog Output 1
mA
1938
Belt Slip
1942
Relative Feedrate
1944
Relative Belt Load
1946
External Setpoint
lb/h
1950
Tachometer 1
Hz
1952
Utilization LC
1954
Loadcell VAP
mV/
V
1956
Loadcell BIC
mV/
V
1958
Loadcell
mv/
V
1960
Controller Magnitude
mA
1996
Nominal Belt Load
lb/f
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 203 -
Trending Data
Data
Address:
Data Value:
Unit Comments:
2008
Actual Tare
lb/f
2042
Relative Setpoint
2078
Corr. Rel. Feedrate
2082
2-Sensor Slip
2212
Analog Output 2
mA
2214
Analog Input 1
mA
2224
Loadcell 1
mV/
V
2226
Loadcell 2
mV/
V
2228
Utilization LC 2
2230
Gravimetric Total
lb
2232
Volumetric Total
lb
2234
Material Total
lb
2236
Rate
lb/h
2238
Analog Input 2
mA
2240
Analog Input 3
mA
2242
Analog Input 4
mA
2244
Analog Input 5
mA
2246
Analog Input 1 (A10)
mA
2248
mA
2250
mA
2252
Analog Input 4 cor.
mA
2254
Analog Input 5 cor.
mA
2256
Analog Output 3
mA
2258
Analog Output 4
mA
2260
Analog Output 5
mA
2262
Analog Output 6
mA
2264
Analog Output 1 (A10)
mA
2266
mA
2268
mA
2270
Analog Output 4 cor.
mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 204 -
November 2013
Trending Data
Data
Address:
Data Value:
Unit Comments:
2272
Analog Output 5 cor.
mA
2274
Analog Output 6 cor
mA
2276
Speed
rpm
2278
Belt Speed
inch/
s
2280
Nominal Belt Load
lb/in
ch
2282
Actual Tare
lb/in
ch
2284
Belt Load
lb/in
ch
2286
Speed Setpoint
rpm
2288
FRI output
Hz
2290
Nominal Density
lb/ft
2292
Density
lb/ft
2294
Gravimetric Total corr.
lb
2296
Volumetric Total corr.
lb
2298
Material Total corr.
lb
2300
Belt Load (average)
lb/in
ch
2310
Belt Motion Counter
2312
Digital Mode output
Hz
2316
Belt Speed
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 205 -
Appendix
14 Appendix
14.1
Calculating the setpoint
The setpoint for use in the regulator (refer to Section CTRL) in the Remote operating mode is calculated according to the following scheme:
Fig. 3: Block diagram for calculating the setpoint

INT Integrator
P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
LIM Limit
P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint
Qo Rated charge. For details see

Chapter CTRL
AI Analog input
FB Fieldbus
P Feed rate setpoint
P03.03 Setpoint Range
P03.04 Setpoint Offset

P03.05 Maximum Feedrate
P03.06 Minimum Feedrate
P03.07 DI: Raise Setpoint
P03.08 DI: Lower Setpoint
P03.09 Raise/Lower Response Time
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 207 -
Appendix
P03.13 Speed Setpoint

P03.14 Run Mode Select
P04.09 Tachometer: Pulses per Rev
The controller magnitude is specified to the controller in the OFF/Maint operating mode by P02.16 in percent of
the range that is defined by P11.06 and P11.05.
14.2
Switch-on logic
The Remote in operating mode is calculated according to the following scheme:
Fig. 4: Switch-on logic

DI Digital Input
P03.01 Feeder Start
FB Fieldbus
P03.10 Source Run Enable
OP The keyboard for the VHM or EasyServe operator panel
P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value
ERR Any ALARM

LOCK Release signal from the downstream process
STB Automatically turning off the main drive at low
controller magnitude
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 208
November 2013
Appendix
RUN-D The switch-on command for the external power

unit for starting the feeder
R-AD The switch-on command for the external power
unit for starting optional auxiliaries
R-FB The Feeding is Running report on the plant
control system
Belt operation is started in the OFF/Maint operating mode from the operator panel or EasyServe by pressing the
RUN <<, RUN >>, STOP, JOG << and JOG << buttons or with the set-up program. In addition, P15.26 and
P15.27 can be used to configure input signals for connecting buttons to have the belt run forwards and backwards.
The locking signal from the downstream process is ignored. ALARM switches the drive off. The R-FB report
(Feeder is Running) is not set.
November 2013
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 209 -
Appendix
14.3
Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE)
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 210
November 2013
Appendix
UBALI
P11.10
tp
--------4
P04.02 X P04.04
P04.01 X P04.03 X cos(P04.05)
P09.11
P10.03
HI04
L004
P1o.os-.
P08.06
P09.09
P10.10 ---- )
P08.05
ro +---()9.-+----1
P09.07
HI03
L003
P09.05
P12.xx
Q
P09.03
P08.02
HI02
L002
Schenck Process Group
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 211 -
Appendix
Fig. 5: Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE)

F1 Load on load cell 1
P02.21 DC_Mode
F2 Load on load cell 2
P04.01 LC Characteristic Value
f Tachometer 1
P04.02 LC Rated Capacity
RAW1 Loadcell 1
P04.03 Effective Platform Length
RAW2 Loadcell 2
P04.04 Lever Ratio
n Speed
P04.05 Angle
v Belt Speed
I Rate
P04.07 Source Load Cell
UBAL! Event: Significantly uneven load on load cells

1 and 2 (refer to controller operating modes
for instructions).
Q Belt Load
P04.08 Source Load Cell 2
P04.09 Tachometer: Pulses per Rev

P04.10 Load cross section
TA Basic (Cal1) or TW: Tare adjustment program
P08.01 LC Filter
P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate
LP filter Low-pass filter

BIC Belt Influence Compensation:
P08.03 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
Belt Influence Compensation

P08.04 Feedback Filter Override Threshold
ZDO Zero Drop Out:

Suppressing tare errors when operating
without bulk solids
P08.05 Filter: Belt Load
ro Bulk solids density
P08.06 Filter: Belt Speed
MOIST Moisture correction

Refer to separate chapter
P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
CTRL Feed rate controller

HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
HI03 Event: Load MAX
P09.05 Limit: Load MIN
HI04 Event: Speed MAX
P09.07 Limit: Load MAX
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 212 -
P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
November 2013
Appendix
LO03 Event: Load MIN
P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX
LO04 Event: Speed MIN
S1G Gravimetric Total
P10.03 Range Correction TW
S1V Volumetric Total
P10.04 Range Correction TC
S1T Material Total
P10.05 Range Correction TM
S1 Totalizer 1
P10.10 Basic Tare
S2 Totalizer 2
P11.10 Platform Dis.Length
S3 Totalizer 3
TW Span (Cal2) set-up program
TC CW: Span Calibration set-up program (TC:
weight control)
TM Manual adjustment with bulk solids weighed
on an external scale
VAP Feeding with reference to the feeder's discharge point
November 2013
Appendix
14.4
Feed rate controller (CTRL)
Fig. 6: Feed rate control (CTRL)

P Feedrate Setpoint
P02.05 P02.05
I Rate
P11.01 P-Component KP
f Tachometer 1
P11.02 I-Component TN
xd Deviation
P11.03 AO: Motor Speed Control
Y Controller Magnitude
P11.04 Lower Limit
Q Belt Load
P11.05 Upper Limit
v Belt Speed
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 214 -
November 2013
Appendix
MEASURE Measuring the feed rate
P11.07 Position at STOP

PI Proportional integral controller
P11.08 KP speed controller
LIM Limit
IDENT Identifying the system behavior to determine system parameters
VFD Drive feed rate controller (external)
vol-S Volumetric operating mode
grav Gravimetric operating mode
Speed
Qs Belt load measured in gravimetric operation in units of weight per length for use
in volumetric operation
Q0 Refer to explanation below
Normal Gravimetrically controlled normal operation
S-UP Volumetric operation over approximately
30 s after turning on the supply voltage
Stop Stopping the controller when the limit is
reached
The Q0 rated belt load in units of weight per length is calculated according to the following regulation:
If the load is measured (P04.07 and P04.08 unequal n/a):
Q0 = P02.05 / P02.06
If the load is not measured (P04.07 and P04.08 equal n/a):
Q0 = P03.15 / P04.10
General Diagram
The PI controller is of the model
Only P controllers and I controllers are possible as a special case.

The controller is stopped when the controller magnitude in the LIM block is run up to its limits.
Controller parameters
November 2013
Appendix
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the following diagram.
Fig. 7: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0
The abbreviations are as follows:

Controller parameters
Meaning
KP
P-portion of the feed rate controller related to the nominal feed rate as a % / %
or a dimensionless P-portion of the speed controller.
TN
Reset time in seconds.
Tab. 6 : Controller parameters
Parameter value
Special case
KP = 0
I-controller: KI = 1/TN in % / (mA/s)
TN = 0
P-controller: I-portion will be deleted
KP=TN=0
Controller output = controller increase
Tab. 7 : Special cases of controller parameter setting
Types of operation
Mode of operation
Specified condition
Characteristics
Gravimetric
The feeder is switched on and at least 40 s of

voltage switched on. No condition for volumetric
operating modes
The actual feed rate is controlled to the setpoint

and paying attention to the values measured for
belt load and speed.
P03.14 = Frate
Volumetric Synchronous
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 216 -
The No Coal on the Belt transmitter has responded or

the volumetric control command is specified
from outside
P03.14 = Frate
Display: gravimetric operation

Volumetric output is not activated
The actual feed rate is calculated from the
speed and the belt load value ascertained
just before the event occurs and then controlled
Issuing the gravimetric feed rate and calculating the integration of the totalized amount of
material as in gravimetric operation
November 2013
Appendix
Mode of operation
Specified condition
Volumetric through
errors
The difference in measuring results for the load

cells on the right-hand and left-hand side of the
feeder is greater than 25% or the load cells are
underloaded or overloaded
Characteristics
P03.14 = Frate
Display: volumetric operation

Volumetric output is activated
The actual feed rate is calculated from the
speed and belt load value ascertained over
the last hour before the error occurred and
then controlled
The totalized amount of material is added up
in the meter for the volumetric totalized
amount of material, not in the meter for the
gravimetric totalized amount of material.
Fixed speed
P03.14 = Speed Setpoint
Feeding at the speed as set in P03.13
Speed controlled
P04.07 and P04.08 equal to n/a
Target belt speed
P03.14 = Frate
= target feed rate / Q0

with:
Q0 = P03.15 / P04.10
Mode of operation
Specified condition
Characteristics
Standby
The controller magnitude is below the limit set by

P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value
The external drive is turned off to protect the

motor and feed rate controller and starts automatically when the controller magnitude is in excess
of the limit. It continues to report that the Feeder
is Running to the plant control system.
Zero drop out
The belt load drops below the limit set by P05.05

Zero Drop-Out Limit.
The load is set to zero to ensure that small tare

errors do not cause the integration of the totalized
amount of material to continue with longer running.
Tab. 8 : Special modes of operation
The upper limit of the controller magnitude can be reduced to prevent excess feeding of hazardous substances
at a low target feed rate.
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 8: Upper controller magnitude limit
.
MX
The value of the P11.05 Upper Limit parameter
P%
The target feed rate in % of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
Y-MAX
The limit for the controller magnitude
This figure shows an example of the correlation for three selected settings of the MX parameter.
Behavior with a power failure and return in regular feeding operation

The controller below the line is only in operation for T_Start = approximately 30 s after adding voltage. The weigh
feeder runs volumetrically during these 30 s. The constants needed for volumetric operation are determined
regularly during gravimetric operation in the IDENT block. Feeding is not possible during T_Start if the feeder
was not yet in operation gravimetrically before adding voltage.
14.5
Belt slip identification
14.5.1 Motion monitoring (BMM)

A sensor is mounted on a roll that rotates when the belt moves. That might be an idler or the tail pulleys that are
not driven. After turning on the scale, it monitors to make sure that the signal of the sensor changes within the
time set in P07.02. Then the assumption is made that the belt is moving.
14.5.2 2-sensor slip monitoring

Belt slip on the head pulley can be ascertained and monitored with a second sensor on a carrying idler driven by
the belt.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 218 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 9: 2-sensor slip identification

S1 Sensor 1, for instance on the head pulley
S2 Sensor 2, for instance on the tail pulley
M The drive motor of the belt
T Impulse tachometer on the drive motor
P:S1 Selecting the source of signal 1. Relevant parameters:
P18.02 Source Sensor 1
If P18.02 = speed: P04.06 Speed Measurement
If P18.02 = DI: P18.03 DI: Sensor 1,
vs or S1C is selected depending upon the signal source selected
P:S2 Selecting the source of signals 2: P18.05 DI: Sensor 2
S1C Impulses per length of sensor 1: P18.04
S2C Impulses per length of sensor 2: P18.06
vs Impulses per length on the main tachometer: P10.02
P_U Impulses per belt circuit: P10.11
SLP Slip service display 2-Sensor Slip
WM05 Event: Slip 2
November 2013
Appendix
MAX P18.07 Slip Value 2
The smallest measurable slip S_MIN is the larger of the values A and B:
A = 2 * 100 * vs /(P_U *S1C)
B = 2 * 100 * vs /(P_U *S2C)
Example
vs = 10000
P_U = 30000
S1C = S2C = 100
S_MIN = 0.667%
If P18.07 < S_MIN: S_MIN has an effect
Note
The impulses and pauses between impulses to S1 and S2 have to be at least 1.2 s long. If digital inputs are
used on the first VCU of a scale, the impulse and pause have to be at least 0.2 s long.
14.6
Belt drift and slip identification via mark in the belt
Prerequisite: A belt is used with an integrated mark (triangle). The parameters in the Belt Monitoring block
should be adjusted.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 220 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 10: Belt drift and slip measurement

T The mark (triangle) in the belt
Le The length of the triangle (P07.10 )
V Proximity sensor
W The width of the triangle (P07.11 )
L The belt drift to the left
N Normal belt position
R The belt drift to the right

Sig Sensor signal
SLP Belt slip

SP Belt splicing point
Belt drift identification

If the belt runs in the middle of the idlers, the sensor is mechanically set so that a Belt Drift service value is
shown to be approximately equal to zero if P07.12 = 0.
November 2013
Appendix
The length (T) of the signal (-t1 or +t2) changes if the belt drifts to one side. Event: Belt Drift is first identified at
low drainage and Event: Belt Skew is identified at greater drainage depending upon the size of the triangle.
P07.12 can be used to finely adjust the position of the sensor in relation to the triangle according to the mechanical setting so that a Belt Drift service value is shown that is equal to zero if the belt is in the middle position.
Belt slip identification

Event: Slip is identified if the duration T_rev measured for a complete belt revolution is in excess of the limit in %
set in P07.07 of a complete belt revolution.
Note
Monitoring needs two complete belt revolutions after starting feeding for synchronisation. Events are not identified during this period.
14.7
Monitoring the mechanism
The following signals can be connected for monitoring the mechanism of the feeder and bulk solid flow.
Fig. 11: The VCF monitoring mechanism

FLOW- Monitoring the flow of bulk solids in the feed
M area
P15.19 DI: Coal Flow Monitor
LSFB The sensor for bulk solids on the belt
P15.12 DI: Coal on belt switch
BMM Belt run monitoring
LSFD Monitoring an obstruction on the discharge
P15.09 DI: Discharge Pluggage
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 222 -
November 2013
Appendix
Other monitoring signale can be activated for electrical and mechanical malfunctions with the Digital Inputs parameter block.
14.8
Moist correction (MOIST)
You can use the Moisture parameter group to activate a correction in the actual value used for regulating the feed
rate. The proportion of foreign matter (such as water) in the bulk solids fed is ascertained externally and
communicated to the weighing system. The system uses this as a basis for recalculating the weight ascertained
including foreign matter to the net value of the proportion relevant to the downstream step in the process by subtracting the quantity of foreign matter. The mass flow rate is gravimetrically controlled based upon the net value.
In other words, the quantity corresponding to the weight of the foreign matter is also fed. The integration of totalized amount of material of the gross or corrected net value can be selected as a signal source for the impulse
output.
Fig. 12: A block diagram of moisture correction
14.9
The procedure for adjusting the frequency output
DISOCONT Tersus has a frequency output (FRI, P02.17 DO: FRI Frequency) where the frequency is proportional to the current feed rate. The frequency output is already precisely adjusted by entering the ratio of output
frequency to the feed rate in P17.04. Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the receiving opposite point. This calls
for switching defined frequencies to the output.
They are set without bulk solids. Start off by setting P17.04. Then call up the Simulation Mode operating mode
with the operator panel or EasyServe (Simulation Mode [44]). It is advisable to store the current parameters.
The parameters for current error reports with the ALARM event class should now be changed so that they can
November 2013
Appendix
operate without an alarm. The P04.07 and P04.08 parameters should be set to n/a. P03.01 and P03.02 should
be set to OP.
Switch on the feeder. It runs at the target feed rate set on the operator panel or via EasyServe. Simulation simulates an actual feed rate that is equal to the target feed rate after running for a while. The setpoint is now set to
the lowest value (refer to P03.06). The first opposite point is adjusted. Now the maximum setpoint is set (P02.05
and P03.05). The second frequency parameter can be adjusted externally.
Then the parameters previously stored should be activated again.
14.10 PLC Functionality (Optional)

As with a PLC, the functionality for simple additional tasks can be expanded using signal links and function
blocks. The function block links can only be configured using EasyServe. A configuration can be loaded into or
read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately after being loaded.
All signals available in the fieldbus are available as input signals for the function blocks. The output signals are
integrated into the DISOCONT Tersus' standard signal processing via the parameters of the groups 'FCB analog
outputs' and 'FCB digital outputs'.
A loaded and active link is displayed on the operating panel above the 'Help' button next to the information on
the program. The 'Empty' link signifies the factory settings with no additional links.
Fig. 13: Example of a function block link
In the example, a binary input signal, e.g. a DISOCONT Tersus input contact, is read in through the input block
'GP-Din 1' output to the AND gate 'And 1-4' through the delay 'Delay 1' and an inverter. The other inputs are
connected to the constant '1' and a frequency generator 'Cycle 1'. This provides the output with a cyclical signal
when the waiting period has elapsed after the input has been set. The output of the AND gate is connected to an
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 224 -
November 2013
Appendix
output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The signal must be connected to a digital output via
P27.01 'FCB_DO 01' to enable physical output.
Note: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN must be installed on the PC to allow working with function
blocks.
14.10.1 Handling the Function Blocks

Function blocks can be processed and linked using EasyServe in expert mode only. The detailed description of
the function block editor is contained in a separate manual.
CAUTION: Links may be created and altered by Schenck Process personnel only.
Configurations can be read out of and into the control. They can be stored on PCs and be called up from there.
Links must be given a name. The 'empty link' as a factory default has the name 'Empty' and should not be used
for other links.
WARNING
Possible loss of functions after replacing the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded it will be necessary to store it separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is replaced then both the parameters and the
function block links must be loaded separately in order to restore full functionality. Alternatively the additional tool DISOPLAN, that contains both the parameters and the function block links, can be used to make a complete backup.
However, this backup can then no longer be used with an updated version of
the scales program.
It is not necessary in a system with the 'Empty' link (see Cleaning the Screen and Information) to reload the link
after a VCU replacement as no functions are expanded using function blocks.
Loading the function software or loading factory settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have any
impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is maintained. Any loaded
link cannot be deleted; it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be overwritten with
a new link that has to contain at least one block.
A loaded link does not have any effect on scale operation as long as the outputs for the link are not coupled to
the scale software with the corresponding P26.01 to P27.20 parameters.
14.10.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals

The following function blocks are available.
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 14: Binary function blocks
No.
1
Type
Binary inputs
quantity
20
'GP-DIn'
2
Binary output
Parameters
Function
Process variable as per the descrip- Connection between the function block
tion of the fieldbus data interface
logic and the function of the standard
program
20
'GP-Dout'
Clock generator
Periodic time
Makes output signals available. Connect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
Signal generator for a periodic signal
'Cycle'
Bin 0
Bin 1
Pulse generator
Time for the pulse
'Time'
6
AND
Generator for the binary constants 1 =

True and 0 = False
The timer has three outputs that supply
an pulse of 0.1 seconds duration at the
time set.
And-link of two input signals
'And'
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 226 -
November 2013
Appendix
No.
Type
quantity
Parameters
Function
AND
And-link of four input signals
Or-link of two input signals
Or-link of four input signals
10
Invert the signal
'And 4'
7
OR
'Or'
OR
'Or 4'
Negation
'Not'
Delay
Delay time in seconds
'Delay'
Tab. 9 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
14.10.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals

Analog signals can be processed with the following function blocks
Fig. 15: Analog function blocks
November 2013
Delays the input signal by the specified

time
Appendix
No.
1
Type
Analog input
quantity Parameter
20
'GP-Ain'
Function
Process variable as per

the description of the
fieldbus data interface
Analog output
20
Comparator
Upper and lower comparative value
Supplies the value 'True' if the input signal lies outside

of the threshold values.
'Comparator'
Input for a continuous variable.
Makes output signals available. Connect using the

parameter in the 'FCB analog outputs' block. Only 5
FKB outputs can be configured to physical outputs. All
outputs are available as measured values in the
fieldbus interface.
'Limit'
10
Upper and lower threshold value
Limits the input signal and becomes 'True' if limitation

arises.
Multiplicator
Supplies the product of the input values at the output
The input value at 'MemInp' is tied to 'Acquire' with the

increasing slope. It is available at the output. At the
same time the 'Hold' output indicates that a value was
stored. The memory can be cleared with 'Reset'.
Makes the sum of the input values available at the

output.
Makes the difference of the input values available at

the output
'Multiplicator'
6
Memory
'Memory'
Addition
'Add'
Subtraction
'Subtract'
Counter
Start value
Supplies the numbered input pulses at the output
Switches one of the three inputs to the output
20
Dividend
Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor
'Counter'
10
Switch
'Analog switch'
11
Multiplication
'Factor'
12
Constant
Divisor
5
Value of the constants
10
Dividend
Supplies the numerical value to the output
'Constant'
13
Offset
'Offset'
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 228 -
Divisor
November 2013
Appendix
14.11 Serial Networks

The individual components of the DISOCONT Tersus communicate with each other serially using one cable,
usually a fieldbus. Few wires are used to transmit the data serially. The advantages of this method are that less
complex cabling must be done to allow the exchange of a lot of signals, that it is resistant to interference, it is
reliable and guarantees that the signals are transmitted accurately.
Different fieldbus systems are used in the DISOCONT Tersus system because of the varying specifications of
the communications behavior. As all of these systems are based on open standards, we wish to refer you to the
standards in question for a complete technical description. This section will explain only a few of the more commonly needed technical details of the bus systems in question.
In order to structure clearly the tasks of the communication system it has been separated into layers that are
based on each other, some of which are subject to different standards. The following table lists a selection
of terms from different layers.
Model
Use in DISOCONT Tersus,

Comments
Relevant Standards
Ethernet
Link to the host computer
IEEE standard 802.3
Link to the VHM operating panel

Link between basic unit VCUs and the service tool
EasyServe
Standard for the hardware layer. The basic unit VCU has 4
ethernet ports as standard.
MODBUS/TCP
Widely-used protocol layer on an ethernet bus
Ethernet/IP
Protocol layer on the ethernet. Often used in Rockwell systems.
http
Protocol layer for the VHM operating panel and for an alternative web browser
RS-485
Alternative link to the operating panel

Link to expansion units
Link to the DISOCONT VHM operating panel
Hardware specification. The basic unit VCU has 2 serial RS485 interfaces as standard.
MODBUS RTU

Protocol layer on differing pieces of hardware, e.g. RS-485
or ethernet
PROFIBUS-DP

Extensive standardization of hardware and protocol layer.
Often used in Siemens systems.
Implemented in the DISOCONT Tersus by means of a plugin card.
November 2013
EIA-485
(RS-485)
Appendix
Model
Use in DISOCONT Tersus,

Comments
DeviceNet
Relevant Standards
Extensive standardization of hardware and protocol layer.

Often used in Rockwell systems.
Implemented in the DISOCONT Tersus by means of a plugin card.
USB
Connection for a bluetooth adapter

The basic unit VCU has one USB interface as standard.
Bluetooth
Wireless connection for the VHM service operating panel or

for a notebook on which the operating software is installed.
Implemented in the DISOCONT Tersus by means of a USB
bluetooth adapter.
RS-232
For loading the program in special situations

Alternative link to the DISOCONT VHM operating panel
Connection between exactly two subscribers.
14.11.1 Ethernet Hardware

Ethernet networks are today implemented in a star topology with a switch as the node. The DISOCONT Tersus
basic unit VCU has its own switch with 5 ports, so that each VCU can be considered to be a node. One of the
ports is connected to the weighing processor and the other four are available for external connections.
Fig. 16: Alternative 'series connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 230 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 17: Alternative 'star connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet
The VCUs are connected to the switch by a category 5e network cable at the RJ45 socket on the VCU. The
maximum length of the cable is 100 m. Intermediary switches or routers or optic fiber converters can be used to
make longer connections.
The ethernet switch of the central unit only (= unit on which the scales software is installed) is available for external connection in systems in which several VCUs have been assigned to one scales. The ethernet ports of the
other VCU units (software VIO xxxxx) are not served.
14.11.1.1
Ethernet Addressing
14.11.1.1.1
MAC Addresses
The manufacturer of any device that can be connected to the ethernet assigns that device a MAC address unique
in the world and unalterable. It forms the basis of physical communication between two subscribers. Ad- dresses
in the IP protocol (IP address) were introduced to simplify the administration of small and of very large networks
(WWW). Routers and switches decode the IP address and transmit the message to the subscriber with the
corresponding MAC address. Subscribers in a subnetwork delimited by a router can be reached by means of a
broadcast command to all subscribers. This allows subscribers in subnetworks to be found.
14.11.1.1.2
IP Addressing
Every subscriber in a (sub)network must have a unique address that has been assigned once only. As opposed
to office networks, addresses in industrial control networks are assigned permanently as the subscribers in the
network seldom change.
The ethernet address setting consists of the components:
IP Address
Subnetwork Mask
Gateway Address
November 2013
Appendix
14.11.1.1.3
IP Address
Unique address of the subscriber in the subnetwork. The bits of the address labeled by the subnetwork mask
must be identical for all subnetwork subscribers. Subscriber addresses in the subnetwork must differ at those
parts in the address which have the value zero in the subnetwork mask.
14.11.1.1.4
Subnetwork Mask
This mask determines the addressable range of a subnetwork. All subscribers in a subnetwork must have addresses that coincide in those bits that have the value 1 in the subnetwork mask.
For example:
Subnetwork mask: 255.255.255.0
Corresponds in binary to: 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
In this example, all subscribers in the subnetwork must have addresses that coincide in the upper 24 bits. The
distinction is made in the lower 8 bits so that 255 subscriber addresses in this subnetwork can be addressed.
In private networks an address range within 192.168.x.x is often used.
14.11.1.1.5
Gateway
Information addressed to subscribers with addresses outside of the range determined by the subnetwork mask
are reached through the gateway. As no subscribers outside of the subnetwork are addressed in self-contained
industrial control networks, the gateway address is usually left at the default setting 0.0.0.0.
14.11.1.1.6
Setting the IP Address in DISOCONT Tersus Systems
The addresses of the subscribers in a network intended for process control tasks are generally permanent. Even
in the event that the equipment is not integrated into a network, we urgently advise giving adjacent equipment
different IP addresses in the same subnet. Otherwise, there might be problems in the PC network configuration if
the cable connection is jacked to the PC so that it will not be possible to establish communication (for instance,
via service tools such as EasyServe or DISOPLAN) until the PC has adapted its configuration to the modified
environment.
The keyboard is used to set the address in the DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel. Either a VHM operating panel or the PC-based service tool EasyServe is required in order to set the address of the central unit VCU.
Changing the address in a running system can cause complete loss of communication, also to other partners! To make sure, the address should only be set when the plant briefly allows an interruption in communication.
The address is set using the DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel as follows:
1: Is the VCU connected to a user-side network?
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 232 -
November 2013
Appendix
Yes
No
Has an IP address been already assigned or cleared

for the VHM operating panel?
Use the factory default addresses:
(The address for the VCU must anyway have been

already determined in the user-side network)
VHM: Address 192.168.240.021
VCU(s): Address 192.168.240.001

Subnetwork mask: 255.255.255.000
Establish a connection between the VCU
and the VHM in the same subnetwork.
The easiest method is to plug a cable
from the operating panel directly into the
VCU.
Yes
No
Generate an address list for the VCUs in

the subnetwork.
Use the keyboard to set the

Cannot be configured
address of the operating panel. using the VHM operating panel.
Disconnect the VCU
from the user-side
network and repeat
from step 1.
2: Is the VHM operating panel
connected to the same subnetwork as the VCU (not
through a router)?
Yes
No
Connect the VHM
operating panel and
the central unit VCU
to the same network.
Continue with step 2.
Search the network for VCU(s) using the operating panel.

Select the VCU to be set and enter the IP address (VCU parameter).
If necessary, reintroduce the VCU into the user-side network.
The address of the central unit VCU is set with the PC-based service tool analogously to the method with the
operating panel VHM. It may be necessary to adapt the network configuration of the PC. This generally requires
administrator rights on the PC.
14.11.2 RS-485 Hardware

Several VCU control units assigned to one scales can be connected to each other by RS-485 interfaces. A VHM
operating panel can also be connected to a VCU for communication across long distances. The same interface
hardware is also used by some forms of the interface to the plant-side controller. The three connections men-
November 2013
Appendix
tioned may not be connected to each other in the DISOCONT Tersus. For this reason the VCU has three separate interfaces for the different communication tasks.
Fig. 18: Possible RS-485 connections
To avoid electrical reflections on the transmission cable, each of the cable ends - and these only - must be terminated with a resistance. The cabling of an RS-485 network should therefore be made in one link, though short
distribution feeders are permitted.
The total length of cable in a network is maximum 1000 m.
Fig. 19: Bus termination for the transmission cable
The bus termination resistances in the DISOCONT Tersus system are integrated into the VCU and VHM components and can be connected using a jumper if required.
The two data wires in the cable used are a twisted pair cable and are individually screened. Further lines, e.g. to
supply a peripheral instrument, can also be included in the cable.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 234 -
November 2013
Appendix
The 'A' and 'B' connections of all devices must be connected.
Fig. 20: RS-485 bus wiring
14.12 Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling

All units of the DISOCONT Tersus have been designed and tested for the anti-interference required of a device
in an industrial environment. They meet the following specifications:
EN 61000-6-2 (Immunity to Interference for Industrial Environments)
EN 61999-6-4 (Electromagnetic Interference for Industrial Environments)
It is not authorized for use in living areas.
Certain steps must be taken when cabling to guarantee the high interference resistance.
The following figure shows correctly mounted cables.
Insulate the cable in the area of the screen plate and contact the cable screen on the screen plate with the
clamps included. Use cable binders to relieve tension.
Fig. 21: Fix cable with cable binders and clamps

1
cable binders for the pull relief
Connecting cable shielding braid
Screen clamp
There are several slits beneath each cable lead-through. The cable clamps will press the cable screen against
the shielding plate if they are inserted into these slits. This will correctly earth the screening. M-shaped slits can
also be used as pull relief for cable binders.
November 2013
Appendix
14.12.1 Thoughts on the Cable Connections

The small number of components makes a DISOCONT Tersus system quite simple to assemble. Nevertheless
you should always check to see what cables are required and whether their quantity and size will fit through the
existing lead-throughs (refer to the table in the section 'Accessories Recommended Cables').
The correct plug type for each input (and output) can be found in the technical specifications of the individual
units, e.g. Phoenix MSTB, grid size 3.5 mm. Each type has a maximum cable diameter that can be used. The
2
maximum wire cross section for Phoenix MSTB plug-in connectors with a grid size of 5 mm is 2.5 mm , for
2
MSTB connectors with a grid size of 3.5 mm maximum 1.5 mm .
Correct cabling is indispensable for optimal electromagnetic interference protection. Please follow the corresponding recommendations.
14.12.2 Screened Cables

The screen of screened cables in generally connected at both ends to GND with a broad-contact connection.
The DISOCONT Tersus is supplied with mounting plates that have an appropriate contact surface in the area
around the cable feed. The outer sheathing is removed from the cables and the cables are then clamped with
the special screen clamps against the contact surface. The screen shielding braid can also be attached to the
mounting plates using a cable binder if clamps are not available.
If the contact point of the signal wires is far from the contact point of the screen, the screen should be left all the
way up to the connecting point of the cable. Then the outer sheathing need only be removed from the cable at
the contact point of the screen. The screen can then be fit as described above.
14.12.3 Unscreened Cables

Unscreened cables can be strain relieved mechanically with the screening plate. There are T-shaped metal
stays on the mounting plate to which cable binders can be connected.
14.13 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation

Most of the function errors are signaled by event messages.
A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently
wrong despite correct parameterization.
A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating voltage
supply to the load cells.
A test connector can show up any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 236 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 22: Test Connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electronics. It
must be: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V 3%.
Note: If other resistance values are used in the test connector, the raw measuring value can be calculated using
this formula: raw measuring value ~ 500 * R2 / R1 [mV/V].
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the setting of the scales' characteristic data. A weight value of approximately 75 kg is shown if the parameter factory settings are used.
14.14 Technical Data VCU 20103
Fig. 23: VCU 20103 in 3D representation with mounting kit
November 2013
Appendix
14.14.1 Dimensions and Position of the Plugs
Fig. 24: Dimensions and position of the plugs VCU 20103 with mounting kit
I
4 x 6.8
Required installation area

4 x boreholes for fastening bolts
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 238 -
November 2013
Appendix
14.14.2 General Technical Data
Operating temperature range (outside of housing)
-25 C ... 50 C
Storage temperature range
-40 C ... 85 C
Humidity
20 % ... 90 % rel. humidity, non-condensing
Protection class
IP20 (intended for installation in a housing)
Weight
2.3 kg
Approbation
CE, UL, ATEX see separate chapter
DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues running
for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The clock buffer
is maintenance-free.
14.14.3 Power Supply

The VCU 20103 is powered by an a.c. voltage supply.
DANGER
Life-threatening voltages
The device must be installed in a housing that obstructs access to live components if the electronics are powered by dangerously high voltages (U > 40 V) or
if there are dangerous voltages at the outputs. A tool must be required to open
this housing. Alternatively, the device can be installed in a room accessible only
to specialist personnel. If not installed in the housing, the live connections have
protection class IP20 only. Therefore, great care should be taken if the housing
is open. The supply voltage should be switched off before the housing is
opened.
AC Voltage Infeed
Rated voltage
115 VAC
230 VAC
Maximum input current during continuous operation
0.8 A
0.55 A
Input voltage failure bridging time
15 ms
80 ms
November 2013
Appendix
Switch-on current (peak current)
16 A
36 A
Frequency range
47 63 Hz
Maximum voltage range
85 265 VAC
Safety recommendation for the customer
16 A device fuses, type C as per EN 60898
Isolation input low voltage
3 kV
Terminal clamp
PE: Connection to the fitting panel

L, N: Connection X8: 1-2
Maximum wire cross-section at clamp
2.5 mm
14.14.4 Auxiliary Voltage for External Subscribers

The VCU 20103 can supply external subscribers such as operating consoles or external relays and valves with
voltage.
Output Voltage
24 VDC 10 %
Output current
0.3 A in total
Maximum wire cross-section at plug
2.5 mm
Overload protection
Permanently short-circuit proof
Connection
X9:1 0 VDC (GND)
X9:2 +24 VDC

X9:3 0 VDC (GND)
X9:4 +24 VDC
Supply for operating panel

VHM (with an RS485 connection [264])
Supply to any external
consumers
14.14.5 Load Cell Input VME0120

The VCU 20103 has two VME0120 measuring channels.
The VME0120 subassemblies are connected to connector strips of the VFE0123 (upper circuit board) below the
cover and are each fixed with two M3 x 5 bolts.
Weighing channels:
VME0120 at connector strip X51.3 W eighing channel LC1 with connection X91
VME0120 at connector strip X51.4 W eighing channel LC2 with connection X92
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 240 -
November 2013
Appendix
Number of inputs
Max. 2
Type
High-resolution input for DMS load cell
Load cell supply voltage
12 V
Maximum output current as a sum for both

inputs
210 mA
corresponds to max. 6 load cells with 350 internal resistance
Load cell sensitivity
1 ... 3 mV/V (max. 26 mV input voltage)
Cable monitoring interval (short circuit, cable

break)
100 ms
Resolution of the measured value
24 Bit = 16 MIO digits
Temperature drift
< 10 ppm / C
Maximum cable length to load cell
500 m (use a special cable from the recommended cable list)
1.5 mm
Connection
6-conductor system; in the case of load cells with 4 conductors, the terminals Ref and U will require bridging in the interconnecting box.
Channel designation
Weighing channel LC1: plug X91
Weighing channel LC2: plug X92
Fig. 25: VME0120: Load cell connection, Pin 1 (X91 or X92)
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 26: VME0120: Load cell input X91 or X92
The colors of the load cell cable conductor vary depending on the load cell model and manufacturer. The following table can be used as a reference. More details can be found on the load cell data sheet.
DISOCONT
Schenck
RT
2.8 mV/V
Schenck
PWS
2 mV/V
VBB
and
HBM Z6
2 mV/V
Schenck
SF4 / SB4
2 mV/V
Tedea
1250
STOCK SBeam
OUT 1
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
REF 1
Black
Blue
Grey
Black
Brown
IN 1
Red
Red
Red
Red
White
Green
28
IN 2
White
White
White
White
Red
White
27
REF 2
Blue
Orange
Green
Green
Blue
Black
81.1
OUT 2
Blue
Green
Blue
Green
Green
Red
Terminal
box
DKK
82
82.1
81
Tab. 10 : DISOCONT Load Cell Connection, Wire Colors
The load cell cable screen should have a large surface area, e.g. it should be attached with a clamp to the VCU
fitting panel (see chapter 'Basic Information on EMC-Compatible W iring'). The entire stretch of cable between
contact point of the screen to the VME0120 plug should be screened. The screen is removed just before the
plug.
Suitable terminal boxes are available for connecting together several load cells of one weighing point. The cable
should be laid separately from working cables. The wire pairs IN, REF and OUT are twisted in the cable and
must be screened pairwise. The cable itself will also require screening as a whole.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 242 -
November 2013
Appendix
14.14.6 Digital Connections

14.14.6.1
Digital inputs
The VCU 20103 has inputs for external switching contacts and inputs for directly connecting proximity sensors.
The logical denotation of the inputs is determined by parameters using the software. LEDs behind the plug indicate the state of the inputs.
14.14.6.1.1
Digital Inputs 24 VDC for General Use
Digital Standard Input

Number of inputs
12
Input voltage
18 ... 36 VDC
Internal resistance
> 3.5 k
Supply voltage
24 VDC (not isolated)
Potential separation
Non-floating against GND and internal +24VDC
2.5 mm
November 2013
X1:5
X1:6
Signal
X1:3
X1:4
Signal
X1:1
X1:2
Signal
X2:5
X2:6
Signal
X2:3
X2:4
Signal
X2:1
X2:2
Signal
X3:5
X3:6
Signal
X3:3
X3:4
Signal
X3:1
X3:2
Signal
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
Appendix
Digital Standard Input
Common connection of all inputs
X4:6
X4:7
Signal
X4:4
X4:5
Signal
X4:1
X4:2
Signal
X4:3
Common
DI10
DI11
DI12
Connecting a switching contact
Fig. 27: Digital input: switching contact connection
Connecting an external signal voltage
Fig. 28: Digital input: external signal voltage connection
The common connection has the electrical potential of the housing
Connecting a two-wire sensor (not conform to EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR))
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 244 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 29: Connecting a two-wire sensor
Take note of the technical data of the sensor when connecting it. The current limiting diode (CLD) must be dimensioned so that the voltage between Sig and Common is less than 2 V when the sensor is not switched on.
On the other hand, the current through the sensor should not exceed 50 mA. When switched on, the voltage
should be at least 18 V.
14.14.6.1.2
Digital Inputs as per EN 60947-5-6 for Connecting Sensors
Sensor input as per DIN EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

Number of inputs
Frequency range if used as impulse input for measuring 0.03 Hz ... 3 kHz
speed
Monitoring
Short circuit and cable break
Switching level if connecting external voltage
2.5 V
Supply voltage
8 V; not isolated; short-circuit proof
Cable
Use screened cables to connect a sensor. Screen attached to the VCU 20100.
2.5 mm
Connections
X5:5
X5:6
0V
X5:3
X5:4
0V
Connecting a Sensor as per EN 60947-5-6 or a Switch (without cable monitoring)
November 2013
DI13
DI14
Appendix
Fig. 30: Digital input: connecting a sensor or a contact at the sensor input
Connecting an external signal voltage
Fig. 31: Digital input: connecting an external signal voltage at the sensor input
The 0 V connection is connected to the electrical potential of the housing.
14.14.6.1.3
Connecting the Sensors for Calibration Markers
The sensor for markers on the belt are connected to sockets CAL-1 and CAL-2 during adjustment.
Socket
0V
24 VDC
Signal input
If both sockets CAL-A (X30) and CAL-B (X31) are used

(plugs W901, W902, W903 to position 2 - 3)
Sensor A at CAL-A
Sensor B at CAL-B
If socket CAL-B (X31) is used for both sensors
(plugs W901, W902, W903 to position 1 - 2)
Sensor A
Sensor B
Tab. 11 : Pin assignment for belt marker sensors
Maximum permissible current from the supply: 100 mA

Internal resistance of the inputs: 4.4 k
Input voltage for ON state: 5 ... 24 VDC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 246 -
November 2013
Appendix
14.14.6.1.4
Connecting the Speed Sensor
The following alternatives for the speed sensor are supported:

- Proximity switch as per EN 60947-5-6; see Digital Inputs as per EN 60947-5-6 for Connecting Sensors
[245]
- Inductive signal transmitter at logic input DI15
Connections for isolated sensors
X5:1-2 (no preferential polarity)
Maximum signal voltage
15 V
Internal resistance
20 k
Maximum input frequency
3 kHz
Maximum cross-section of the connecting cable wires
2.5 mm
Tab. 12 : Technical data for the inductive transmitter input
14.14.6.2
Digital Outputs
14.14.6.2.1
Relay Outputs
The unit has 11 equal relay outputs and one relay output with special functions. The logical denotation of the
outputs is determined by parameters using the software. LEDs beside plug X10 show the state of the outputs.
DANGER
Life-threatening voltages
The device must be installed in a housing that obstructs access to live components if the electronics are powered by dangerously high voltages (U > 40 V) or
if there are dangerous voltages at the outputs. A tool must be required to open
this housing. Alternatively, the device can be installed in a room accessible only
to specialist personnel. If not installed in the housing, the live connections have
protection class IP20 only. Therefore, great care should be taken if the housing
is open. The supply voltage should be switched off before the housing is
opened.
Number of outputs
12
Description
DO1 ... DO12
Connections
November 2013
Logic output
Plug
Pin NO
contact
Pin root
contact
Pin NC
contact
Contact
type
DO1
X10:
Form C:
DO2
X10:
Changeover
contact
DO3
X11:
Appendix
DO4
X11:
DO5
X13:
DO6
X13:
DO7
X14:
DO8
X14:
DO9
X15:
DO10
X15:
DO11
X16:
Form A:
DO12
X16:
Closing
contact
X16
2.5 mm
Contact rating
DO01 DO11: 230 VAC
Max. contact voltage
DO12: 24 VDC
Isolated against each other
230 VAC base isolation
Isolation against control low voltage
DO01 DO11: 230 VAC double isolation (protective separation)
Max. switching current (ohmic load)
DO01 DO11: 1.5 A

DO12: 50 mA
Service life
DO01 DO11: Minimum 20*10 cycles

6
DO12: Minimum 500*10 cycles
Note: DO12 is implemented twice and intended for the control of external electromechanical counters. Alternatively, the electronic output [249] DO13 can be used to control an external counter. The power for DO12 must
be taken from the integrated power supply of the VCU 20103. The figure shows the proper connections for
X16: 5 and 6. X16: 3 and 4 have to be connected in a similar manner.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 248 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 32: Connection of an external totalizer at DO12
14.14.6.2.2
Electronic Output
An electronic output is available for signals that switch often. This connection is usually used if an electronic
counter or the counter input of a controller programmable from memory for the integration of the required quantity of bulk material is to be attached.
Number of outputs
Type
Open collector
Description
DO13
Connections
X6: 1-2
2.5 mm
Contact rating
30 VDC
Max. voltage
Isolation against control low voltage
63 VDC
Max. switching current (ohmic load)
50 mA
Fig. 33: Electronic output VCU 20103
November 2013
Appendix
14.14.7 Analog Connections

Assembly VCU 20103 is equipped with one analog output and two analog outputs. It can be backfitted with up to
four further output channels (inputs or outputs).
14.14.7.1
Integrated Analog Input
Number of inputs
Connections
0V
X6: 5
0 20 mA
Ri = 100
X6: 3
0 10 V
Ri = 27 k
X6: 4
Resolution
16 Bit
Maximum wire cross-section
2.5 mm
Isolated from all other voltages
230 VAC
Tab. 13 : Technical data of the analog input
This input is used primarily for setpoint entries.
14.14.7.2
Integrated Analog Outputs
The VCU 20103 has two analog outputs as standard.

Type
Current output
0(4) 20 mA; max. 11 V
Galvanic isolation
For 230 VAC, base isolation from all other voltages
Resolution
14 Bit
2.5 mm
Connections
A01
A02
14.14.7.3
X6:8
+U
X6:9
0V
X6:6
+U
X6:7
0V
Optional Analog Channels
It can be backfitted with up to four further output channels (inputs or outputs) in sockets A10 - A13 beneath the
cover. Once the supply voltage has been shut off, the cover must be removed before they can be installed. The
optional assemblies are installed on the lower circuit board and locked in place with the plastic retainer. The
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 250 -
November 2013
Appendix
additional equipment is identified by attaching the stickers supplied to the cover at the corresponding intended
socket position.
The analog channel connections are always available at plug X12, but have no function if the optional cards are
not installed. The software must be informed that the optional cards have been installed using the parameter
2
settings in block 1. Maximum cross-section of the connecting wire: 2.5 mm .
Channel
Signal
Pin plug X12:
A10
0V
Signal
0V
Signal
0V
Signal
0V
Signal
A11
A12
A13
Tab. 14 : Connections
14.14.7.3.1
Analog Input VAI 20100
Fig. 34: VAI 20100: 1 analog input
Component type
Analog input VAI 20100
Circuit board
VAI0120
Input range
Bridge W100: 2-3
Bridge W100: 1-2
0(4) 20 mA
Ri = 100
0 10 V
Ri = 35 k
Resolution
November 2013
16 Bit
Appendix
Galvanic isolation
14.14.7.3.2
For 230 VAC base isolation against control low voltage
Analog Outputs VAO 20100 / 20103
Fig. 35: VAO 20100 or VAO 20103: 1 analog output
Component type
Current output
VAO 20100
Voltage output
VAO 20103
Circuit board
VAO0120
VAO0123
Range
0(4) 20 mA
0 10 V
max. 11 V
max. 50 mA
Galvanic isolation
For 230 VAC base isolation against control low voltage
Resolution
14 Bit
14.15 Touchscreen Operating Panel VHM

Operators and service personnel can use the VHM operating panel ('Human-Machine Interface') to operate comfortably the DISOCONT weighing electronics. It provides access to all parameters and process variables.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 252 -
November 2013
Appendix
The VHM has a touchscreen for displaying and entering inputs. This allows work to be carried out in harsh and
dirty industrial environments. A lot of VHMs are only used for service jobs since the operation of a feeder often
does not require an operator panel because it is controlled by the plant's process control system. This is why
there is also a portable version available for mobile applications.
14.15.1 General Technical Data

Display
5.7" color display

115 x 86 mm
320 x 240 pixel
400 cd/m
Contrast 600:1
Input
5.7" Resistive touch
Operating temperature range (outside the housing)
-20 ... +60C
Storage temperature range
-40 ... +85C
Humidity
20 ... 90 % relative humidity, non-condensing
Protection class
IP 65 from the front if correctly installed in the console

panel or the housing.
Rear protection depends on the housing.
Weight
November 2013
1 kg
Appendix
Approbation
CE, UL, ATEX see separate chapter
14.15.2 Power Supply

A) Working voltage for the VHM
The VHM can be supplied with DC voltage either by separate clamps (x4) or the ethernet interface (x3).
Rated voltage UB:
24 VDC; 0.15 A
Power consumption:
3.5 W
Operating voltage range:
19 ... 32 VDC
Connection X4: (Phoenix Combicon housing part)
Maximum wire cross-section at plug: 1.5 mm
NOTE: power source can also be the VCU.
Connection X3: Ethernet socket ETH (RJ45)

Precondition: VHM connected to VCU by means of a special cable to VCU:X96 (RJ45 red)
(CAUTION: NOT a PoE standard)
B) Auxiliary voltage for external devices

The VHM can supply peripherals with a regulated 5 V voltage supply:
Connection X1: (Phoenix Combicon housing part)
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 254 -
November 2013
Appendix
This 5 V supply can also be drawn from connection VHM:X2 (type A USB socket).
14.15.3 Data Interfaces

The device has the following interfaces:
Ethernet
Serial interfaces:
USB (the software supports the connection of a bluetooth adapter only)
The data cable screens should be attached using the cable clamps with a broad contact area to the plate.
14.15.3.1
Ethernet
We recommend that you connect device using the ethernet connection for distances of less than 100 m.
The connection is made at socket X3 with a standard patch cable.
NOTE: Pins 4+5 and 7+8 can power the device as well as supply it with data signals. A special coded cable is
required for a direct connection to the VCU. Refer to the chapter 'Power Supply' for details.
14.15.3.2
Serial Interfaces:
A serial interface is used to make connections over longer distances (> 100 m).
The device has two serial interfaces, though in DISOCONT Tersus systems only the RS-485 interface is supported.
NOTE: The device can be powered using the unassigned wires in the data cable from the VCU.
November 2013
Appendix
RS-485 - connection X4: 1 + 2 (Phoenix Combicon housing part)
Bus termination W600: 1-2
RS-232 - connection X1: 1 + 2 + 3 (Phoenix Combicon housing part)
14.15.4 Housing Models

14.15.4.1
Built-In Console Panel Units
This equipment is intended for being installed in the front of a control cubicle or in operating panel. This equipment has a seal. They are pushed from the front into the opening and compactly pressed with the retention
frame from behind to the sheet of the cutout. The contact surface has to be plane. The screws of the retention
frame should be tightened with a torque of 3 Nm so that the entire front frame is lying on the sheet of the cutout.
This ensures protection class IP 65 from the start. Excessive torques can cause damage to the frame.
The back of the equipment has protection class IP 20. The housing has to ensure the protection against foreign
matter and water that may be needed in the application with the built-in units that the equipment is built into.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 256 -
November 2013
Appendix
14.15.4.1.1
VHM 20100 Basic Unit
Fig. 36: VHM 20100 Rear view with holding frame
Fig. 37: VHM 20100 Front view with holding frame
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 38: Dimensions VHM 20100
+1.1
Console panel section (width x height): 186
+1.1
mm x 138
mm
Size of the device front surface (width x height): 202 x 154 mm

Power supply: 24 VDC (separate 24 V power supply unit or power supplied by the VCU)
14.15.4.1.2
VHM 20101 with Power Supply Unit
Built-in console panel unit with own power supply
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 258 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 39: VHM 20101 Rear view
Fig. 40: Dimensions VHM 20101
November 2013
Appendix
The power supply unit mounted on the rear increases the installation depth compared to the VHM 20100 by 70
mm. All other technical details and dimensions of the VHM 20101 are identical with those of the VHM 20100.
Integrated power supply:
Input 85 ... 264 VAC (nominal value: 110 ... 230 VAC)
Output: 24 VDC wired to the operating panel electronics
14.15.4.2
Portable Devices
A portable device can be connected as needed for service work.
14.15.4.2.1
VHM 20110 with Cable Connection
Fig. 41: VHM 20110 with ethernet cable connection
Technical Data (if different from basic unit):
Model
VHM 20110
Protection class
IP65
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 260 -
November 2013
Appendix
Power Supply
24 VDC via data cable
Communication connections
Ethernet
Coded ethernet cable protection class IP 20; length 2 m
V079339.B02
Coded cable protection class IP 65 when plugged
Optional Extras and Accessories:
Functions
Model
Ethernet cable incl. power supply for connection to the VCU as protection class IP 20
VSC 20100
Ethernet cable incl. power supply for connection to the VCU as protection class IP 65
Carrying strap
Holding frame for mounting locally the VHM 20110 at the scales
Fig. 42: Holding frame VHM 20110
November 2013
Appendix
14.15.4.2.2
VHM 20121 Wireless
The holding frame for VHM 20100 is replaced on this device by a low cover plate that provides space for the
battery power supply. The device has protection class IP if all charging inputs are sealed 65.
Fig. 43: VHM 201xx
The device is equipped with bluetooth adapter, batteries and a battery charger. To charge the batteries, open the
cover in a clean environment and plug in the loading cable. The device can also be run with the loading cable
plugged in permanently but will then have protection class IP 20 only. The on-off switch is located beside the
screw connection for the charging unit.
The device can be powered for at least 3 hours if using new, fully-loaded batteries.
Technical Data (if different from basic unit):
Model
VHM 201xx
Protection class
IP65
Power Supply
Nickel metal hydride batteries (NiMH)
Charger connection
24 VDC (charge controller is built into the

VHM)
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 262 -
November 2013
Appendix
Communication
Wireless to the VCU via Bluetooth
Accessories and Spare Parts:
Carrying strap
Spare battery pack (device must be opened for replacement)
14.15.5 Connecting and Commissioning the Operating Panel

The operating panel can communicate with the VCU via ethernet, RS-485 data cable or bluetooth (wireless). For
reasons of safety we recommend using a cable connection for normal operation.
The communication partner (VCU) can be selected at the VHM regardless of the connection type. However, this
selection is made differently depending on the type. The mode of connection must be set at the operating panel.
14.15.5.1
Connecting the VHM Operating Panel via Ethernet
The shortest display buildup time and change times are achieved with an Ethernet connection. The connection
can be permanent for normal operation or can be plugged as required for service access.
The connection is an RJ45 plug X3 on the operating panel. This plug can also supply power to the VHM via the
data cable (not Power over Ethernet).
The following example connections can be combined, though for each a data connection and the power supply
must be guaranteed.
Fig. 44: Example connection VHM with power supply via RJ 45
November 2013
Appendix
The cables between the VCU and VHM have to maintain the Cat5e specification. It can either be connected with
a prefabricated cable with a coded jack for the Ethernet X96 socket of the VCU or with cut goods and a cased
coded jack for field mounting.
Fig. 45: Example connection network with alternatives for the power supply
14.15.5.2
Connection via RS-485
An RS-485 cable connection is selected if the distance between the operating panel and the VCU is greater than
100 m and there is no network available. No more than one operating panel can be operated at the same data
bus.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 264 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 46: Example connection for long distance between operating panel and VCU
Fig. 47: Example connection operating panel with power supply from VCU
The communication cable must be terminated physically at both ends by a activatable bus termination. An incorrect or no bus termination can lead to interruptions in the data transfer.
Bus termination plug
VCU: W410
VHM: W600 and W601
First and last device at the bus
Position 1-2
Position 1-2
All other devices
Position 2-3
Position 2-3
14.15.5.3
Caution: external influences can disturb the bluetooth connection. Safety considerations mean that the wireless
connection may not be used for normal operation. For this reason bluetooth access is intended for service work
only.
November 2013
Appendix
Use the operating panel VHM 201xx with built-in bluetooth adapter to establish a bluetooth connection. Plug the
VCU bluetooth adapter into the USB socket. In demanding circumstances the bluetooth adapter can be connected by cable and installed in a separate housing at a location more favorable for transmission. The cable length
may not exceed 10 m.
Bluetooth constructs a separate wireless TCP/IP network in a separate IP address range. The connection is
established in stages. The connection is selected by choosing the bluetooth communication partner. The subordinate communication layers are then connected automatically.
The range of the bluetooth transmission depends heavily on the physical ambient conditions. Ranges of around
30 m are typical if the partners are within sight of each other (with no glass barrier between them).
14.16 Connecting EasyServe

A computer on which the service software EasyServe is installed can be connected directly to sockets X93/94/95
on the VCU with a standard ethernet cable if this connection can be directly accessed.
It can also be connected to the M12 jack with a special cable if the VCU is installed in a field housing. You can
find instructions on special cables in the appropriate chapter in the appendix.
Note: Using other cables can cause damage to the computer.
EasyServe can also communicate with a VCU via W LAN. This requires installing an external wireless W LAN
access point.
14.17 Prefabricated system cables

Prefabricated VSC2xxxx cables are available for making it easier to connect the assemblies via Ethernet.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 266 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 48: M12 system cable for field cabling
Fig. 49: System cable for control cubicle installation
Fig. 50: Obsolete system cables (only used as spare parts)
November 2013
Appendix
Type
Material no.
VSC20173
V079339.B01
V079339.B02
V079339.B03
VSC28000
V120820.B01
VSC28001
V120821.B01
0.13
VSC28003
V120823.B01
VSC28004
V120824.B01
0.2
VSC28005
V120825.B01
RJ45/RJ45 standard Ethernet cables
V048409.B02
Grey
V130402.B01
30
Red
V130402.B01
30
Yellow
V130402.B01
30
Grey
V061894.B01
Cut-to-size area
Grey
Cat 5e Ethernet cables
Length [m]
Color
Red
Green
RJ45 jack for packaging in the field without tools

Standard RJ45
V083761.B01
Coded for VCU X96
V083761.B02
V097862.B01
M12 plug
M12 plug, 8-pole
Obsolete cables (only used as spare parts)

VSC20170
V087748.B01
0.1
Black
VSC20171
V090181.B01
2.5
Yellow
VSC20172
V090274.B01
Red
Sealing cap for VSC20170
V087559.B01
Tab. 15 : Details of the system cables
Prefabricated assemblies are available for making it easier to connect VCU and VHM via RS485.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 268 -
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 51: Alternatives for connecting VHM via RS485
Used for great distances (not in an explosive atmosphere):

M12-5P 5-pole M12 plug/socket, not compatible to the Ethernet connection
VAK 20170 Terminal box with socket
Material: V095290.B01
VHM 20110-M12-5P The operating units with cables and plugs
If connected in an explosive atmosphere:

EL Plug and socket for use in an explosive atmosphere
VAK20170-3D Terminal box with socket
November 2013
Appendix
If connected in an explosive atmosphere:

VHM 20110-3D The operating units with cables and plugs
14.18 WLAN access point

The Ethernet network can also be extended wirelessly with an adapter by installing a WLAN access point. For
reasons of safety, WLAN access may only be used for service work.
We have only shown the procedure here schematically due to the fact that technology changes very rapidly in
this detail.
1
Configure the WLAN access point with the service program supplied with the equipment. Encoding should be
activated. The local regulations for WLAN networks should be complied with. The IP address of the adapter has to
be in the IP subnet of the VCU.
Mechanically install the WLAN access point and connect the power supply
Establish an Ethernet connection between the WLAN access point and network with standard cables.
The WLAN adapter installed in the opposite mobile point provides a wireless network. The IP address should be
set for this network. It has to be in the same IP subnet as that of the VCUs and it has to be unambiguous in the
subnet.
The connection to the WLAN access point should be established in the mobile equipment.
The VCU of EasyServe or a browser is now accessed with the well-known methods.
Tab. 16 : WLAN access configuration
An example of a suitable WLAN access point

Schenck Process Material
Type
ALL0258
Protection class
IP 54
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 270 -
November 2013
Appendix
Power Supply
24VDC
Plug-in power supply unit and PoE.Injector in the scope of
supply
Fig. 52: WLAN access point ALL0258
14.19 Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling

All units of the DISOCONT Tersus have been designed and tested for the anti-interference required of a device
in an industrial environment. They meet the following specifications:
EN 61000-6-2 (Immunity to Interference for Industrial Environments)
EN 61999-6-4 (Electromagnetic Interference for Industrial Environments)
It is not authorized for use in living areas.
Certain steps must be taken when cabling to guarantee the high interference resistance.
The following figure shows correctly mounted cables.
Insulate the cable in the area of the screen plate and contact the cable screen on the screen plate with the
clamps included. Use cable binders to relieve tension.
November 2013
Appendix
Fig. 53: Fix cable with cable binders and clamps

1
cable binders for the pull relief
Connecting cable shielding braid
Screen clamp
There are several slits beneath each cable lead-through. The cable clamps will press the cable screen against
the shielding plate if they are inserted into these slits. This will correctly earth the screening. M-shaped slits can
also be used as pull relief for cable binders.
14.19.1 Thoughts on the Cable Connections

The small number of components makes a DISOCONT Tersus system quite simple to assemble. Nevertheless
you should always check to see what cables are required and whether their quantity and size will fit through the
existing lead-throughs (refer to the table in the section 'Accessories Recommended Cables').
The correct plug type for each input (and output) can be found in the technical specifications of the individual
units, e.g. Phoenix MSTB, grid size 3.5 mm. Each type has a maximum cable diameter that can be used. The
2
maximum wire cross section for Phoenix MSTB plug-in connectors with a grid size of 5 mm is 2.5 mm , for
2
MSTB connectors with a grid size of 3.5 mm maximum 1.5 mm .
Correct cabling is indispensable for optimal electromagnetic interference protection. Please follow the corresponding recommendations.
14.19.2 Screened Cables

The screen of screened cables in generally connected at both ends to GND with a broad-contact connection.
The DISOCONT Tersus is supplied with mounting plates that have an appropriate contact surface in the area
around the cable feed. The outer sheathing is removed from the cables and the cables are then clamped with
the special screen clamps against the contact surface. The screen shielding braid can also be attached to the
mounting plates using a cable binder if clamps are not available.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 272 -
November 2013
Appendix
If the contact point of the signal wires is far from the contact point of the screen, the screen should be left all the
way up to the connecting point of the cable. Then the outer sheathing need only be removed from the cable at
the contact point of the screen. The screen can then be fit as described above.
14.19.3 Unscreened Cables

Unscreened cables can be strain relieved mechanically with the screening plate. There are T-shaped metal
stays on the mounting plate to which cable binders can be connected.
14.20 EC Declaration of Conformity
November 2013
Appendix
schenck proct'ss
EG-Konformitatserklarung
Declaration of conformity
-s-
Hie11nIerkliirldas UnlernehmenI The Company

Schenck Process GmbH, Pallaswiesenstr. 100,64293 Darmstadt, Deutschland
die Konformitat des Produktcs I herewith declares conformity of the product
DISOCONT Tersus Wagesystem I Weighing system

VCU 2010x, VHM 201xx, VFG 201xx
Optional gefolgt von I Opiionsl followed by
-3D (ATEX Vari ante I ATEX variant )
mit folgenden einschlagigen Best mrnungen I with applicablo rcq1.1lations below
EG - Richtline
i I EC - Directive
20061951EG/EC (Niederspannung I Low 'loltage)
200411081EGIEC {Eiektromagnelische VerlfaglichkeI Electromagnetic compatibility)
94/9/EC
(ATEX; nur Variante x-30 i valiant x-30 only )
Angewendctc harmonisierte Normen I Harmonized standards applied
EN 6020LI-1
2006 iiCI-te.R:-tEifVOI M-\SCI-I!NEN" ELEKTRISCf-IE AUSRVES1\INO VON SCHI JAtl GCI/.EI:-1 ANOR:JERI,INGI;I-1
rE
;::-;-N;-6;;:1;-0101
-:-;---l-,200;;-1;--l-i;;;;;,;:.,;r';""OFi,i,oii ;; ;;s'rfi
,:m ,;i, oi.;,;?. 'irroc: r::L f
.:.F:::L :. ; ;en All GEMtiNt
N"OROEfliJ)o.QE;I\
SAF{TY RtCU.'Rl(1flSf:O.'? F.I.ECTRlCAt ED!JIPMFNTFDR MEASliRPMF!.'>n, 00.\fTRO/. AN ))(..1.BORATORV US. GENER/IL
REOu!foEr,f'NT'/i
EN 61140
2002
$Q-1Uf:Z: <3-EC-:iN ELE'I.TRISCUEN SCt""Lo\C. CE''e-NSAVE AW'ORDe UNOEN ru:n A'iLACii UN O 6HHU$Ml fEl.
AA'JTCTKmJ..GIJNT
.. ELECTRiCSHOCK CO.W J{)fVJ..SPf=CTSF<JI? IU$flll l.ATI0N AD E<JUt;;t.U:NT
EN 61000-6-2
2005
CLO<TROUAGNCllSC..IC W.:RTRI\CGLICf11<.CIT STO!:RfCSTIG:-<EI T FUER U>IOUSTR E;BEREICHE

ElECTROMAGNETiC 00\lP.ATIBfUTY 1/JUVN.'TV FOI< /#)JJS7>JVA EINIRON,'V.ENTS
EN 61000-6-4
2007
[ U:::'<TROVA.GNtTISCHt '.I<:Rmo\C(JLICj.jKJ:IT{CMV) r.o\C.I

. CRUNDNORMEN :>T<.HiRt'U
. SSCHDUNG FUEii.
EN 60079-0
2009
txPLOStON l\;11 Gt I."HIOSF't-ER . it!L0:G.iiRAETE AllGEM;tN I.N OU; HUN:.

; l'"i
EN 60079-31
2009
GXPLOG:IONSF"AE!t G A. i/CSPHAERE TEt! 3t; CERA!:ll: S.lNJ9)if'.-0S! SSC>f'JfZ I)Uf:.CHCEH;\ELISE"l

EXPLOSIVE ANOSPHEF<fS P/.RT JL EQVIPV
. Em WS7(GJ/J1fO.IJ PROTECTKJN 9Y ENCLOSIII?F /"'
DUSTRlESERE
IC E
Et.EC TF.C\'o(A$1\'ItTIC CO.\lFAnOttiTY(fMCJ, GfNF.RIC STANDARDSE_t.(fSStQNSTANDARDFOR I!\'IJUS7R!M... ENtR.CNLENTS
EX?LOSIVE ;m.tOSPHEN.ES PM70.EOliiPMfNT <iE!I.'ERAt REC:WR\tEHTS
(ppa. Groll)
(leiter Ent\hi(:klung/ Head nevelopmenU
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 274 -
November 2013
Index
Index
.PAR Files ................................................................................................................................................................................ 50
2-Sensor Slip.......................................................................................................................................................................... 151
2-Sensor Slip active ............................................................................................................................................................... 151
2-sensor slip monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................... 216
About This Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Access Rights Limitation FB................................................................................................................................................... 161
Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters........................................................................................................................ 49
Adaptation 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Adaptation 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Address .......................................................................................................................................................................... 159, 160
Afterflow Measurement Time ................................................................................................................................................... 97
AI Moisture Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 123
Analog calibration................................................................................................................................................................... 147
Analog Channel A10 ................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Analog Channel A11 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Channel A12 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Channel A13 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Connections ............................................................................................................................................................... 248
Analog I/O Points ..................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Analog Input 1 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 1 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 2 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 2 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 3 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 3 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 4 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Analog Input 4 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Input 5 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Analog Input 5 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Input VAI 20100 ......................................................................................................................................................... 249
Analog Output 1 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 1 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 1 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Analog Outputs VAO 20100 / 20103 ...................................................................................................................................... 250
Analog Trim Function ............................................................................................................................................................... 25
Angle ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 95
AO Actual Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................................................. 127
AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 130
AO Belt Load ......................................................................................................................................................................... 128
AO Density ............................................................................................................................................................................ 130
AO Deviation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
AO Flow Rate corrected ........................................................................................................................................................ 124
November 2013
Index
AO Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
AO Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................................ 125
AO Motor Speed Control ....................................................................................................................................................... 118
AO PLC 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
AO PLC 2 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 165
AO Setpoint........................................................................................................................................................................... 127
AO Speed.............................................................................................................................................................................. 129
Appendix ................................................................................................................................................................................ 205
Auxiliary Voltage for External Subscribers ............................................................................................................................. 238
Basic (CAL 1) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Basic Tare .............................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling ................................................................................................................................. 233, 269
Baud rate........................................................................................................................................................................ 159, 160
Baud Rate .............................................................................................................................................................................. 156
Belt Circuit No. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Belt Circuit Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 116
Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................................................. 108
Belt drift and slip identification via mark in the belt ................................................................................................................. 218
Belt Drift Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................................. 26
Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Belt Load .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Belt Load Offset ..................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Belt Load Range .................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Belt Load, Nominal ................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Belt Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Belt Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Belt Motion Monitor Delay ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive.......................................................................................................................................... 135
Belt Skew ............................................................................................................................................................................... 109
Belt slip identification.............................................................................................................................................................. 216
Belt Slippage Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ................................................................................................................................................ 28
Belt Speed.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
BIC Active .............................................................................................................................................................................. 107
Built-In Console Panel Units................................................................................................................................................... 254
Bypass ................................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Byte Sequence....................................................................................................................................................................... 158
CA01 Event Error LC Input................................................................................................................................................... 182
CA02 Event Tachometer Input ............................................................................................................................................. 182
CA09 Event Primary Tacho Failure ...................................................................................................................................... 182
Calculating the setpoint .......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Calibrating the Feeder.............................................................................................................................................................. 42
Calibration ........................................................................................................................................................................ 52, 182
Calibration ................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
Calibration Data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Calibration probe location................................................................................................................................................... 20, 21
Calibration Probe Span .......................................................................................................................................................... 115
Calibration Weight .................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Calibration Weight Test ............................................................................................................................................................ 55
CC_FC speed controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Chain Motion Delay ................................................................................................................................................................ 126
Chain Test................................................................................................................................................................................ 55
Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ................................................................................................................................................ 152
Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ................................................................................................................................................ 152
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation.............................................................................................................. 234
Cleanout control ..................................................................................................................................................................... 125
CleanOut OFF Time ............................................................................................................................................................... 126
CleanOut ON Time................................................................................................................................................................. 126
CO01 Event Controller Limited............................................................................................................................................. 183
CO05 Event Volum. caused by LC-error .............................................................................................................................. 183
Codepage................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 276 -
November 2013
Index
Commonly Changed Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 15
Communication EasyServe .................................................................................................................................................... 156
Communication Fieldbus........................................................................................................................................................ 157
Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 158, 162
Configuration HMI Values ...................................................................................................................................................... 178
Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU) .............................................................................................. 33
Connecting and Commissioning the Operating Panel ............................................................................................................ 261
Connecting EasyServe........................................................................................................................................................... 264
Connecting the Sensors for Calibration Markers .................................................................................................................... 244
Connecting the Speed Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 245
Connecting the VHM Operating Panel via Ethernet ............................................................................................................... 261
Connecting to Feeder............................................................................................................................................................... 48
Connection between a VHM Operating Panel and a Scales Controller (VCU)......................................................................... 31
Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller ........................................................................................ 34
Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 32, 34, 263
Connection via Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................................... 33
Connection via Ethernet Cable................................................................................................................................................. 32
Connection via RS-232 ............................................................................................................................................................ 33
Connection via RS485.............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Connection via RS-485 .......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Connection via WLAN .............................................................................................................................................................. 34
Control Offset speed controller............................................................................................................................................... 120
Control Sources ....................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Controller................................................................................................................................................................................ 183
Controller Magnitude Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 119
Counter 1 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 83
Counter 2 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Counter 3 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Daily Total Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................. 6
Data Format ........................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Data Interfaces ....................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Data Log Value 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Data Log Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 156
Data Log Value 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 3 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 4 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 5 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 6 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 7 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 8 ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Data Log Value 9 ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Data Log Values....................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Data Logging .......................................................................................................................................................................... 154
DC_Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Default Analog I/O .................................................................................................................................................................. 199
Default Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 197
Default Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 198
Default I/O Points ................................................................................................................................................................... 197
Definitions .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Density Offset......................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Density Range........................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Density Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Deviation Offset...................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Deviation Range..................................................................................................................................................................... 129
DI Acknowledge Events ........................................................................................................................................................ 131
DI Belt Motion Monitor........................................................................................................................................................... 105
DI BIC freeze......................................................................................................................................................................... 107
DI Chain Motion Monitor........................................................................................................................................................ 126
DI Coal Flow Monitor............................................................................................................................................................. 136
DI Coal on belt switch............................................................................................................................................................ 134
November 2013
Index
DI Discharge Pluggage ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
DI External Event 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 132
DI Jog backward ................................................................................................................................................................... 138
DI Jog forward ....................................................................................................................................................................... 138
DI Local Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................... 131
DI Local Start ........................................................................................................................................................................ 137
DI Lower Setpoint.................................................................................................................................................................... 90
DI Mode Switch Lock............................................................................................................................................................. 140
DI Motor feedback ................................................................................................................................................................. 135
DI OFF/Maint CTRL .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
DI Raise Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................................... 90
DI Remote CTRL................................................................................................................................................................... 137
DI Reset Totalizer 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 132
DI Reset Totalizer 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 132
DI Sensor 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 151
DI Sensor 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 152
DI Source Belt Sensor........................................................................................................................................................... 106
DI Volumetric Mode............................................................................................................................................................... 140
Digital Connections ................................................................................................................................................................ 241
Digital inputs........................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Digital Inputs 24 VDC for General Use................................................................................................................................... 241
Digital Inputs as per EN 60947-5-6 for Connecting Sensors .................................................................................................. 243
Digital Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................ 245
Digital Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................ 140
Dimensions and Position of the Plugs .................................................................................................................................... 236
Discharge Pluggage Delay..................................................................................................................................................... 133
Display Formats ....................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Display Functions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 38
DO Actual Flow Rate MAX .................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO ALARM ........................................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO ALARM (2nd) .................................................................................................................................................................. 142
DO Belt Drift .......................................................................................................................................................................... 109
DO Belt Skew........................................................................................................................................................................ 109
DO Belt Slip........................................................................................................................................................................... 108
DO CleanOut Timer .............................................................................................................................................................. 125
DO Deviation......................................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO Dual Tacho active ........................................................................................................................................................... 105
DO Feeder Run Forward....................................................................................................................................................... 141
DO Feeder Run Forward (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................. 141
DO Feeder Run Reverse....................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................. 142
DO Feeder running (2nd) ...................................................................................................................................................... 141
DO Feeder Started ................................................................................................................................................................ 141
DO Feeding ........................................................................................................................................................................... 146
DO Feeding (2nd) ................................................................................................................................................................. 146
DO FRI Frequency .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
DO Load MAX ....................................................................................................................................................................... 144
DO Load MIN ........................................................................................................................................................................ 143
DO Local Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO Moisture active................................................................................................................................................................ 124
DO Moisture MAX ................................................................................................................................................................. 124
DO PLC 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 2 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 3 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 4 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO PLC 5 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 278 -
November 2013
Index
DO PLC 6 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO PLC 7 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO PLC 8 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO Pulse Counter ................................................................................................................................................................... 84
DO Remote CTRL ................................................................................................................................................................. 146
DO Remote CTRL (2nd)........................................................................................................................................................ 146
DO Scale Start ...................................................................................................................................................................... 140
DO Slip 2............................................................................................................................................................................... 153
DO Speed MAX..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
DO Speed MIN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 144
DO Start Prefeeder ............................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO Volumetric Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 144
DO Volumetric Mode (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO WARNING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO WARNING (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................................. 145
DT-9 Parameter List ................................................................................................................................................................. 62
DT-9 Setup............................................................................................................................................................................... 13
EC Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................................................. 271
Effective Platform Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 94
Electrical System.................................................................................................................................................................... 183
Electronic Output.................................................................................................................................................................... 247
Ethernet.................................................................................................................................................................................. 253
Ethernet.................................................................................................................................................................................. 162
Ethernet Addressing............................................................................................................................................................... 229
Ethernet Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................. 228
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 112, 187
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ......................................................................................................................................... 111, 192
Event Acyclic Communication ....................................................................................................................................... 162, 196
Event Analog Input < Offset .......................................................................................................................................... 104, 184
Event Belt Drift .............................................................................................................................................................. 109, 188
Event Belt Motion Monitor ............................................................................................................................................. 106, 190
Event Belt Skew ............................................................................................................................................................ 109, 188
Event Chain Motion Monitor .......................................................................................................................................... 127, 189
Event Coal Flow ............................................................................................................................................................ 137, 191
Event Coal on Belt ........................................................................................................................................................ 135, 191
Event Communication ARM7 .......................................................................................................................................... 79, 196
Event Communication HMI 1................................................................................................................................................... 78
Event Communication VHM serial......................................................................................................................................... 195
Event Controller Limited ................................................................................................................................................ 103, 183
Event Cyclic Communication......................................................................................................................................... 157, 195
Event Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................. 103, 188
Event Discharge Pluggage............................................................................................................................................ 133, 189
Event Error LC Input ....................................................................................................................................................... 99, 182
Event External Event 1.................................................................................................................................................. 131, 194
Event FCB-Error............................................................................................................................................................ 173, 185
Event LC Input < MIN.................................................................................................................................................... 100, 191
Event LC Input > MAX................................................................................................................................................... 100, 186
Event Load MAX ........................................................................................................................................................... 113, 187
Event Load MIN ............................................................................................................................................................ 112, 192
Event Loss of Material................................................................................................................................................... 134, 190
Event Maint. Electric...................................................................................................................................................... 153, 193
Event Maint.Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................... 153, 193
Event Memory ............................................................................................................................................................... 104, 195
Event Moisture MAX...................................................................................................................................................... 124, 185
Event Motor Start .......................................................................................................................................................... 136, 190
Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 .................................................................................................................................... 132, 184
Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 .................................................................................................................................... 132, 184
Event Power Failure ...................................................................................................................................................... 101, 183
November 2013
Index
Event Primary Tacho Failure ......................................................................................................................................... 105, 182
Event Remote TCI too small ........................................................................................................................................... 86, 186
Event Run Disabled ........................................................................................................................................................ 91, 184
Event Setpoint Limited .................................................................................................................................................. 101, 192
Event Slip ...................................................................................................................................................................... 107, 188
Event Slip 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 152, 189
Event Speed MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 114, 187
Event Speed MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 113, 192
Event Stand-By ............................................................................................................................................................... 98, 193
Event Tachometer Input .................................................................................................................................................. 99, 182
Event Temperature-MAX............................................................................................................................................... 114, 186
Event Volum. caused by LC-error ................................................................................................................................... 97, 183
Event (Error) Messages ......................................................................................................................................................... 181
Event Group: Calibration ........................................................................................................................................................ 182
Event Group: Controller.......................................................................................................................................................... 183
Event Group: Electrical System.............................................................................................................................................. 183
Event Group: Interlock............................................................................................................................................................ 184
Event Group: Material Flow.................................................................................................................................................... 185
Event Group: MAX ................................................................................................................................................................. 186
Event Group: Mechanic.......................................................................................................................................................... 188
Event Group: MIN .................................................................................................................................................................. 191
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................... 192
Event Group: System Message.............................................................................................................................................. 195
Event Groups ................................................................................................................................................................... 61, 181
Event Log Values ..................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Events ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Events Details ........................................................................................................................................................................ 182
Exiting HMI Configuration......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Expert Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Factor Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 102
FCB analog outputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 169
FCB digital outputs ................................................................................................................................................................. 174
FCB Variant............................................................................................................................................................................ 173
FCB_AO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 169
FCB_AO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 169
FCB_AO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 170
FCB_AO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 171
FCB_AO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 172
FCB_DO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 174
FCB_DO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 174
FCB_DO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 174
FCB_DO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 06 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 07 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 08 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 09 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 10 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 11 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 12 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 13 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 14 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 15 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 16 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 17 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
FCB_DO 18 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
FCB_DO 19 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
FCB_DO 20 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
Feed rate controller (CTRL) ................................................................................................................................................... 212
Feedback Filter Override Threshold ....................................................................................................................................... 110
Feeder control .......................................................................................................................................................................... 97
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 280 -
November 2013
Index
Feeder Definition ...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Feeder Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Feeder Start ............................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Feedrate Control ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Feedrate Setpoint..................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Fig. 1: Weigh Roller Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... 19
Fig. 10: Belt drift and slip measurement ................................................................................................................................. 219
Fig. 11: The VCF monitoring mechanism ............................................................................................................................... 220
Fig. 12: A block diagram of moisture correction ..................................................................................................................... 221
Fig. 13: Example of a function block link ................................................................................................................................ 222
Fig. 14: Binary function blocks ............................................................................................................................................... 224
Fig. 15: Analog function blocks .............................................................................................................................................. 225
Fig. 16: Alternative 'series connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet...................................................... 228
Fig. 17: Alternative 'star connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet ......................................................... 229
Fig. 18: Possible RS-485 connections ................................................................................................................................... 232
Fig. 19: Bus termination for the transmission cable................................................................................................................ 232
Fig. 2: Principle of belt-drift monitoring ..................................................................................................................................... 26
Fig. 20: RS-485 bus wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 233
Fig. 21: Fix cable with cable binders and clamps ................................................................................................................... 233
Fig. 22: Test Connector.......................................................................................................................................................... 235
Fig. 23: VCU 20103 in 3D representation with mounting kit ................................................................................................... 235
Fig. 24: Dimensions and position of the plugs VCU 20103 with mounting kit......................................................................... 236
Fig. 25: VME0120: Load cell connection, Pin 1 (X91 or X92)................................................................................................. 239
Fig. 26: VME0120: Load cell input X91 or X92....................................................................................................................... 240
Fig. 27: Digital input: switching contact connection ................................................................................................................ 242
Fig. 28: Digital input: external signal voltage connection........................................................................................................ 242
Fig. 29: Connecting a two-wire sensor ................................................................................................................................... 243
Fig. 3: Block diagram for calculating the setpoint ................................................................................................................... 205
Fig. 30: Digital input: connecting a sensor or a contact at the sensor input............................................................................ 244
Fig. 31: Digital input: connecting an external signal voltage at the sensor input .................................................................... 244
Fig. 32: Connection of an external totalizer at DO12.............................................................................................................. 247
Fig. 33: Electronic output VCU 20103 .................................................................................................................................... 247
Fig. 34: VAI 20100: 1 analog input ......................................................................................................................................... 249
Fig. 35: VAO 20100 or VAO 20103: 1 analog output ............................................................................................................. 250
Fig. 36: VHM 20100 Rear view with holding frame ................................................................................................................ 255
Fig. 37: VHM 20100 Front view with holding frame................................................................................................................ 255
Fig. 38: Dimensions VHM 20100............................................................................................................................................ 256
Fig. 39: VHM 20101 Rear view .............................................................................................................................................. 257
Fig. 4: Switch-on logic ............................................................................................................................................................ 206
Fig. 40: Dimensions VHM 20101............................................................................................................................................ 257
Fig. 41: VHM 20110 with ethernet cable connection .............................................................................................................. 258
Fig. 42: Holding frame VHM 20110 ........................................................................................................................................ 259
Fig. 43: VHM 201xx................................................................................................................................................................ 260
Fig. 44: Example connection VHM with power supply via RJ 45............................................................................................ 261
Fig. 45: Example connection network with alternatives for the power supply......................................................................... 262
Fig. 46: Example connection for long distance between operating panel and VCU ............................................................... 263
Fig. 47: Example connection operating panel with power supply from VCU .......................................................................... 263
Fig. 48: M12 system cable for field cabling ............................................................................................................................ 265
Fig. 49: System cable for control cubicle installation .............................................................................................................. 265
Fig. 5: Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE) ......................................................................................................................... 210
Fig. 50: Obsolete system cables (only used as spare parts) .................................................................................................. 265
Fig. 51: Alternatives for connecting VHM via RS485.............................................................................................................. 267
Fig. 52: WLAN access point ALL0258.................................................................................................................................... 269
Fig. 53: Fix cable with cable binders and clamps ................................................................................................................... 270
Fig. 6: Feed rate control (CTRL) ............................................................................................................................................ 212
Fig. 7: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0.................. 214
Fig. 8: Upper controller magnitude limit.................................................................................................................................. 216
Fig. 9: 2-sensor slip identification ........................................................................................................................................... 217
Filter Actual Flow Rate .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog .............................................................................................................................................. 110
Filter Belt Load ...................................................................................................................................................................... 111
November 2013
Index
Filter Belt Speed.................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Filter Deviation ...................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Filters ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering................................................................................................................................ 6
Fixed mode configuration ....................................................................................................................................................... 165
FLOAT-Format ....................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Flow Rate Offset .................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Flow Rate Range ................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Flow Rate Units ........................................................................................................................................................................ 83
Format Data ........................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ........................................................................................................................................ 225
Function Blocks for Binary Signals ......................................................................................................................................... 223
Gateway ................................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Gateway ................................................................................................................................................................................. 230
General Information ................................................................................................................................................................. 57
General Technical Data.................................................................................................................................................. 237, 251
Gravimetric ............................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Handling the Function Blocks ................................................................................................................................................. 223
Hardware Modules ................................................................................................................................................................... 78
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 186
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX....................................................................................................................................... 187
HI03 Event Load MAX.......................................................................................................................................................... 187
HI04 Event Speed MAX ....................................................................................................................................................... 187
HI05 Event Deviation............................................................................................................................................................ 188
HMI Value 01 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 02 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 03 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 04 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 05 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 06 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 07 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 08 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
HMI Value 09 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
HMI Value 10 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
Hourly Total Time ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Housing Models ..................................................................................................................................................................... 254
I-Component TN..................................................................................................................................................................... 118
ID Preset Value 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 3 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 4 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 5 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Preset Value 6 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Preset Value 7 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Preset Value 8 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Read Value 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Read Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 11 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 12 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 13 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 14 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 15 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 16 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Read Value 3 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 4 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 5 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 6 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 7 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 8 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 9 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 282 -
November 2013
Index
IL01 Event Run Disabled...................................................................................................................................................... 184
IL10 Event FCB-Error........................................................................................................................................................... 185
Initial Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 37
Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 47
Integrated Analog Input .......................................................................................................................................................... 248
Integrated Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 248
Interlock.................................................................................................................................................................................. 184
IP Address...................................................................................................................................................................... 162, 230
IP Addressing ......................................................................................................................................................................... 229
KP speed controller ................................................................................................................................................................ 120
Language ................................................................................................................................................................................. 80
LB: Pulses per Belt................................................................................................................................................................... 24
LC Characteristic Value............................................................................................................................................................ 94
LC Filter.................................................................................................................................................................................. 110
LC Rated Capacity ................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay............................................................................................................................................. 136
Lever Ratio............................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX.................................................................................................................................................. 112
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................................... 111
Limit Load MAX ..................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Limit Load MIN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Limit Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................................. 114
Limit Speed MIN.................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Limit Values............................................................................................................................................................................ 111
LO01 Event LC Input < MIN ................................................................................................................................................. 191
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN....................................................................................................................................... 192
LO03 Event Load MIN.......................................................................................................................................................... 192
LO04 Event Speed MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
Load Cell Input VME0120 ...................................................................................................................................................... 238
Load cross section ................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Loading Custom Default Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Loading Factory Default Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 51
Logger cycle time ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Loss of Flow Trip Delay.......................................................................................................................................................... 134
Lower Limit............................................................................................................................................................................. 119
MAC Addresses ..................................................................................................................................................................... 229
Maintenance Electric .............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Maintenance Feeder Run....................................................................................................................................................... 153
Maintenance interval .............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Maintenance Speed ................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Material Flow.......................................................................................................................................................................... 185
Material Test ............................................................................................................................................................................ 56
MAX ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Maximum Feedrate .................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Measuring Principle.................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE) .................................................................................................................................... 208
Mechanic................................................................................................................................................................................ 188
MF05 Event Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 185
MF13 Event Temperature-MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 186
MF14 Event Remote TCI too small ...................................................................................................................................... 186
MIN......................................................................................................................................................................................... 191
Minimum Feedrate ................................................................................................................................................................... 90
Minimum System Requirements .............................................................................................................................................. 47
Modbus-Version ..................................................................................................................................................................... 158
Mode Select Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................... 92
Moist correction (MOIST) ....................................................................................................................................................... 221
Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................................. 122
Moisture Active....................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Moisture MAX......................................................................................................................................................................... 124
Moisture Offset....................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Moisture Range ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
November 2013
Index
Moisture Select ...................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Monitoring Standstill after Startup ............................................................................................................................................ 28
Monitoring the mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
Motion monitoring (BMM) ....................................................................................................................................................... 216
Net Mask ................................................................................................................................................................................ 163
Nominal Belt Load .................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Nominal Flow Rate ................................................................................................................................................................... 81
Nominal Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Nominal Speed......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Offset FCB_AO 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 169
Offset FCB_AO 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Offset FCB_AO 3 ................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Offset FCB_AO 4 ................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Offset FCB_AO 5 ................................................................................................................................................................... 172
Operating and Control Access ................................................................................................................................................. 31
Operating Modes OFF/Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 10
Operating Modes - Remote ...................................................................................................................................................... 10
Operating the Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................... 52
Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode.......................................................................................................................... 39
Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 39
Operation Using EasyServe ..................................................................................................................................................... 47
Operation Using the 196NT Display ......................................................................................................................................... 45
Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI................................................................................................................................... 37
Optional Analog Channels...................................................................................................................................................... 248
Options..................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Own Address.......................................................................................................................................................................... 156
P01 - Hardware Modules.......................................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.01 - Event Communication HMI 1 .................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.02 - Event Communication ARM7.................................................................................................................................... 79
P01.03 - Analog Channel A10.................................................................................................................................................. 79
P02 - Feeder Definition ............................................................................................................................................................ 80
P02.01 - Language................................................................................................................................................................... 80
P02.02 - Units .......................................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.03 - Scale Name ............................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.04 - Password ................................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.05 - Nominal Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.06 - Nominal Speed .......................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.07 - Display Formats......................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.08 - Flow Rate Units ......................................................................................................................................................... 83
P02.09 - Counter 1 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 83
P02.10 - Counter 2 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 84
P02.11 - Counter 3 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 84
P02.12 - DO Pulse Counter..................................................................................................................................................... 84
P02.13 - Totalizer Increment .................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.14 - Pulse Length Total..................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.15 - Event Remote TCI too small ..................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.16 - Maintenance Speed................................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.17 - DO FRI Frequency.................................................................................................................................................... 87
P02.18 - Remote FRI Frequency ............................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.20 - Codepage .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.21 - DC_Mode................................................................................................................................................................... 87
P03 - Control Sources .............................................................................................................................................................. 88
P03.01 - Feeder Start............................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.02 - Feedrate Setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.03 - Setpoint Range .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.04 - Setpoint Offset ........................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.05 - Maximum Feedrate.................................................................................................................................................... 89
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 284 -
November 2013
Index
P03.06 - Minimum Feedrate..................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.07 - DI Raise Setpoint...................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.08 - DI Lower Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.09 - Raise/Lower Response Time..................................................................................................................................... 91
P03.10 - Source Run Enable.................................................................................................................................................... 91
P03.11 - Event Run Disabled .................................................................................................................................................. 91
P03.12 - Mode Select Enable/Disable...................................................................................................................................... 92
P03.13 - Speed Setpoint .......................................................................................................................................................... 93
P03.14 - Run Mode Select ....................................................................................................................................................... 93
P03.15 - Density Setpoint......................................................................................................................................................... 94
P04 - Rated Data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.01 - LC Characteristic Value ............................................................................................................................................. 94
P04.02 - LC Rated Capacity..................................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.03 - Effective Platform Length........................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.04 - Lever Ratio ................................................................................................................................................................ 95
P04.05 - Angle ......................................................................................................................................................................... 95
P04.06 - Speed Measurement ................................................................................................................................................. 95
P04.07 - Source Load Cell ....................................................................................................................................................... 96
P04.08 - Source Load Cell 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 96
P04.09 - Tachometer Pulses per Rev ..................................................................................................................................... 96
P04.10 - Load cross section..................................................................................................................................................... 96
P05 - Feeder control ................................................................................................................................................................ 97
P05.01 - Volum on LC failure ................................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.02 - Event Volum. caused by LC-error............................................................................................................................. 97
P05.03 - Afterflow Measurement Time ..................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active ................................................................................................................................................. 98
P05.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06 - Feeder Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.01 - Event Stand-By......................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ................................................................................................................................................. 99
P06.03 - Event Tachometer Input ........................................................................................................................................... 99
P06.04 - Event Error LC Input ................................................................................................................................................. 99
P06.05 - Event LC Input < MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 100
P06.06 - Event LC Input > MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 100
P06.07 - Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................ 101
P06.08 - Event Power Failure ............................................................................................................................................... 101
P06.09 - Time Deviation......................................................................................................................................................... 102
P06.10 - Threshold Deviation................................................................................................................................................. 102
P06.11 - Factor Deviation....................................................................................................................................................... 102
P06.12 - Event Deviation....................................................................................................................................................... 103
P06.13 - Event Controller Limited ......................................................................................................................................... 103
P06.14 - Event Memory......................................................................................................................................................... 104
P06.15 - Event Analog Input < Offset.................................................................................................................................... 104
P06.16 - DO Dual Tacho active............................................................................................................................................. 105
P06.17 - Event Primary Tacho Failure .................................................................................................................................. 105
P07 - Belt Monitoring.............................................................................................................................................................. 105
P07.01 - DI Belt Motion Monitor ............................................................................................................................................ 105
P07.02 - Belt Motion Monitor Delay........................................................................................................................................ 106
P07.03 - Event Belt Motion Monitor....................................................................................................................................... 106
P07.04 - DI Source Belt Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 106
P07.05 - BIC Active ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
P07.06 - DI BIC freeze .......................................................................................................................................................... 107
P07.07 - Slip Value ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
P07.08 - Event Slip ............................................................................................................................................................... 107
P07.09 - DO Belt Slip ............................................................................................................................................................ 108
P07.10 - Sensor Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.11 - Sensor Width ........................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.12 - Sensor Offset........................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.13 - Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.14 - Event Belt Drift........................................................................................................................................................ 109
P07.15 - Belt Skew................................................................................................................................................................. 109
November 2013
Index
P07.16 - Event Belt Skew...................................................................................................................................................... 109
P07.17 - DO Belt Drift............................................................................................................................................................ 109
P07.18 - DO Belt Skew ......................................................................................................................................................... 109
P08 - Filters ............................................................................................................................................................................ 110
P08.01 - LC Filter ................................................................................................................................................................... 110
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate............................................................................................................................................ 110
P08.03 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ................................................................................................................................ 110
P08.04 - Feedback Filter Override Threshold ........................................................................................................................ 110
P08.05 - Filter Belt Load........................................................................................................................................................ 111
P08.06 - Filter Belt Speed ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
P08.07 - Filter Deviation........................................................................................................................................................ 111
P09 - Limit Values .................................................................................................................................................................. 111
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN .................................................................................................................................... 111
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................... 111
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................... 112
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX.................................................................................................................................. 112
P09.05 - Limit Load MIN........................................................................................................................................................ 112
P09.06 - Event Load MIN ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
P09.07 - Limit Load MAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.08 - Event Load MAX..................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.09 - Limit Speed MIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.10 - Event Speed MIN.................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.11 - Limit Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................... 114
P09.12 - Event Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 114
P09.13 - Temperature MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 114
P09.14 - Event Temperature-MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 114
P10 - Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................................................ 115
P10.01 - Calibration Probe Span............................................................................................................................................ 115
P10.02 - Pulses per length ..................................................................................................................................................... 115
P10.03 - Range Correction TW .............................................................................................................................................. 115
P10.04 - Range Correction TC............................................................................................................................................... 116
P10.05 - Range Correction TM .............................................................................................................................................. 116
P10.06 - Belt Circuit Time ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
P10.07 - Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) ................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.08 - Calibration Weight ................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.09 - Test Chain Weight ................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.10 - Basic Tare ............................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.11 - Belt Circuit No.......................................................................................................................................................... 117
P11 - Rate controller .............................................................................................................................................................. 118
P11.01 - P-Component KP..................................................................................................................................................... 118
P11.02 - I-Component TN ...................................................................................................................................................... 118
P11.03 - AO Motor Speed Control ........................................................................................................................................ 118
P11.04 - Lower Limit .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
P11.05 - Upper Limit .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
P11.06 - Controller Magnitude Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 119
P11.07 - Position at STOP ..................................................................................................................................................... 119
P11.08 - KP speed controller ................................................................................................................................................. 120
P11.09 - VAP Active............................................................................................................................................................... 120
P11.10 - Platform Dis.Length ................................................................................................................................................. 120
P11.11 - CC_FC speed controller .......................................................................................................................................... 120
P11.12 - Control Offset speed controller ................................................................................................................................ 120
P11.13 - Bypass ..................................................................................................................................................................... 121
P11.14 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord .............................................................................................................................................. 121
P11.15 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord............................................................................................................................................. 121
P11.16 - Adaptation 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P11.17 - Adaptation 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12 - Moisture ........................................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.01 - Moisture Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.02 - Moisture Select ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.03 - AI Moisture Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 123
P12.04 - Nominal Moisture..................................................................................................................................................... 123
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 286 -
November 2013
Index
P12.05 - Moisture Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 123
P12.06 - Moisture Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 123
P12.07 - DO Moisture active ................................................................................................................................................. 124
P12.08 - Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.09 - DO Moisture MAX................................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.10 - Event Moisture MAX ............................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected ......................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset............................................................................................................................................... 125
P12.13 - AO Flow Rate Range .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P12.14 - Pulse Counter corrected .......................................................................................................................................... 125
P13 - Cleanout control............................................................................................................................................................ 125
P13.01 - DO CleanOut Timer ................................................................................................................................................ 125
P13.02 - CleanOut ON Time .................................................................................................................................................. 126
P13.03 - CleanOut OFF Time ................................................................................................................................................ 126
P13.04 - DI Chain Motion Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 126
P13.05 - Chain Motion Delay ................................................................................................................................................. 126
P13.06 - Event Chain Motion Monitor ................................................................................................................................... 127
P14 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................. 127
P14.01 - AO Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................................ 127
P14.02 - Setpoint Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 127
P14.03 - Setpoint Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 127
P14.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate .............................................................................................................................................. 127
P14.05 - Flow Rate Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.06 - Flow Rate Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.07 - AO Belt Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.08 - Belt Load Offset ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.09 - Belt Load Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.10 - AO Speed ............................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.11 - Speed Offset............................................................................................................................................................ 129
P14.12 - Speed Range........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.13 - AO Deviation........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.14 - Deviation Offset ....................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.15 - Deviation Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.16 - AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd) ..................................................................................................................................... 130
P14.17 - AO Density ............................................................................................................................................................. 130
P14.18 - Density Offset .......................................................................................................................................................... 130
P14.19 - Density Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 130
P15 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................................................. 131
P15.01 - DI Acknowledge Events .......................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.02 - DI Local Mode......................................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.03 - Event External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.04 - DI External Event 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 132
P15.05 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 ............................................................................................................................. 132
P15.06 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 ............................................................................................................................. 132
P15.07 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ................................................................................................................................................ 132
P15.08 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ................................................................................................................................................ 132
P15.09 - DI Discharge Pluggage ........................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.10 - Discharge Pluggage Delay ...................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.11 - Event Discharge Pluggage ..................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.12 - DI Coal on belt switch ............................................................................................................................................. 134
P15.13 - Loss of Flow Trip Delay ........................................................................................................................................... 134
P15.14 - Event Loss of Material ............................................................................................................................................ 134
P15.15 - Event Coal on Belt .................................................................................................................................................. 135
P15.16 - Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive ........................................................................................................................... 135
P15.17 - DI Motor feedback .................................................................................................................................................. 135
P15.18 - Event Motor Start.................................................................................................................................................... 136
P15.19 - DI Coal Flow Monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 136
P15.20 - Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay .............................................................................................................................. 136
P15.21 - Event Coal Flow...................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.23 - DI Remote CTRL .................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.24 - DI OFF/Maint CTRL ................................................................................................................................................ 137
November 2013
Index
P15.25 - DI Local Start .......................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.26 - DI Jog forward ........................................................................................................................................................ 138
P15.27 - DI Jog backward ..................................................................................................................................................... 138
P15.34 - DI Volumetric Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 140
P15.35 - DI Mode Switch Lock .............................................................................................................................................. 140
P16 - Digital Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 140
P16.01 - DO Scale Start........................................................................................................................................................ 140
P16.02 - DO Feeder Started ................................................................................................................................................. 141
P16.03 - DO Feeder running (2nd)........................................................................................................................................ 141
P16.04 - DO Feeder Run Forward ........................................................................................................................................ 141
P16.05 - DO Feeder Run Forward (2nd) ............................................................................................................................... 141
P16.06 - DO Feeder Run Reverse ........................................................................................................................................ 142
P16.07 - DO Feeder Run Reverse (2nd)............................................................................................................................... 142
P16.08 - DO Start Prefeeder ................................................................................................................................................. 142
P16.09 - DO ALARM ............................................................................................................................................................. 142
P16.10 - DO ALARM (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 142
P16.11 - DO Deviation .......................................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.12 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN....................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.13 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ..................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.14 - DO Load MIN.......................................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.15 - DO Load MAX......................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.16 - DO Speed MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.17 - DO Speed MAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.18 - DO Volumetric Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 144
P16.19 - DO Volumetric Mode (2nd) ..................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.20 - DO Local Mode....................................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.21 - DO WARNING ........................................................................................................................................................ 145
P16.22 - DO WARNING (2nd)............................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.23 - DO Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................ 146
P16.24 - DO Feeding (2nd) ................................................................................................................................................... 146
P16.25 - DO Remote CTRL .................................................................................................................................................. 146
P16.26 - DO Remote CTRL (2nd) ......................................................................................................................................... 146
P17 - Analog calibration ......................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.01 - Analog Input 1 Min................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.02 - Analog Input 1 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 147
P17.11 - Analog Output 1 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 148
P17.12 - Analog Output 1 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 148
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 288 -
November 2013
Index
P17.23 - Analog Output 1 Test Value..................................................................................................................................... 150
P18 - 2-Sensor Slip ................................................................................................................................................................ 151
P18.01 - 2-Sensor Slip active................................................................................................................................................. 151
P18.02 - Source Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P18.03 - DI Sensor 1............................................................................................................................................................. 151
P18.04 - Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.05 - DI Sensor 2............................................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.06 - Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.07 - Slip Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.08 - Event Slip 2............................................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.09 - DO Slip 2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 153
P19 - Maintenance interval..................................................................................................................................................... 153
P19.01 - Maintenance Electric ............................................................................................................................................... 153
P19.02 - Event Maint. Electric ............................................................................................................................................... 153
P19.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ........................................................................................................................................ 153
P19.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run ......................................................................................................................................... 153
P20 - Data Logging ................................................................................................................................................................ 154
P20.01 - Hourly Total Time .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.02 - Daily Total Time....................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.03 - Logger cycle time..................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.04 - Data Log Value 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.05 - Data Log Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.06 - Data Log Value 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.07 - Data Log Value 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.08 - Data Log Value 5 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.09 - Data Log Value 6 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.10 - Data Log Value 7 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.11 - Data Log Value 8 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
P20.12 - Data Log Value 9 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
P20.13 - Data Log Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 156
P21 - Communication EasyServe .......................................................................................................................................... 156
P21.01 - Own Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
P21.02 - Baud Rate................................................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.03 - Format Data............................................................................................................................................................. 156
P22 - Communication Fieldbus .............................................................................................................................................. 157
P22.01 - Protocol Type........................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.02 - Timeout Host ........................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .................................................................................................................................. 157
P22.04 - Modbus-Version....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.05 - Word Sequence ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.06 - Byte Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................ 158
P22.07 - Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.08 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 159
P22.09 - Resolution................................................................................................................................................................ 159
P22.10 - Baud rate ................................................................................................................................................................. 159
P22.11 - Data Format............................................................................................................................................................. 160
P22.12 - Physics .................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.13 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.14 - FLOAT-Format......................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.15 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.16 - Baud rate ................................................................................................................................................................. 160
P22.17 - Parameter ................................................................................................................................................................ 161
P22.18 - Preset Count............................................................................................................................................................ 161
P22.19 - READ_ID Count....................................................................................................................................................... 161
P22.20 - Access Rights Limitation FB .................................................................................................................................... 161
P22.21 - Remote IP Address FB ............................................................................................................................................ 162
November 2013
Index
P22.22 - Event Acyclic Communication................................................................................................................................. 162
P22.23 - Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 162
P23 - Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................................................ 162
P23.01 - IP Address ............................................................................................................................................................... 162
P23.02 - Net Mask ................................................................................................................................................................. 163
P23.03 - Gateway .................................................................................................................................................................. 163
P24 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................................................. 163
P24.01 - DO PLC 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 163
P24.02 - DO PLC 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 163
P24.03 - DO PLC 3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 163
P24.04 - DO PLC 4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.05 - DO PLC 5 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.06 - DO PLC 6 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.07 - DO PLC 7 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.08 - DO PLC 8 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.09 - AO PLC 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.10 - AO PLC 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 165
P25.01 - ID Preset Value 1..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.02 - ID Preset Value 2..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.03 - ID Preset Value 3..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.04 - ID Preset Value 4..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.05 - ID Preset Value 5..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.06 - ID Preset Value 6..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.07 - ID Preset Value 7..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.08 - ID Preset Value 8..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.09 - ID Read Value 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.10 - ID Read Value 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.11 - ID Read Value 3 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.12 - ID Read Value 4 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.13 - ID Read Value 5 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.14 - ID Read Value 6 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.15 - ID Read Value 7 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.16 - ID Read Value 8 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.17 - ID Read Value 9 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.18 - ID Read Value 10 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.19 - ID Read Value 11 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.20 - ID Read Value 12 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.21 - ID Read Value 13 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.22 - ID Read Value 14 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.23 - ID Read Value 15 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.24 - ID Read Value 16 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P26 - FCB analog outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.01 - FCB_AO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.05 - FCB_AO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.09 - FCB_AO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................. 170
P26.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 .................................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.13 - FCB_AO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................. 171
P26.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 .................................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.17 - FCB_AO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................. 172
P26.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 290 -
November 2013
Index
P26.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 .................................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.21 - FCB Variant ............................................................................................................................................................. 173
P26.22 - Event FCB-Error ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
P27 - FCB digital outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.01 - FCB_DO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................. 174
P27.02 - FCB_DO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................. 174
P27.03 - FCB_DO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................. 174
P27.04 - FCB_DO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.05 - FCB_DO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.06 - FCB_DO 06 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.07 - FCB_DO 07 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.08 - FCB_DO 08 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.09 - FCB_DO 09 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.10 - FCB_DO 10 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.11 - FCB_DO 11 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.12 - FCB_DO 12 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.13 - FCB_DO 13 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.14 - FCB_DO 14 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.15 - FCB_DO 15 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.16 - FCB_DO 16 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.17 - FCB_DO 17 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.18 - FCB_DO 18 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.19 - FCB_DO 19 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.20 - FCB_DO 20 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P28 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................................................. 178
P28.01 - HMI Value 01 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.02 - HMI Value 02 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.03 - HMI Value 03 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.04 - HMI Value 04 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.05 - HMI Value 05 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.06 - HMI Value 06 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.07 - HMI Value 07 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.08 - HMI Value 08 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
P28.09 - HMI Value 09 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
P28.10 - HMI Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
Parameter .............................................................................................................................................................................. 161
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules................................................................................................................................. 78
Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition ................................................................................................................................... 80
Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources ..................................................................................................................................... 88
Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................ 94
Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ....................................................................................................................................... 97
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring.................................................................................................................................. 98
Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring..................................................................................................................................... 105
Parameter Block 08 - Filters................................................................................................................................................... 110
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ......................................................................................................................................... 111
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ................................................................................................................................... 115
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ..................................................................................................................................... 118
Parameter Block 12 - Moisture ............................................................................................................................................... 122
Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control .................................................................................................................................. 125
Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs .................................................................................................................................... 127
Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 131
Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 140
Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration ................................................................................................................................ 147
Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip ....................................................................................................................................... 151
Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................ 153
Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging ....................................................................................................................................... 154
Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................................................................. 156
Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus ..................................................................................................................... 157
Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................... 162
Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 163
November 2013
Index
Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration .................................................................................................................... 165
Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ............................................................................................................................. 169
Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs .............................................................................................................................. 174
Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values .................................................................................................................... 177
Parameter Details .................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Parameter Log Values.............................................................................................................................................................. 40
Parameter Overview ................................................................................................................................................................ 62
Parameter Set .......................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Parameter Setup ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Parameters............................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Password ................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
P-Component KP ................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Performing Calibrations............................................................................................................................................................ 18
Physics................................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Platform Dis.Length................................................................................................................................................................ 120
PLC Functionality (Optional) .................................................................................................................................................. 222
PLC Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Portable Devices .................................................................................................................................................................... 258
Position at STOP.................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................................. 237, 252
Prefabricated system cables .................................................................................................................................................. 264
Preset Count .......................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Print Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Probe Error......................................................................................................................................................................... 20, 22
Program EasyServe VPC 20150 .............................................................................................................................................. 47
Protocol Type ......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Pulse Counter corrected......................................................................................................................................................... 125
Pulse Length Total ................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Pulses per length ................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Raise/Lower Response Time ................................................................................................................................................... 91
Range Correction TC ............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Range Correction TM ............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Range Correction TW............................................................................................................................................................. 115
Range FCB_AO 1 .................................................................................................................................................................. 169
Range FCB_AO 2 .................................................................................................................................................................. 170
Range FCB_AO 3 .................................................................................................................................................................. 171
Range FCB_AO 4 .................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Range FCB_AO 5 .................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Rate controller........................................................................................................................................................................ 118
Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Read/change Parameters ........................................................................................................................................................ 50
READ_ID Count ..................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Reference FCB_AO 1............................................................................................................................................................. 169
Reference FCB_AO 2............................................................................................................................................................. 170
Reference FCB_AO 3............................................................................................................................................................. 171
Reference FCB_AO 4............................................................................................................................................................. 172
Reference FCB_AO 5............................................................................................................................................................. 173
Relay Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................................ 245
Remote FRI Frequency ............................................................................................................................................................ 87
Remote IP Address FB........................................................................................................................................................... 162
Resolution .............................................................................................................................................................................. 159
Restoring the Factory Default Settings..................................................................................................................................... 42
Retro-reflective Tape Clips................................................................................................................................................. 20, 22
RS-485 Hardware .................................................................................................................................................................. 231
Run Mode Select...................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Safety notes ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................... 192
SC02 Event Stand-By .......................................................................................................................................................... 193
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................ 193
SC04 Event Maint. Electric................................................................................................................................................... 193
SC05 Event External Event 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 194
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 292 -
November 2013
Index
Scale Name.............................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Scale Operation Screens ......................................................................................................................................................... 52
Screened Cables............................................................................................................................................................ 234, 270
Sensor Length ........................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Sensor Offset ......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Sensor Width.......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................. 192
Serial Interfaces: .................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Serial Networks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Service Values ......................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ............................................................................................................................................................ 121
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ........................................................................................................................................................... 121
Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................................. 89, 127
Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................................ 89, 127
Setting the Current Time and Date........................................................................................................................................... 43
Setting the IP Address in DISOCONT Tersus Systems ......................................................................................................... 230
Setting Time ............................................................................................................................................................................. 54
Setup Notes ............................................................................................................................................................................. 13
Setup Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Signal Words .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Signal Words for Application Notes ............................................................................................................................................ 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Simulation Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.).................................................................................................................................................. 117
Slip Value ............................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Slip Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 152
Source Load Cell...................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Source Load Cell 2................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Source Run Enable .................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Source Sensor 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Span (CAL 2) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Speed Measurement ................................................................................................................................................................ 95
Speed Offset .......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Speed Range ......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Speed Setpoint......................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Stand-By Limit Value................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Start Program and Connect to Feeder ..................................................................................................................................... 47
Startup and Functional Check .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Subnetwork Mask................................................................................................................................................................... 230
Switch-on logic ....................................................................................................................................................................... 206
SY01 Event Memory ............................................................................................................................................................ 195
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial .............................................................................................................................. 195
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication ...................................................................................................................................... 195
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication .................................................................................................................................... 196
SY12 Event Communication ARM7 ..................................................................................................................................... 196
System Message.................................................................................................................................................................... 195
TA: Tare ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Tab.1: Parameter for BIC and for belt motion monitoring ......................................................................................................... 27
Tab.10: DISOCONT Load Cell Connection, Wire Colors ....................................................................................................... 240
Tab.11: Pin assignment for belt marker sensors .................................................................................................................... 244
Tab.12: Technical data for the inductive transmitter input ...................................................................................................... 245
Tab.13: Technical data of the analog input ............................................................................................................................ 248
Tab.14: Connections .............................................................................................................................................................. 249
Tab.15: Details of the system cables ..................................................................................................................................... 266
Tab.16: WLAN access configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 268
Tab.2: Sequence for adjustment and commissioning............................................................................................................... 27
Tab.3: Setting and adjusting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring ..................................................................................... 29
Tab.4: Operating access .......................................................................................................................................................... 31
November 2013
Tab.5: Functions available on the controller web page ............................................................................................................ 35

Tab.6: Controller parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 214
IndexSpecial cases of controller parameter setting ............................................................................................................. 214
Tab.7:
Tab.8: Special modes of operation......................................................................................................................................... 215
Tab.9: Blocks available for processing binary signals ............................................................................................................ 225
Tachometer Pulses per Rev .................................................................................................................................................... 96
TC: Span Calibration ................................................................................................................................................................ 23
Technical Data VCU 20103.................................................................................................................................................... 235
Temperature MAX .................................................................................................................................................................. 114
Test Chain Weight.................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Testing ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 55
The 'Calibration' Screen ........................................................................................................................................................... 38
The 'Communication' Screen ................................................................................................................................................... 38
The 'Configuration' Screen ....................................................................................................................................................... 38
The 'Display Settings' Screen................................................................................................................................................... 38
The 'Feeder' Screen ................................................................................................................................................................. 38
The 'Home' Screen................................................................................................................................................................... 38
The 'Network' Screen ............................................................................................................................................................... 37
The procedure for adjusting the frequency output.................................................................................................................. 221
The 'Setup' Screen ................................................................................................................................................................... 40
The 'Trend' Screen ................................................................................................................................................................... 39
The 'Values' Screen ................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Thoughts on the Cable Connections .............................................................................................................................. 234, 270
Threshold Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................... 102
Time Deviation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Timeout Host.......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Totalizer Increment .................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Totals ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Touchscreen Operating Panel VHM....................................................................................................................................... 250
Trending Data ........................................................................................................................................................................ 201
Trends ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Trimming the Analog Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 41
Two-Sensor Belt Slippage Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 29
Typical Operating Procedures .................................................................................................................................................. 43
Units ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 81
Unscreened Cables........................................................................................................................................................ 234, 271
Upper Limit............................................................................................................................................................................. 119
VAP Active ............................................................................................................................................................................. 120
VHM 20100 Basic Unit ........................................................................................................................................................... 255
VHM 20101 with Power Supply Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 256
VHM 20110 with Cable Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 258
VHM 20121 Wireless.............................................................................................................................................................. 260
Volum on LC failure.................................................................................................................................................................. 97
Volumetric ................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Volumetric Control.................................................................................................................................................................... 10
WE01 Event Power Failure .................................................................................................................................................. 183
WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset....................................................................................................................................... 184
WE15 Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 ................................................................................................................................ 184
WE16 Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 ................................................................................................................................ 184
Web Server in the Scales Controller VCU................................................................................................................................ 35
Weigh Roller Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Weigh Span Length.................................................................................................................................................................... 9
What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-9?....................................................................................................................................... 7
WLAN access point ................................................................................................................................................................ 268
WM02 Event Slip.................................................................................................................................................................. 188
WM03 Event Belt Skew........................................................................................................................................................ 188
WM04 Event Belt Drift .......................................................................................................................................................... 188
WM05 Event Slip 2............................................................................................................................................................... 189
WM06 Event Chain Motion Monitor...................................................................................................................................... 189
WM07 Event Discharge Pluggage ....................................................................................................................................... 189
WM08 Event Loss of Material .............................................................................................................................................. 190
WM09 Event Motor Start ...................................................................................................................................................... 190
WM10 Event Belt Motion Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 190
WM11 Event Coal Flow........................................................................................................................................................ 191
WM12 Event Coal on Belt .................................................................................................................................................... 191
Word Sequence ..................................................................................................................................................................... 158
Zero Drop-Out Active ............................................................................................................................................................... 98
Zero Drop-Out Limit ................................................................................................................................................................. 98
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 294 -
November 2013
November 2013
3.0 Certified Drawings
3.0 Certified Drawings
Section Index
Title/Description
Drawing No.
Schematic Diagram-Gravimetric Feeder-Stock 196NT RPC
S11152
Remote Power Cabinet Dimension Drawing
S11158
Feeder Integral Cabinet Dimension Drawing
S11164
November 2013
November 2013
4.0 Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists
4.0 Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists

Sl. No
Title/Description
Drawing No.
VFD Motor 7.5HP Upgrade Kit with Dual Tacho
D43566
Retro-Reflective Tape Assembly
A29466
November 2013
5.0 Electrical/Electronic Drawings and Parts Lists
Section Index
Sl.No
Title/Description
DrawingNo
ConnectionDiagramRPC
S11153
CabinetAssemblyDrawingRPC
S11154
PanelAssemblyDrawingRPC
S11157
ConnectionDiagramFIC
S11159
CabinetAssemblyDrawingFIC
S11160
PanelAssemblyDrawingFIC
S11162
6.0 Vendor Information
Section Index
Description
Stock Part No.
6.1
MOTOR
FE14364
6.2
BALDOR ELECTRIC MOTOR SERVICE / INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6.3
SPEED SENSOR
FE11705
6.4
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
V003033.B06
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Integral Horsepower
AC Induction Motors
ODP, WPI, WPII Enclosure
TEFC Enclosure
Explosion Proof
Installation & Operating Manual
2/07
MN400
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Section 2
Installation & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Doweling & Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Conduit Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
First Time Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Coupled Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Jogging and Repeated Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Section 3
Maintenance & Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
General Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Lubrication & Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Type of Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Relubrication Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Relubrication Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
MN400
Table of Contents i
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
ii Table of Contents
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Overview
This manual contains general procedures that apply to Baldor Motor products. Be sure to read and
understand the Safety Notice statements in this manual. For your protection, do not install, operate or
attempt to perform maintenance procedures until you understand the Warning and Caution statements. A
Warning statement indicates a possible unsafe condition that can cause harm to personnel. A Caution
statement indicates a condition that can cause damage to equipment.
Important:
This instruction manual is not intended to include a comprehensive listing of all details for all
procedures required for installation, operation and maintenance. This manual describes general
guidelines that apply to most of the motor products shipped by Baldor. If you have a question
about a procedure or are uncertain about any detail, Do Not Proceed. Please contact your Baldor
distributor for more information or clarification.
Before you install, operate or perform maintenance, become familiar with the following:
S
NEMA Publication MG-2, Safety Standard for Construction and guide
for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.
S
The National Electrical Code
S
Local codes and Practices
Limited Warranty
1. Most Baldor products are warranted for 18 months from the date of shipment to Baldors customer from Baldors
district warehouse or, if applicable, from Baldors factory. Baldor StandardE standard efficient motors are
warranted for 24 months. StandardE is limited to three phase, general purpose, 1200 HP ratings that fall under
the Energy Policy Act (EPAct). Baldor SuperE premium efficient motors are warranted for 36 months. Baldor
IEEE841 motors are warranted for 60 months. All warranty claims must be submitted to a Baldor Service Center
prior to the expiration of the warranty period.
2. Baldor will, at its option repair or replace a motor which fails due to defects in material or workmanship during the
warranty period if:
a. the purchaser presents the defective motor at or ships it prepaid to, the Baldor plant in Fort Smith, Arkansas
or one of the Baldor Authorized Service Centers and
b. the purchaser gives written notification concerning the motor and the claimed defect including the date
purchased, the task performed by the Baldor motor and the problem encountered.
3. Baldor will not pay the cost of removal of any electric motor from any equipment, the cost of delivery to Fort Smith,
Arkansas or a Baldor Authorized Service Center, or the cost of any incidental or consequential damages resulting
from the claimed defects. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.) Any implied warranty given by laws shall be limited to
the duration of the warranty period hereunder. (Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.)
4. Baldor Authorized Service Centers, when convinced to their satisfaction that a Baldor motor developed defects in
material or workmanship within the warranty period, are authorized to proceed with the required repairs to fulfill
Baldors warranty when the cost of such repairs to be paid by Baldor does not exceed Baldors warranty repair
allowance. Baldor will not pay overtime premium repair charges without prior written authorization.
5. The cost of warranty repairs made by centers other than Baldor Authorized Service Centers WILL NOT be paid
unless first authorized in writing by Baldor.
6. Claims by a purchaser that a motor is defective even when a failure results within one hour after being placed into
service are not always justified. Therefore, Baldor Authorized Service Centers must determine from the condition
of the motor as delivered to the center whether or not the motor is defective. If in the opinion of a Baldor
Authorized Service Center, a motor did not fail as a result of defects in material or workmanship, the center is to
proceed with repairs only if the purchaser agrees to pay for such repairs. If the decision is in dispute, the
purchaser should still pay for the repairs and submit the paid invoice and the Authorized Service Centers signed
service report to Baldor for further consideration.
7. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
MN400
General Information 1-1
Table of Contents
Safety Notice:
This equipment contains high voltage! Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
Only qualified personnel should attempt installation, operation and maintenance of
electrical equipment.
Be sure that you are completely familiar with NEMA publication MG-2, safety standards
for construction and guide for selection, installation and use of electric motors and
generators, the National Electrical Code and local codes and practices. Unsafe
installation or use can cause conditions that lead to serious or fatal injury. Only qualified
personnel should attempt the installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment.
1-2 General Information
WARNING:
Do not touch electrical connections before you first ensure that

power has been disconnected. Electrical shock can cause serious
or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the
installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment.
WARNING:
Be sure the system is properly grounded before applying power.

Do not apply AC power before you ensure that all grounding
instructions have been followed. Electrical shock can cause
serious or fatal injury. National Electrical Code and Local codes
must be carefully followed.
WARNING:
Avoid extended exposure to machinery with high noise levels. Be

sure to wear ear protective devices to reduce harmful effects to
your hearing.
WARNING:
This equipment may be connected to other machinery that has

rotating parts or parts that are driven by this equipment. Improper
use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel
should attempt to install operate or maintain this equipment.
WARNING:
Do not by-pass or disable protective devices or safety guards.

Safety features are designed to prevent damage to personnel or
equipment. These devices can only provide protection if they
remain operative.
WARNING:
Avoid the use of automatic reset devices if the automatic restarting

of equipment can be hazardous to personnel or equipment.
WARNING:
Be sure the load is properly coupled to the motor shaft before

applying power. The shaft key must be fully captive by the load
device. Improper coupling can cause harm to personnel or
equipment if the load decouples from the shaft during operation.
WARNING:
Use proper care and procedures that are safe during handling,
lifting, installing, operating and maintaining operations.
Improper methods may cause muscle strain or other harm.
WARNING:
Before performing any motor maintenance procedure, be sure that

the equipment connected to the motor shaft cannot cause shaft
rotation. If the load can cause shaft rotation, disconnect the load
from the motor shaft before maintenance is performed. Unexpected
mechanical rotation of the motor parts can cause injury or motor
damage.
WARNING:
Disconnect all electrical power from the motor windings and

accessory devices before disassembly of the motor. Electrical
shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING:
Do not use non UL/CSA listed explosion proof motors in the

presence of flammable or combustible vapors or dust. These
motors are not designed for atmospheric conditions that require
explosion proof operation.
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Safety Notice Continued
WARNING:
Motors that are to be used in flammable and/or explosive

atmospheres must display the UL label on the nameplate along with
CSA listed logo.
Specific service conditions for these motors are defined in
NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 500.
WARNING:
UL Listed motors must only be serviced by UL Approved

Authorized Baldor Service Centers if these motors are to be
returned to a hazardous and/or explosive atmosphere.
Caution:
To prevent premature equipment failure or damage, only qualified

maintenance personnel should perform maintenance.
Caution:
Do not overlubricate motor as this may cause premature bearing

failure.
Caution:
Do not lift the motor and its driven load by the motor lifting
hardware. The motor lifting hardware is adequate for lifting only the
motor. Disconnect the load from the motor shaft before moving the
motor.
Caution:
If eye bolts are used for lifting a motor, be sure they are securely
tightened. The lifting direction should not exceed a 20 angle from
the shank of the eye bolt or lifting lug. Excessive lifting angles can
cause damage.
Caution:
To prevent equipment damage, be sure that the electrical service is

not capable of delivering more than the maximum motor rated amps
listed on the rating plate.
Caution:
If a HI POT test (High Potential Insulation test) must be performed,

follow the precautions and procedure in NEMA MG1 and MG2
standards to avoid equipment damage.
If you have any questions or are uncertain about any statement or procedure, or if you
require additional information please contact your Baldor distributor or an Authorized
Baldor Service Center.
MN400
General Information 1-3
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Receiving
Storage
Unpacking
Handling
Each Baldor Electric Motor is thoroughly tested at the factory and carefully packaged for
shipment. When you receive your motor, there are several things you should do
immediately.
1.
Observe the condition of the shipping container and report any damage
immediately to the commercial carrier that delivered your motor.
2.
Verify that the part number of the motor you received is the same as the part
number listed on your purchase order.
If the motor is not put into service immediately, the motor must be stored in a clean, dry
and warm location. Several precautionary steps must be performed to avoid motor
damage during storage.
1.
Use a Megger periodically to ensure that the integrity of the winding insulation
has been maintained. Record the Megger readings. Immediately investigate
any significant drop in insulation resistance.
2.
Do not lubricate bearings during storage. Motor bearings are packed with
grease at the factory. Excessive grease can damage insulation quality.
3.
Rotate motor shaft at least 10 turns every two months during storage (more
frequently if possible). This will prevent bearing damage due to storage.
4.
If the storage location is damp or humid, the motor windings must be protected
from moisture. This can be done by applying power to the motors space
heater (if available) while the motor is in storage.
Each Baldor motor is packaged for ease of handling and to prevent entry of
contaminants.
1.
To avoid condensation inside the motor, do not unpack until the motor has
reached room temperature. (Room temperature is the temperature of the room
in which it will be installed). The packing provides insulation from temperature
changes during transportation.
2.
When the motor has reached room temperature, remove all protective wrapping
material from the motor.
The motor should be lifted using the lifting lugs or eye bolts provided.
1.
Use the lugs or eye bolts provided to lift the motor. Never attempt to lift the
motor and additional equipment connected to the motor by this method. The
lugs or eye bolts provided are designed to lift only the motor. Never lift the
motor by the motor shaft or the hood of a WPII motor.
2.
When lifting a WPII (Weather Proof Type 2) motor, do not lift the motor by
inserting lifting lugs into holes on top of the cooling hood. These lugs are to be
used for hood removal only. A spreader bar should be used to lift the motor by
the cast lifting lugs located on the motor frame.
3.
If the motor must be mounted to a plate with the driven equipment such as
pump, compressor etc., it may not be possible to lift the motor alone. For this
case, the assembly should be lifted by a sling around the mounting base. The
entire assembly can be lifted as an assembly for installation. Do not lift using
the motor lugs or eye bolts provided.
If the load is unbalanced (as with couplings or additional attachments)
additional slings or other means must be used to prevent tipping. In any event,
the load must be secure before lifting.
1-4 General Information
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 2
Installation & Operation
Overview
Installation should conform to the National Electrical Code as well as local codes and
practices. When other devices are coupled to the motor shaft, be sure to install protective
devices to prevent future accidents. Some protective devices include, coupling, belt
guard, chain guard, shaft covers etc. These protect against accidental contact with
moving parts. Machinery that is accessible to personnel should provide further protection
in the form of guard rails, screening, warning signs etc.
Location
It is important that motors be installed in locations that are compatible with motor
enclosure and ambient conditions. Improper selection of the motor enclosure and
ambient conditions can lead to reduced operating life of the motor.
Proper ventilation for the motor must be provided. Obstructed airflow can lead to
reduction of motor life.
1.
Open DripProof/WPI motors are intended for use indoors where atmosphere is
relatively clean, dry, well ventilated and noncorrosive.
2.
Totally Enclosed and WPII motors may be installed where dirt, moisture or dust are
present and in outdoor locations.
Severe Duty, IEEE 841 and Washdown Duty enclosed motors are designed for
installations with high corrosion or excessive moisture conditions. These motors should
not be placed into an environment where there is the presence of flammable or
combustible vapors, dust or any combustible material, unless specifically designed for
this type of service.
Mounting
The motor must be securely installed to a rigid foundation or mounting surface to

minimize vibration and maintain alignment between the motor and shaft load. Failure to
provide a proper mounting surface may cause vibration, misalignment and bearing
damage.
Foundation caps and sole plates are designed to act as spacers for the equipment they
support. If these devices are used, be sure that they are evenly supported by the
foundation or mounting surface.
After installation is complete and accurate alignment of the motor and load is
accomplished, the base should be grouted to the foundation to maintain this alignment.
The standard motor base is designed for horizontal or vertical mounting. Adjustable or
sliding rails are designed for horizontal mounting only. Consult your Baldor distributor or
authorized Baldor Service Center for further information.
Alignment
Accurate alignment of the motor with the driven equipment is extremely important.
1.
Direct Coupling
For direct drive, use flexible couplings if possible. Consult the drive or equipment
manufacturer for more information. Mechanical vibration and roughness during
operation may indicate poor alignment. Use dial indicators to check alignment. The
space between coupling hubs should be maintained as recommended by the
coupling manufacturer.
2.
End-Play Adjustment
The axial position of the motor frame with respect to its load is also extremely
important. The motor bearings are not designed for excessive external axial thrust
loads. Improper adjustment will cause failure.
3.
Pulley Ratio
The pulley ratio should not exceed 8:1.
4.
Belt Drive
Align sheaves carefully to minimize belt wear and axial bearing loads (see End-Play
Adjustment). Belt tension should be sufficient to prevent belt slippage at rated speed
and load. However, belt slippage may occur during starting.
Caution:
5.
MN400
Do not over tension belts.
Sleeve bearing motors are only suitable for coupled loads.

Installation & Operation 2-1
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Doweling & Bolting
Power Connection
After proper alignment is verified, dowel pins should be inserted through the motor feet
into the foundation. This will maintain the correct motor position should motor removal be
required. (Baldor motors are designed for doweling.)
1.
Drill dowel holes in diagonally opposite motor feet in the locations provided.
2.
Drill corresponding holes in the foundation.
3.
Ream all holes.
4.
Install proper fitting dowels.
5.
Mounting bolts must be carefully tightened to prevent changes in alignment. Use a

flat washer and lock washer under each nut or bolt head to hold the motor feet
secure. Flanged nuts or bolts may be used as an alternative to washers.
Motor and control wiring, overload protection, disconnects, accessories and grounding
should conform to the National Electrical Code and local codes and practices.
Conduit Box
For ease of making connections, an oversize conduit box is provided. The box can be
rotated 360 in 90 increments. Auxiliary conduit boxes are provided on some motors for
accessories such as space heaters, RTDs etc.
AC Power
Connect the motor leads as shown on the connection diagram located on the name plate
or inside the cover on the conduit box. Be sure the following guidelines are met:
1.
AC power is within 10% of rated voltage with rated frequency. (See motor name
plate for ratings).
OR
2.
AC power is within 5% of rated frequency with rated voltage.

OR
3.
A combined variation in voltage and frequency of 10% (sum of absolute values) of

rated values, provided the frequency variation does not exceed 5% of rated
frequency.
Performance within these voltage and frequency variations are shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-1 Accessory Connections

One heater is installed in each end of motor.
Leads for each heater are labeled H1 & H2.
(Like numbers should be tied together).
Three thermisters are installed in windings and tied in series.

Leads are labeled T1 & T2.
Winding RTDs are installed in windings (2) per phase.

Each set of leads is labeled W1, W2, W3, W4, W5, & W6.
* One bearing RTD is installed in Drive endplate (PUEP), leads
are labeled RTDDE.
* One bearing RTD is installed in Opposite Drive endplate (FREP), leads
are labeled RTDODE.
* Note RTD may have 2Red/1White leads; or 2White/1Red Lead.
2-2 Installation & Operation
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
+20
Changes in Motor Performance (%)
+15
Figure 2-2 Typical Motor Performance VS Voltage Variations

Maximum
Torque
Full -Load
Current
+10
+5
Full -Load
Current
Power
Factor
0
5
Efficiency
Efficiency
10
15
20
Power
Factor
Maximum
Torque
15
10
+5
+10
+15
Voltage Variations (%)
MN400
Installation & Operation 2-3
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
First Time Start Up
Be sure that all power to motor and accessories is off. Be sure the motor shaft is
disconnected from the load and will not cause mechanical rotation of the motor shaft.
1.
Make sure that the mechanical installation is secure. All bolts and nuts are tightened
etc.
2.
If motor has been in storage or idle for some time, check winding insulation integrity
with a Megger.
3.
Inspect all electrical connections for proper termination, clearance, mechanical

strength and electrical continuity.
4.
Be sure all shipping materials and braces (if used) are removed from motor shaft.
5.
Manually rotate the motor shaft to ensure that it rotates freely.
6.
Replace all panels and covers that were removed during installation.
7.
Momentarily apply power and check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft.
8.
If motor rotation is wrong, be sure power is off and change the motor lead
connections. Verify rotation direction before you continue.
9.
Start the motor and ensure operation is smooth without excessive vibration or noise.
If so, run the motor for 1 hour with no load connected.
10. After 1 hour of operation, disconnect power and connect the load to the motor shaft.
Verify all coupling guards and protective devices are installed. Ensure motor is
properly ventilated.
Coupled Start Up
This procedure assumes a coupled start up. Also, that the first time start up procedure
was successful.
1.
Check the coupling and ensure that all guards and protective devices are installed.
2.
Check that the coupling is properly aligned and not binding.
3.
The first coupled start up should be with no load. Apply power and verify that the
load is not transmitting excessive vibration back to the motor though the coupling or
the foundation. Vibration should be at an acceptable level.
4.
Run for approximately 1 hour with the driven equipment in an unloaded condition.
The equipment can now be loaded and operated within specified limits. Do not exceed
the name plate ratings for amperes for steady continuous loads.
Jogging and Repeated Starts Repeated starts and/or jogs of induction motors generally reduce the life of the motor
winding insulation. A much greater amount of heat is produced by each acceleration or

jog than by the same motor under full load. If it is necessary to repeatedly start or jog the
motor, it is advisable to check the application with your local Baldor distributor or Baldor
Service Center.
Heating - Duty rating and maximum ambient temperature are stated on the motor name
plate. Do not exceed these values. If there is any question regarding safe operation,
contact your local Baldor distributor or Baldor Service Center.
2-4 Installation & Operation
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 3
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
WARNING:
General Inspection
Inspect the motor at regular intervals, approximately every 500 hours of operation or
every 3 months, whichever occurs first. Keep the motor clean and the ventilation
openings clear. The following steps should be performed at each inspection:
WARNING:
Relubrication & Bearings
Type of Grease
UL Listed motors must only be serviced by UL Approved

Authorized Baldor Service Centers if these motors are to be
returned to a hazardous and/or explosive atmosphere.
Do not touch electrical connections before you first ensure that

power has been disconnected. Electrical shock can cause serious
or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the
installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment.
1.
Check that the motor is clean. Check that the interior and exterior of the motor
is free of dirt, oil, grease, water, etc. Oily vapor, paper pulp, textile lint, etc. can
accumulate and block motor ventilation. If the motor is not properly ventilated,
overheating can occur and cause early motor failure.
2.
Use a Megger periodically to ensure that the integrity of the winding

insulation has been maintained. Record the Megger readings. Immediately
investigate any significant drop in insulation resistance.
3.
Check all electrical connectors to be sure that they are tight.
Bearing grease will lose its lubricating ability over time, not suddenly. The lubricating
ability of a grease (over time) depends primarily on the type of grease, the size of the
bearing, the speed at which the bearing operates and the severity of the operating
conditions. Good results can be obtained if the following recommendations are used in
your maintenance program.
A high grade ball or roller bearing grease should be used. Recommended grease for
standard service conditions is Polyrex EM (Exxon Mobil).
Equivalent and compatible greases include:
Texaco Polystar, Rykon Premium #2, Pennzoil Pen 2 Lube and Chevron SRI.
Relubrication Intervals
Recommended relubrication intervals are shown in Table 3-1. It is important to realize

that the recommended intervals of Table 3-1 are based on average use.
Refer to additional information contained in Tables 3-2, 3-3 and 3-4.
Table 3-1 Relubrication Intervals *

NEMA / (IEC) Frame
F
Size
Si
Up to 210 incl. (132)
Over 210 to 280 incl. (180)
Over 280 to 360 incl. (225)
Over 360 to 5800 incl. (300)
10000
**
6000
2700 Hrs.
**
**
**
Rated Speed - RPM

3600
1800
5500 Hrs. 12000 Hrs.
3600 Hrs.
9500 Hrs.
* 2200 Hrs. 7400 Hrs.
*2200 Hrs.
3500 Hrs.
1200
18000 Hrs.
15000 Hrs.
12000 Hrs.
7400 Hrs.
900
22000 Hrs.
18000 Hrs.
15000 Hrs.
10500 Hrs.
Relubrication intervals are for ball bearings.

For vertically mounted motors and roller bearings, divide the relubrication interval by 2.
**
For motors operating at speeds greater than 3600 RPM, contact Baldor for relubrication recommendations.
MN400
Maintenance & Troubleshooting 3-1
Table of Contents
Table 3-2 Service Conditions

Severity of Service
Standard
Severe
Extreme
Hours per day

of Operation
8
16 Plus
16 Plus
Low Temperature
Ambient Temperature
Maximum
40 C
50 C
>50 C* or
Class H Insulation
<29 C **
Atmospheric
Contamination
Clean, Little Corrosion
Moderate dirt, Corrosion
Severe dirt, Abrasive dust, Corrosion, Heavy
Shock or Vibration
Special high temperature grease is recommended (Dow Corning DC44). Note that Dow Corning DC44 grease does
not mix with other grease types. Thoroughly clean bearing & cavity before adding grease.
**
Special low temperature grease is recommended (Aeroshell 7).
Table 3-3 Relubrication Interval Multiplier

Severity of Service
Standard
Severe
Extreme
Low Temperature
Multiplier
1.0
0.5
0.1
1.0
Some motor designs use different bearings on each motor end. This is normally indicated on the motor nameplate.
In this case, the larger bearing is installed on the motor Drive endplate. For best relubrication results, only use the
appropriate amount of grease for each bearing size (not the same for both).
Table 3-4 Bearings Sizes and Types

Frame Size
NEMA (IEC)
56 to 140 (90)
140 (90)
180 (100112)
210 (132)
250 (160)
280 (180)
320 (200)
360 (225)
400 (250)
440 (280)
5000 to 5800 (315450)
5000 to 5800 (315450)
360 to 449 (225280)
AC Induction Servo
76 Frame 180 (112)
77 Frame 210 (132)
80 Frame 250(160)
*
Bearing Description
(These are the Large bearings (Shaft End) in each frame size)
Volume of grease
Weight of Grease to
to be added
Bearing
add *
in3
teaspoon
oz (Grams)
6203
0.08 (2.4)
0.15
0.5
6205
0.15 (3.9)
0.2
0.8
6206
0.19 (5.0)
0.3
1.0
6307
0.30 (8.4)
0.6
2.0
6309
0.47 (12.5)
0.7
2.5
6311
0.61 (17)
1.2
3.9
6312
0.76 (20.1)
1.2
4.0
6313
0.81 (23)
1.5
5.2
6316
1.25 (33)
2.0
6.6
6319
2.12 (60)
4.1
13.4
6328
4.70 (130)
9.2
30.0
NU328
4.70 (130)
9.2
30.0
NU319
2.12 (60)
4.1
13.4
6207
6210
6213
0.22 (6.1)
0.32 (9.0)
0.49 (14.0)
0.44
0.64
0.99
1.4
2.1
3.3
Weight in grams = .005 DB

of grease to
be added
Note: Not all bearing sizes are listed. For intermediate bearing sizes, use the
grease volume for the next larger size bearing.
3-2 Maintenance & Troubleshooting
MN400
Table of Contents
Caution: To avoid damage to motor bearings, grease must be kept free of dirt.
For an extremely dirty environment, contact your Baldor distributor or
an authorized Baldor Service Center for additional information.
Relubrication Procedure Be sure that the grease you are adding to the motor is compatible with the grease
already in the motor. Consult your Baldor distributor or an authorized service center if a
grease other than the recommended type is to be used.
Caution: Do not overlubricate motor as this may cause premature bearing
failure.
With Grease Outlet Plug
1.
With the motor stopped, clean all grease fittings with a clean cloth.
2.
Remove grease outlet plug.
Caution:
Overlubricating can cause excessive bearing temperatures,

premature lubrication breakdown and bearing failure.
3.
Add the recommended amount of grease.
4.
Operate the motor for 15 minutes with grease plug removed.

This allows excess grease to purge.
5.
Re-install grease outlet plug.
Without Grease Provisions

Note: Only a Baldor authorized and UL or CSA certified service center can
disassemble a UL/CSA listed explosion proof motor to maintain its
UL/CSA listing.
1.
Disassemble the motor.
2.
Add recommended amount of grease to bearing and bearing cavity. (Bearing

should be about 1/3 full of grease and outboard bearing cavity should be about
1/2 full of grease.)
3.
Assemble the motor.
Sample Relubrication Determination

Assume - NEMA 286T (IEC 180), 1750 RPM motor driving an exhaust fan in an ambient
temperature of 43 C and the atmosphere is moderately corrosive.
1.
Table 3-1 list 9500 hours for standard conditions.
2.
Table 3-2 classifies severity of service as Severe.
3.
Table 3-4 shows that 1.2 in3 or 3.9 teaspoon of grease is to be added.
Note: Smaller bearings in size category may require reduced amounts of grease.
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Table 3-5 Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom
Motor will not start
Excessive humming
g
Motor Over Heating
Possible Causes
Usually caused by line trouble, such
as, single phasing at the starter.
High Voltage.
Eccentric air gap.
Overload. Compare actual amps
(measured) with nameplate rating.
Single Phasing.
Improper ventilation.
Unbalanced voltage.
Rotor rubbing
g on stator.
Over voltage or under voltage.
Open stator winding.
Grounded winding.
Improper connections.
Bearing
g Over Heating
g
Misalignment.
Excessive belt tension.
Excessive end thrust.
Excessive grease in bearing.
Insufficient grease in bearing.
Dirt in bearing.
Vibration
Misalignment.
Rubbing between rotating parts and
stationary parts.
Rotor out of balance.
Resonance.
Noise
Growling or whining
Foreign material in air gap or

ventilation openings.
Bad bearing.
Possible Solutions
Check source of power. Check overloads, fuses,
controls, etc.
Check input line connections.
Have motor serviced at local Baldor service center.
Locate and remove source of excessive friction in
motor or load.
Reduce load or replace with motor of greater capacity.
Check current at all phases (should be approximately
equal) to isolate and correct the problem.
Check external cooling fan to be sure air is moving
properly across cooling fins.
Excessive dirt build-up on motor. Clean motor.
Check voltage at all phases (should be approximately
equal) to isolate and correct the problem.
Check air gap clearance and bearings.
Tighten Thru Bolts.
Check input voltage at each phase to motor.
Check stator resistance at all three phases for
balance.
Perform dielectric test and repair as required.
Inspect all electrical connections for proper
termination, clearance, mechanical strength and
electrical continuity. Refer to motor lead connection
diagram.
Check and align motor and driven equipment.
Reduce belt tension to proper point for load.
Reduce the end thrust from driven machine.
Remove grease until cavity is approximately 3/4 filled.
Add grease until cavity is approximately 3/4 filled.
Clean bearing cavity and bearing. Repack with correct
grease until cavity is approximately 3/4 filled.
Check and align motor and driven equipment.
Isolate and eliminate cause of rubbing.
Have rotor balance checked are repaired at your
Baldor Service Center.
Tune system or contact your Baldor Service Center
for assistance.
Remove rotor and foreign material. Reinstall rotor.
Check insulation integrity. Clean ventilation openings.
Replace bearing. Clean all grease from cavity and
new bearing. Repack with correct grease until cavity
is approximately 3/4 filled.
MN400
Table of Contents
Suggested bearing and winding RTD setting guidelines

Most large frame AC Baldor motors with a 1.15 service factor are designed to operate
below a Class B (80C) temperature rise at rated load and are built with a Class H
winding insulation system. Based on this low temperature rise, RTD (Resistance
Temperature Detectors) settings for Class B rise should be used as a starting point.
Some motors with 1.0 service factor have Class F temperature rise.
The following tables show the suggested alarm and trip settings for RTDs. Proper
bearing and winding RTD alarm and trip settings should be selected based on these
tables unless otherwise specified for specific applications.
If the driven load is found to operate well below the initial temperature settings under
normal conditions, the alarm and trip settings may be reduced so that an abnormal
machine load will be identified.
The temperature limits are based on the installation of the winding RTDs imbedded in
the winding as specified by NEMA. Bearing RTDs should be installed so they are in
contact with the outer race on ball or roller bearings or in direct contact with the sleeve
bearing shell.
Winding RTDs Temperature Limit In 5C (405C Maximum Ambient)
Motor Load
Class B Temp Rise 3 80C

(Typical Design)
Alarm
Trip
130
140
140
150
Class F Temp Rise 3 105C
Class H Temp Rise 3 125C
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
3 Rated Load
155
165
175
Rated Load
160
165
180
to 1.15 S.F.
Note: S Winding RTDs are factory production installed, not from ModExpress.
S When Class H temperatures are used, consider bearing temperatures and relubrication requirements.
Trip
185
185
Bearing RTDs Temperature Limit In 5C (405C Maximum Ambient)

AntiFriction
Sleeve
Bearing Type
Oil or Grease
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
Standard*
95
100
85
High Temperature**
110
115
105
Note: * Bearing temperature limits are for standard design motors operating at Class B temperature rise.
** High temperature lubricants include some special synthetic oils and greases.
Trip
95
110
Greases that may be substituted that are compatible with Polyrex EM (but considered as
standard lubricants) include the following:
Texaco Polystar
Rykon Premium #2
Chevron SRI #2
Mobilith SHC100
Pennzoil Pennzlube EM2
Chevron Black Pearl
Darmex 707
Darmex 711
PetroCanada Peerless LLG
See the motor nameplate for replacement grease or oil recommendation.

Contact Baldor application engineering for special lubricants or further clarifications.
MN400
Table of Contents
MN400
Table of Contents
Baldor District Offices Baldor District Offices Baldor District Offices
Table of Contents
BALDOR ELECTRIC COMPANY

P.O. Box 2400
Ft. Smith, AR 729022400
(479) 6464711
Fax (479) 6485792
www.baldor.com
Baldor Electric Company

MN400
Printed in USA
2/07
Table of Contents
Stock P/N FE11790 / Madison P/N ARTS-01-A-0-0-B00-060-0.875
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
9330 Progress Parkway Mentor, OH 44060 (800) 424-5757

Fax: (440) 639-8365 e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
Features
Slim line profile

Full one year warranty
Intrinsically safe barriers
Easily and quickly installed
Standard size units in stock
Ideal for harsh environments
Differential line driver outputs
No need for an auxiliary shaft
Single and quadrature models
10, 30, 60, 120, 200, 240 PPR
Drop-in sensor preset air gap
Durable stainless steel sensors
NEMA and IEC metric versions
Madison Electric Products ring tachometers are a

convenient and efficient way to monitor motor shaft
RPM when using NEMA C-face or metric flanged
or faced motors. The ring tachometers are designed
with a dual C-face mount to fit between your motor
and gearbox, brake, clutch, etcenabling the
mounting of a pickup without the need for an auxiliary
shaft or a coupling.
Madison Electric non-contacting magnetic and Hall
zero speed sensors are designed to indicate speed
by reading rotating discontinuities, such as teeth on
a gear. The sensors send the signal, either a sine
wave or DC pulse train, to the motor controller. A
Madison analog or digital meter is a great way to
display the output. Custom sizes and scales are
available.
Madison Electric ring tachometer kits include a

precision machined ring tachometer with a drop-in
analog or Hall effect speed sensor (no adjustment
needed), four mounting bolts, conduit connection and
a standard 30, 60, or 120 tooth gear.
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
include
Applications inc
lude
Rate meters analog or digital
Speed switches
Direction sensing
Closed loop feedback
Intrinsically safe barriers
On-the-floor monitoring
Application notes
One of the biggest complaints heard on the floor of
plants and factories is the failure rate of nonindustrialized optical encoders. By applying variable
reluctance and Hall effect technology, Madison
Electric pickups are not affected by dust, oil, grease,
dirt, etcas happens with some optical sensors. The
sensors in the Madison Electric ring tachometer can
handle shock and vibrations that hinder most highresolution encoders. Built tough to last in harsh
industrial environments, the Madison Electric ring
tachometer withstands shock, dirt, and vibrations that
stop most high-resolution encoders.
To satisfy single-shafted motors without the standard
NEMA C-Face, Madison Electric has worked with
companies and their engineers to design and
produce customized ring tachometers to accommodate almost any motor manufactured.
Useful in any industry, the ring tachometer provides a

simple and accurate method to monitor the speed of
your application. When used in conjunction with an
intrinsically safe barrier (p/n 9002/11-280-186), the
Madison Electric ring tachometer is an ideal solution
for installing an FM rated system in a volatile area.
Factory set pick-ups insure all the user has to do is
plug it in and run to have an intrinsically safe feedback.
See our data sheets on p/n 9002/11-280-186 for
additional information concerning the installation of an
instrinscally safe system.
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
Listed in the chart below are the common NEMA motor frames and corresponding Madison Electric Products
frame code designation. A shaded Madison Code # indicates a non-stocking special order item.
Madison Code
Frame Siz
e
Size
Pilot
Pilot Depth
Bolt Cir
cle
Circ
OD
Shaft
00
48C
3.000
0.125
3.750
5.625
0.500
01
56C
143TC
145TC
182C
184C
4.500
0.125
5.875
6.500
0.625
0.875
0.875
0.875
0.875
02
182TC
184TC
213C
215C
213TC
215TC
254TC
246TC
254TC
256TC
8.500
0.250
7.250
9.000
1.125
1.125
1.125
1.125
1.375
1.375
1.375
1.375
1.625
1.625
03
284UC
286UC
284TC
286TC
10.500
0.250
9.000
11.250
1.625
1.625
1.875
1.875
04
324UC
326UC
324TC
326TC
12.500
0.250
11.000
13.375
1.875
1.875
2.125
2.125
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
Listed in the chart below are the common IEC (metric) frames and corresponding Madison Electric Products
frame code designation. A shaded Madison Code # indicates a non-stocking special order item.
B5 Flange
B14 Face
IEC
Frame
Madison
Code
Pilot
Pilot
Depth
Bolt
cle
Circ
Cir
OD
Madison
Code
Pilot
Pilot
Depth
Bolt
cle
Circ
Cir
OD
63
29
95
3.740
3
0.118
115
4.528
140
5.512
27
60
2.362
2.5
0.098
75
2.953
90
3.54
71
30
110
4.331
3.5
0.138
130
5.118
160
6.299
28
70
2.765
2.5
0.098
85
3.347
105
4.13
80
31
130
5.118
3.5
0.138
165
6.496
200
7.874
80
3.150
3
0.118
100
3.937
120
4.724
90
31
130
5.118
3.5
0.138
165
6.496
200
7.874
29
95
3.740
3
0.118
115
4.530
140
5.512
100
32
180
7.087
4
0.160
215
8.465
250
9.842
30
110
4.331
3.5
0.138
130
5.118
160
6.299
112
32
180
7.087
4
0.160
215
8.465
250
9.842
30
110
4.331
3.5
0.138
130
5.118
160
6.299
132
33
230
9.055
4
0.160
265
10.433
300
11.811
31
130
5.118
3.5
0.138
165
6.496
200
7.874
160
34
250
9.842
5
0.200
300
11.811
350
13.78
32
180
7.087
4
0.160
215
8.465
250
9.842
(mm
in.)
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

Play
ARTS-01/02
Plug n Pla
y Model AR
TS-01/02
achometer
Face-Mounted
Nema C F
ace-Mounted Motor Ring Tac
hometer Kits
Description
Models ARTS-01/02 Ring Tachometers are easily installed on footmounted motors with C face mount end bells, or between a motor
and gear case flange. The one piece cast aluminum ARTS Ring Tach
and junction box is precision machined with a factory pre-set sensor
gap. With our unique design, the sensor drops in at a constant
predetermined gap, and is ready for immediate installation.
Wiring connections to the sensor are made through the gasketed junction
box lid, and provide right or left conduit entry. A thread plug is provided
with the kit for sealing the unused conduit entry.
Combining a Madison Electric Ring Tachometer with our Model A300
Analog Rate Indication Meter or our Model ADT-800 Digital Rate Meter
completes your speed sensing and rate indication system.
Ring kits include a 60-tooth sensing gear, a drop-in Analog or Hall

Effect Speed Sensor, and mounting hardware. Additional kits include
10-tooth, 30-tooth, 120-tooth, 200-tooth, and 240-tooth gears.
ARTS-01 Ring Tachometer
ARTS-02 Ring Tachometer
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

Magnetic Pickup Speed Sensor

Analog Variable Reluctance (VR) Speed Sensors are passive sensors
and do not require any external power source. The sensor generates a
sinusoidal output voltage proportional to target speed and inversely
proportional to air gap. The output voltage, depending on air gap and
target surface speed, ranges from a few millivolts at the slowest target
speed to several volts at the highest target speed as illustrated in the
graph below.
The sensor is designed to drop-in at a constant predetermined air gap of
0.005" to 0.010". This unique design provides for an efficient means of
replacing the sensor without removing the ring tachometer.
Resistance ................................. 650 +/- 20%

Inductance ................................ 130 mH +/-20%
Vibration Resistance ................. 20g Peak
Shock Resistance ...................... 50g Peak
Sensor Operating Temp ............ -40C to + 100C
Wire Color Code ....................... 2-wire, 20 AWG with 100%
foil coverage; brown PVC jacket
Polarity ..................................... With the approach of ferrous
metal, white lead will go to positive with respect to the black lead
Model 1500-2510 Variable Reluctance (VR) Analog Speed Sensor

PVC JACKET
STAINLESS STEEL CASE

POSITIONING
SNAP RING
.373
.370
20 GA.
MADISON
ALL WIRE ENDS

TINNED
WHITE
BLACK
1500-2510
6.00"
2.50"
.096
Typical outputs using our 60-tooth Gear at 1800 RPM

RT-1 Hubless Gear - 16DP with 3.875 O.D.
Rating at 1800 RPM
P-P VOLTAGE
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.000
0.005
0.010
0.015
0.020
AIRGAP
RT-2 Hubless Gear - 10DP with 5.880 O.D.

Rating at 1800 RPM
70
P-P VOLTAGE
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.000
0.005
0.010
AIRGAP
0.015
0.020
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

Hall Effect Speed Sensor

Zero Speed non-contact sensors provide a constant amplitude output
over target speed ranges from zero to 15K teeth/second and require an
external 4.5 to 24 volts DC power source. The Madison Electric Products
zero speed sensors include an open collector output with sinking currents
to 25 mA, operating temperature range to 130C, short circuit protection,
orientation insensitivity, and true zero speed sensing.
The sensor is designed to drop-in with a constant predetermined air
gap. This unique design provides for an efficient means of replacing
the sensor without removing the ring tachometer.
Input Voltage .................... 4.5 to 24 VDC

Input Current .................... 10 mA max, output open
Output Voltage .................. Logic 0: 400 mV, max @ 20 mA sink
Logic 1: TTL comp., Vcc
Output Current .................. 25 mA max, w/external pull-up resistor
Signal Rise/Fall Time ....... 2uSec., typical
Speed Range ..................... 015,000 teeth/second
Dielectric Strength ............ 150 Vrms
Operating Temperature ..... -20C to + 100C
Sensing Distance .............. 0.005" to 0.025"
Wire Color Code ............... 3-wire, 20 AWG with stranded drain
wire and 100% foil coverage;
brown PVC jacket
Model 1500-2610 Hall Effect Speed Sensor Dimensions

STAINLESS STEEL CASE
POSITIONING
SNAP RING
.373
.370
SHIELD WIRE
PVC JACKET
WHITE
BLACK
RED
MADISON
1500-2610
2.50"
6.00"
Shaft Dia.
(Gear Bore)
Ring No.
Gear p/n
(Ref)
56C
5/8"
ARTS-01
4000-0902
143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C
7/8"
ARTS-01
4000-0903
182TC, 184TC, 213C, 215C
1-1/8"
ARTS-02
4000-0908
ALL WIRE
ENDS TINNED
20 GA.
Sensor
Motor Frame Size
213TC, 215TC, 254UC, 256UC

254TC, 256TC
1-3/8"
1-5/8"
ARTS-02
ARTS-02
4000-0909
4000-0910
Magnetic
Pick-up
Hall Effect
Speed
Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ring Tach Kit

Model No.
ARTS-01-A
ARTS-01-Z
ARTS-01-A
ARTS-01-Z
ARTS-02-A
ARTS-02-Z
ARTS-02-A
ARTS-02-Z
ARTS-02-A
ARTS-02-Z
Table of Contents
MADISON

ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
Machined Steel Sensing Gears

Sensing Gears are available in a number of sizes and styles in both hub
type and hubless designs to accommodate most applications. Madison
Electric stocks a wide variety of multiple gear-tooth and bore sizes as
listed in the chart below. Custom split gears and bore sizes are welcome
and will be quoted as required.
Hubless gears are well suited for mounting in limited spaces or when a
motor application has a short stub shaft. Split gears are convenient when
a shaft end is not available to mount a hubless gear.
Hub Type Gear
Hub
less Type Gear
Hubless
Gear Type
No.
Stock Bore
Diametral
of
+0.003
Pitch
Teeth
-0.000
10T
10T
10T
30T
30T
30T
30T
30T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
Hubless type
60T
gear applicable
60T
for Plug-n-Play
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
240T
240T
8DP
8DP
5DP
5DP
5DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
31DP
31DP
31DP
31DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
41DP
41DP
0.625
0.875
1.125
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
0.375
0.500
0.625
0.750
0.875
14mm
19mm
24mm
28mm
1.125
1.375
1.625
1.875
2.000
38mm
2.250
2.437
0.625
0.750
0.875
1.000
28mm
1.125
1.250
1.375
1.500
1.625
3.000
0.625
1.125
O.D.
+0.000
-0.005
3.750
3.750
5.750
3.875
3.875
5.880
5.880
5.880
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
Hub
Dia. "D"
0.010
Proj. "P"
0.020
Face "F"
0.020
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
Recommended
Torque for
Set Screws
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
Recommended
Maximum Gear
Speeds
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
Part
Number
4000-0110
4000-0112
4000-0115
4000-0702
4000-0703
4000-0710
4000-0712
4000-0714
4000-0900
4000-0901
4000-0902
4000-0920
4000-0903
4000-0904
4000-0905
4000-0906
4000-0907
4000-0908
4000-0909
4000-0910
4000-0911
4000-0912
4000-0913
4000-0914
4000-0916
4000-1010
4000-1011
4000-1012
4000-1013
4000-1019
4000-1020
4000-1021
4000-1022
4000-1024
4000-1025
4000-1026
4000-1035
4000-1040
Table of Contents
MADISON
Gear Type
No.
Stock Bore
Diametral
of
+0.003
Pitch
Teeth
-0.000
30T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
120T
120T
120T
Hub type gear
120T
not applicable
120T
for Plug-n-Play
120T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
8DP
23DP
23DP
23DP
11DP
11DP
11DP
42DP
36DP
36DP
24DP
24DP
24DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
48DP
48DP
42DP

ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
1.125
0.500
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
0.500
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.250
1.375
1.625
14mm
25mm
30mm
O.D.
+0.000
-0.005
3.988
2.570
2.570
2.570
5.360
5.360
5.360
2.895
3.377
3.377
5.098
5.098
5.098
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.210
4.210
4.810
Hub
Dia. "D"
0.010
2.500
1.250
1.250
1.500
2.000
2.000
2.500
1.380
2.000
2.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
2.000
2.000
2.060
Proj. "P"
0.020
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
Face "F"
0.020
0.312
0.170
0.170
0.170
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
Recommended
Torque for
Set Screws
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
Recommended
Maximum Gear
Speeds
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
Part
Number
4000-3400
4000-1100
4000-0970
4000-0975
4000-1600
4000-1610
4000-1620
4000-2001
4000-2000
4000-2010
4000-2200
4000-2210
4000-2220
4000-4300
4000-4310
4000-4320
4000-4360
4000-4377
4000-4380
4000-4500
4000-4515
4000-4370
Definitions
Pitch The distance between similar, equally spaced tooth surfaces, in
a given direction and along a given curve or line. The single word pitch
without qualification has been used to designate circular pitch, axial
pitch, and diametral pitch, but such confusing usage should be avoided.
Pressure Angle The angle between a tooth profile and a radial line at
its pitch point. This has no significant effect on performance of the gear
for exciting magnetic pickups. Pickups can be used with any pressure
angle.
Pitch Circle A circle, the radius of which is equal to the distance

from the gear axis to the pitch point.
Outside Diameter (OD) The outside diameter is the overall diameter

of the gear to the top of the teeth. The OD is used to calculate surface
speed when the gear is used to excite a magnetic pickup.
Pitch Diameter The diameter of the pitch circle described by the

tooth-to-tooth contact point when running in mesh with the teeth of
another gear. This point is roughly halfway between the root (bottom)
and the tip of the gear tooth. The pitch diameter is slightly smaller than
the outside diameter of the gear.
Diametral Pitch (DP) The ratio of the number of teeth to the number
of inches of pitch diameter, i.e. the number of gear teeth to each inch of
pitch diameter. For example, a 20 DP gear has 20-teeth for each inch of
pitch diameter. Therefore, a 60-tooth, 20 DP gear would have a pitch
diameter of 3".
Formulas
Diametral Pitch =
Outside Diameter =
Number of Teeth
Pitch Diameter
Number of teeth + 2
Diametral Pitch
Surface Speed in inches/second =
Output Frequency (Hz or teeth/sec) =
RPM x OD x
60
RPM x Number of gear teeth
60
Surface Speed The output of a magnetic pickup is determined by the

linear surface speed of the outside diameter of the passing gear teeth.
Surface speed is normally expressed in inches/second.
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

C-Face
NEMA C-F
ace & IEC Metric Motor Frame Mounted
Ordering
Information
achometer
Ring Tac
hometer Or
dering Inf
ormation
To order fill in the following part numbers:
ART
Channels
SQDP-
Single
Quad
Dual
Parallel
Frame Size
00 01 02 03 04 30 31 32 33 34 -
3.0 NEMA
4.5 NEMA
8.5 NEMA
10.5 NEMA
12.5 NEMA
Metric 71D
Metric 80D/90D
Metric 100D/112D
Metric 132D
Metric 160D
Pick-Up
A - Analog
Z - Hall Effect
Y - Hall Effect
w/o resistor
L - Hall Effect w/
Line Driver
Differential Terminal
Driver
Block
1 - Yes
1 - Yes
0 - No
0 - No
99 - Special Frame
(consult factory)
Example Part Number:
Lid Code
M00 - Madison
B00 - Blank
Cxx - Custom
Gear
PPR
010
030
060
120
200
240
Shaft
Size
0.500
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
1.875
14mm
19mm
24mm
28mm
30mm
38mm
42mm
ARTS-01-Z-1-1-B00-060-0.625
When ordering, fill in the above chart to determine your part number. Motor frame sizes can be found in the charts in this
section. If you are unable to find your motor frame or require an OEM custom lid, please contact the Madison Electric
Sales Department (800-424-5757).
Table of Contents
MC1000 Series
Installation and Operation Manual
Table of Contents
NOTE!
The manual covers software version M108314 and above.
See paramter 63 for the software version of the drive you are working with.
If you are working with an earlier software releaas, you will not have all of
the functionality described in this manual, but the functionlity of the drive is
fully documented in this manual.
If you are working with M108313 or ealier, parameters 69 and 70 are
described in this manual as parameters 98 and 99.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
6.1
6.2
7.0
7.1
7.2
8.0
8.1
8.2
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PRODUCTS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PRODUCT CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RECEIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CUSTOMER MODIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MC1000 SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MC1000 MODEL DESIGNATION CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
MC1000 DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
MC1000 RATINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DESCRIPTION OF AC MOTOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DRIVE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INSTALLATION AFTER A LONG PERIOD OF STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
EXPLOSION PROOF APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INPUT AC REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
INPUT AC POWER REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
INPUT FUSING AND DISCONNECT REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
VOLTAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL POWER UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYPAD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
22
23
24
13.1 KEYPAD FUNCTIONS (IN LOCAL MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

13.2 MC1000 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
14.0
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
16.0
CONTROL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MC1000 CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
MC1000 TERMINAL STRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
TWO-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
THREE-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SPEED POT AND PRESET SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
PROGRAMMING THE MC1000 DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
16.1 PROGRAMMING THE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

16.2 PARAMETER ACCESS USING SPEED DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
17.0
18.0
19.0
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
20.0
21.0
PARAMETER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
MC1000 PID SET POINT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
FEEDBACK DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
THE SYSTEM - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PID CONTROL - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SET POINT REFERENCE SOURCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
TUNING THE PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
MC1000 DISPLAY IN PID MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
USER SETTING RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.0
1.1
GENERAL
PRODUCTS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL
This manual covers the AC Tech MC1000 Series Variable Frequency Drive.
1.2
PRODUCT CHANGES
AC Technology Corporation reserves the right to discontinue or make modications

to the design of its products and manuals without prior notice, and holds no obligation
to make modications to products sold previously. AC Technology Corporation also
holds no liability for losses of any kind which may result from this action. Instruction
manuals with the most up-to-date information are available for download from the
AC Tech web site (www.actech.com).
1.3
WARRANTY
AC Technology Corporation warrants the MC Series AC motor control to be free

of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 24 months from the date
of shipment from AC Tech's factory. An MC Series control, or any component
contained therein, which under normal use, becomes defective within the stated
warranty time period, shall be returned to AC Technology Corporation, freight
prepaid, for examination (contact AC Technology Corporation for authorization prior
to returning any product). AC Technology Corporation reserves the right to make
the nal determination as to the validity of a warranty claim, and sole obligation is
to repair or replace only components which have been rendered defective due to
faulty material or workmanship. No warranty claim will be accepted for components
which have been damaged due to mishandling, improper installation, unauthorized
repair and/or alteration of the product, operation in excess of design specications
or other misuse, or improper maintenance. AC Technology Corporation makes no
warranty that its products are compatible with any other equipment, or to any specic
application, to which they may be applied and shall not be held liable for any other
consequential damage or injury arising from the use of its products.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied.
No other person, rm or corporation is authorized to assume, for AC Technology
Corporation, any other liability in connection with the demonstration or sale
of its products.
1.4
RECEIVING
Inspect all cartons for damage which may have occurred during shipping. Carefully
unpack equipment and inspect thoroughly for damage or shortage. Report
any damage to carrier and/or shortages to supplier. All major components and
connections should be examined for damage and tightness, with special attention
given to PC boards, plugs, knobs and switches.
1.5
CUSTOMER MODIFICATION
AC Technology Corporation, its sales representatives and distributors, welcome the

opportunity to assist our customers in applying our products. Many customizing
options are available to aid in this function. AC Technology Corporation cannot
assume responsibility for any modications not authorized by its engineering
department.
Table of Contents
2.0
MC1000 SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Temperature
-20 to 70 C
Ambient Operating Temperature
Chassis (w/o cover)
-10 to 55 C
(With 2.5, 6, and 8 kHz carrier,
Type 1 (IP 31)
-10 to 50 C
derate for higher carriers)
Type 4 (IP 65)
-10 to 40 C
Type 12 (IP 54)
-10 to 40 C
Ambient Humidity
Less than 95% (non-condensing)
Altitude
3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level

without derating
Input Line Voltages
240/120 Vac, 240/200 Vac,

480/400 Vac, and 590/480 Vac
Input Voltage Tolerance
+10%, -15%
Input Frequency Tolerance
48 to 62 Hz
Output Wave Form
Sine Coded PWM
Output Frequency
0-120 Hz, Optional up to 1000 Hz
Carrier Frequency
2.5 kHz to 14 kHz
Frequency Stability
+0.00006% / C
Service Factor
1.00
Efciency
> 97% throughout speed range
Power Factor (displacement)
> 0.96
Overload Current Capacity
150% of output rating for 60 seconds

180% of output rating for 30 seconds
Speed Reference Follower
0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Control Voltage
15 VDC
Analog Outputs
0 - 10 VDC, or 2 - 10 VDC
Proportional to speed and load
Digital Outputs
Form C relay: 2 A at 28 VDC or 120 Vac

Open-collector outputs: 40 mA at 30 VDC
Table of Contents
3.0
MC1000 MODEL DESIGNATION CODE
The model number of an MC1000 Series drive gives a full description of the basic
drive unit (see example below).
EXAMPLE: M1450BP
(MC1000, 480 Vac, 5 HP, Type 1 Enclosure, with a Remote Keypad Assembly)
M1
50
Series:
M1
= M1000 Series Variable Speed AC Motor Drive
Input Voltage:
1 = 240/120 Vac (For 110, 115, 120, 230 and 240 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
2 = 240/200 Vac (For 208, 230, and 240 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
Rating:
03 = HP (0.18 kW)
75 = 7 HP (5.5 kW)
05 = HP (0.37 kW)
100 = 10 HP (7.5 kW)
500 = 50 HP (37.5 kW)
10 = 1 HP (0.75 kW)
150 = 15 HP (11 kW)
15 = 1 HP (1.1 kW)
200 = 20 HP (15 kW)
1000
20 = 2 HP (1.5 kW)
250 = 25 HP (18.5 kW)
1250 = 125 HP (90 kW)
30 = 3 HP (2.2 kW)
300 = 30 HP (22 kW)
1500 = 150 HP (110 kW)
50 / 51 = 5 HP (3.7 kW)
400 = 40 HP (30vkW)
600 = 60 HP (45 kW)

750 = 75 HP (55 kW)
100 HP (75 kW)
Input Phase:
S = Single phase input only.
No character indicates three phase input only
Enclosure Type:
B = NEMA 1 - General Purpose, vented
C = NEMA 4 - Water-tight and Dust-tight
D = NEMA 12 - Oil-tight and Dust-tight
E = NEMA 4X - Water-tight, Dust-tight, and Corrosion Resistant (Stainless Steel)
Standard Options:
H = Additional Form C Relay circuit board
J = Dynamic Braking circuit board
K = Dynamic Braking & Additional Form C Relay board (not available on all HP sizes - consult factory)
No character when this type of option is not specied
Interface Options:
P = Remote keypad assembly
No character when this type of option is not specied
Table of Contents
4.0
MC1000 DIMENSIONS
4.1
TYPE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR MODELS RATED UP TO 30 HP

AT 240/200 Vac AND 60 HP AT 590/480/400 Vac
D
Conduit Holes:
S Dia.
0.88" Dia.
U
V
1.00"
S Dia.
IF W = 10.26"
T = 0.28"
U = 0.44"
V = 0.24"
P
R
T
Dia. Slot
IF W < 7.86"
T = 0.20"
U = 0.34"
V = 0.19"
Mounting Tab Detail
HP
(kW)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
0.25
(0.18)
240 / 120 M1103SB 7.50
0.5
(0.37)
1
(0.75)
1.5
(1.1)
240 / 120 M1105SB 7.50
4.70
3.33
2.35
1.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
6.12
3.63
3.77
1.80
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1205SB 7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1205B
7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
240 / 120 M1110SB 7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1210SB 7.50
4.70
4.33
2.35
2.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1210B
4.70
4.33
2.35
2.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
240
240/200
240
240 / 200
7.50
480 / 400
M1410B
7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1510B
7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
240/120
M1115SB 7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
240
M1215SB 7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1215B
7.50
4.70
4.33
2.35
2.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1220SB 7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1220B
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
240/200
240
2
(1.5)
MODEL
240 / 200
7.50
480/400
M1420B
7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1520B
7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
Table of Contents
TYPE 1 DIMENSIONS (continued)
HP
(kW)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
3
(2.2)
240 / 200
M1230SB 7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1230B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
480 / 400
M1430B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1530B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
240 / 200
M1250B
7.88
7.86
5.94
5.13
3.95
1.50
5.88
1.13
480 / 400
M1450B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1551B
7.88
7.86
5.94
5.13
3.95
1.50
5.88
1.13
240 / 200
M1275B
9.38
7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
5.88
1.13
480 / 400
M1475B
9.38
7.86
6.25
5.13
3.95
1.50
7.38
1.13
590
M1575B
9.38
240
5
(3.7)
7.5
(5.5)
MODEL
7.86
6.25
5.13
3.95
1.50
7.38
1.13
240 / 200 M12100B 11.25 7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
7.75
1.38
480 / 400 M14100B 9.38
7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
5.88
1.13
7.86
7.40
3.93
4.19
2.00
5.88
1.13
240/200
M12150B 12.75 7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.25
1.38
480/400
M14150B 11.25 7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
7.75
1.38
590
M15150B 12.75 7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.75
1.38
240 / 200 M12200B 12.75 10.26 7.74
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
480/400
M14200B 12.75 7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.25
1.38
590
M15200B 12.75 7.86
7.40
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.25
1.38
240 / 200 M12250B 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.00
2.50 12.25 1.38
480/400
M14250B 12.75 10.26 7.74
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
590
M15250B 12.75 10.26 7.74
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
240 / 200 M12300B 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.00
2.50 12.25 1.38
480/400
M14300B 12.75 10.26 7.74
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
590
M15300B 12.75 10.26 8.25
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
40
(30)
480/400
M14400B 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.00
2.50 12.25 1.38
590
M15400B 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.00
2.50 12.25 1.38
50
(37.5)
480/400
M14500B 19.75 10.26 8.55
5.13
5.75
2.50 16.25 1.75
590
M15500B 19.75 10.26 8.55
5.13
5.75
2.50 16.25 1.75
60
(45)
480/400
M14600B 19.75 10.26 8.55
5.13
5.75
2.50 16.25 1.75
590
M15600B 19.75 10.26 8.55
5.13
5.75
2.50 16.25 1.75
10
(7.5)
15
(11)
20
(15)
25
(18.5)
30
(22)
590
M15100B 9.38
Table of Contents
4.2
TYPE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR MODELS RATED ABOVE 30 HP

0.68"
0.31"
IF W = 13.00"
1.50"
H
1.36"
0.36"
Dia.
Mounting Tab Detail
0.92"
Conduit Holes:
1.13" Dia.
S Dia.
0.43"
IF W > 16.64"
1.50"
3.00"
0.44"
Dia.
1.36"
HP/kW
INPUT
VOLTAGE
40/30
240 / 200 M12400B 25.00 13.00 10.50 5.56
60/45
240 / 200 M12600B 47.00 16.64 11.85
75/55
480 / 400 M14750B 29.00 16.64 11.85 7.14
MODEL
6.50
6.50
2.62
1.38
See below
6.88
6.88
3.12
1.75
100/75 480 / 400 M141000B 29.00 24.42 11.85 11.12 7.25
6.50
4.50
2.50
125/90 480 / 400 M141250B 29.00 24.42 11.85 11.12 7.25
6.50
4.50
2.50
150/110 480 / 400 M141500B 29.00 36.66 11.85

CONDUIT HOLES FOR M12600B
4.26"
4.00"
CONDUIT HOLES FOR M141500B

7.45"
4.00"
6.88"
See below
7.25"
9.00"
7.00"
9.00"
6.50"
Conduit Holes: Large holes = 3.00"

Small holes = 1.13"
Conduit Holes: Large holes = 1.75"

Small hole = 1.13"
Table of Contents
4.3
TYPE 4, 4X, AND 12 DIMENSIONS FOR MODELS RATED UP

TO 30 HP AT 240/200 Vac AND 60 HP AT 590/480/400 Vac
D
Conduit Holes:
Q
S Dia.
0.88" Dia.
S Dia.
1.00"
IF W > 10.26"
T = 0.28"
U = 0.44"
V = 0.24"
T
Dia. Slot
IF W < 7.86"
T = 0.20"
U = 0.34"
V = 0.19"
U
V
Mounting Tab Detail
HP
(kW)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
MODEL
0.25
(0.18)
240 / 120
M1103S
7.88
6.12
3.63
3.06
2.00
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 120
M1105S
7.88
7.86
3.75
4.80
2.10
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1205S
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
0.5
(0.37)
1
(0.75)
1.5
(1.1)
2
(1.5)
3
(2.2)
240/200
M1205
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1110S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1210S
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1210
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
480 / 400
M1410
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
590
M1510
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
240/120
M1115S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1215S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240/200
M1215
7.88
6.12
5.25
3.06
3.60
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1220S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1220
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
480/400
M1420
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
590
M1520
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1230S
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1230
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
480 / 400
M1430
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
590
M1530
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
Table of Contents
DIMENSIONS - TYPE 4, 4X, AND 12 ENCLOSED (continued)
HP
(kW)
5
(3.7)
7.5
(5.5)
10
(7.5)
15
(11)
20
(15)
25
(18.5)
30
(22)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
MODEL
240 / 200
M1250
480 / 400
M1450
590
9.75 10.26 7.20
5.13
5.25
2.00
7.75
1.13
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
M1550
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1275
11.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00
9.75
1.13
480 / 400
M1475
9.75 10.26 7.20
5.13
5.25
2.00
7.75
1.13
590
M1575
9.75 10.26 7.20
5.13
5.25
2.00
7.75
1.13
240 / 200
M12100 13.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
480 / 400
M14100 11.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00
9.75
1.13
590
M15100 11.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00
9.75
1.13
240/200
M12150 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 13.75 1.38
480/400
M14150 13.25 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
590
M15150 13.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
240 / 200 M12200D* 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
480/400
M14200 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 13.75 1.38
590
M15200 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 13.75 1.38
240 / 200 M12250D* 20.25 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 16.25 1.38
480/400 M14250D* 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
M15250D* 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
240 / 200 M12300D* 20.25 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 16.25 1.38
480/400 M14300D* 15.75 10.26 8.35
590
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
M15300D* 15.75 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 11.75 1.38
40
(30)
480/400 M14400D* 20.25 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 16.25 1.38
M15400D* 20.25 10.26 8.35
5.13
5.75
2.00 16.25 1.38
50
(37.5)
480/400 M14500D* 21.00 13.72 8.35
5.13
6.10
2.00 16.25 1.38
M15500D* 21.00 13.72 8.35
5.13
6.10
2.00 16.25 1.38
60
(45)
480/400 M14600D* 21.00 13.72 8.35
5.13
6.10
2.00 16.25 1.38
5.13
6.10
2.00 16.25 1.38
590
590
590
590
M15600D* 21.00 13.72 8.35
*Models available in NEMA 12 only.
Table of Contents
4.4
TYPE 12 DIMENSIONS FOR MODELS RATED ABOVE 30 HP

0.68"
0.31"
1.36"
H
1.50"
0.36"
Dia.
IF W = 14.00"
Mounting Tab Detail
0.92"
Q
0.43"
Conduit Holes:
1.13" Dia.
1.36"
S Dia.
0.44"
Dia.
3.00"
P
1.50"
IF W > 18.00"
N
HP/kW
INPUT
VOLTAGE
75/55
480 / 400 M14750D 37.00 18.00 13.30 7.50
MODEL
8.00
3.13
7.14
1.75
100/75 480 / 400 M141000D 39.00 26.00 13.30 11.50 9.00
4.50
9.14
2.50
125/90 480 / 400 M141250D 39.00 26.00 13.30 11.50 9.00
4.50
9.14
2.50
Table of Contents
5.0
MC1000 RATINGS
The following tables indicate the input and output ratings of the MC1000 Series.
NOTE: The output current ratings are based on operation at carrier frequencies
of 8 kHz and below. At full ambient temperature, operation at carrier frequencies
above 8 kHz require derating the drive by multiplying the output current rating by
the following factors: 0.94 at 10 kHz, 0.89 at 12 kHz, and 0.83 at 14 kHz. Refer to
Parameter 23 - CARRIER in Section 18.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
M1100 SERIES RATINGS

MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
(120/240 Vac, 50 - 60 Hz)
(0 - 230 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
1
2
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1103S
0.25
0.18
6.0 / 3.0
0.72
1.4 / 1.4
0.56
M1105S
0.5
0.37
9.2 / 4.6
1.1
2.2 / 2.2
0.88
M1110S
0.75
16.2 / 8.1
1.9
4.0 / 4.0
1.6
M1115S
1.5
1.1
21 / 10.4
2.5
5.2 / 5.2
2.1
RATED
See Section 3.0 for model number breakdown.

See Section 8.0 for recommended fuse type.
10
Table of Contents
MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
(200/240 Vac, 50 - 60 Hz)
(0 - 200/230 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
1
2
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1205S
0.5
0.37
5.8 / 5.0
1.2
2.5 / 2.2
0.9
M1205
0.5
0.37
3.1 / 2.7
1.1
2.5 / 2.2
0.9
M1210S
0.75
10.4 / 9.0
2.2
4.6 / 4.0
1.6
M1210
0.75
5.5 / 4.8
2.0
4.6 / 4.0
1.6
M1215S
1.5
1.1
13.3 / 11.6
2.8
6.0 / 5.2
2.1
M1215
1.5
1.1
7.1 / 6.2
2.6
6.0 / 5.2
2.1
M1220S
1.5
17.1 / 14.9
3.6
7.8 / 6.8
2.7
M1220
1.5
9.3 / 8.1
3.4
7.8 / 6.8
2.7
M1230S
2.2
24 / 21
5.0
11.0 / 9.6
3.8
M1230
2.2
13.0 / 11.3
4.7
11.0 / 9.6
3.8
M1250
3.7
20 / 17.7
7.4
17.5 / 15.2
6.1
M1275
7.5
5.5
30 / 26
10.6
25 / 22
8.8
M12100
10
7.5
37 / 32
13.2
32 / 28
11.2
M12150
15
11
55 / 48
19.8
48 / 42
16.7
M12200
20
15
70 / 61
25.3
62 / 54
21.5
M12250
25
18.5
89 / 77
32.0
78 / 68
27.1
M12300
30
22
104 / 90
37.6
92 / 80
31.9
M12400
40
30
119 / 99
41.0
120 / 104
41.4
M12600
60
45
174 / 145
60.5
177 / 154
61.3
RATED

11
Table of Contents
MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
(400/480 Vac, 50 - 60 Hz)
(0 - 400/460 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1410
0.75
2.8 / 2.4
2.0
2.3 / 2.0
1.6
M1420
1.5
4.7 / 4.1
3.4
3.9 / 3.4
2.7
M1430
2.2
6.6 / 5.7
4.7
5.5 / 4.8
3.8
M1450
3.7
10.2 / 8.9
7.3
8.7 / 7.6
6.1
M1475
7.5
5.5
14.7 / 12.8
10.6
12.6 / 11.0
8.8
M14100
10
7.5
18.3 / 15.9
13.2
16.0 / 14.0
11.2
M14150
15
11
28 / 24
19.8
24 / 21
16.7
M14200
20
15
36 / 31
25.3
31 / 27
21.5
M14250
25
18.5
44 / 38
31.9
39 / 34
27.1
M14300
30
22
52 / 45
37.6
46 / 40
31.9
M14400
40
30
68 / 59
49.0
60 / 52
41.4
M14500
50
37.5
85 / 74
61.5
75 / 65
51.8
M14600
60
45
100 / 87
72.3
88 / 77
61.3
M14750
75
55
109 / 91
75.5
110 / 96
76.5
M141000
100
75
139 / 116
96.4
143 / 124
98.8
M141250
125
90
175 / 146
121.4
179 / 156
124.3
M141500
150
110
202 / 168
139.7
207 / 180
143.4
RATED

2
1
12
Table of Contents
MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
(480/590 Vac, 50 - 60 Hz)
(0 - 460/575 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1510
0.75
1.9 / 1.9
1.9
1.6 / 1.6
1.6
M1520
1.5
3.3 / 3.3
3.4
2.7 / 2.7
2.7
M1530
2.2
4.6 / 4.6
4.7
3.9 / 3.9
3.9
M1550/51
3.7
7.1 / 7.1
7.3
6.1 / 6.1
6.1
M1575
7.5
5.5
10.5 / 10.5
10.7
9.0 / 9.0
8.8
M15100
10
7.5
12.5 / 12.5
12.8
11.0 / 11.0
11.0
M15150
15
11
19.3 / 19.3
19.7
17.0 / 17.0
16.9
M15200
20
15
25 / 25
25.4
22 / 22
21.5
M15250
25
18.5
31 / 31
31.2
27 / 27
26.9
M15300
30
22
36 / 36
37.1
32 / 32
31.9
M15400
40
30
47 / 47
47.5
41 / 41
40.8
M15500
50
37.5
59 / 59
60.3
52 / 52
51.8
M15600
60
45
71 / 71
72.5
62 / 62
61.7
RATED

2
1
13
Table of Contents
6.0
6.1
THEORY
DESCRIPTION OF AC MOTOR OPERATION
Three phase AC motors are comprised of two major components, the stator and
the rotor. The stator is a set of three electrical windings held stationary in the motor
housing. The rotor is a metal cylinder, xed to the motor drive shaft, which rotates
within the stator. The arrangement of the stator coils and the presence of three
phase AC voltage give rise to a rotating magnetic eld which drives the rotor. The
speed at which the magnetic eld rotates is known as the synchronous speed of
the motor. Synchronous speed is a function of the frequency at which the voltage
is alternating and the number of poles in the stator windings.
The following equation gives the relation between synchronous speed, frequency,
and the number of poles:
Ss = 120 f/p
Where: Ss = Synchronous speed (rpm ), f = frequency (Hz),
p = number of poles
In three phase induction motors the actual shaft speed differs from the synchronous
speed as load is applied. This difference is known as slip. Slip is commonly
expressed as a percentage of synchronous speed. A typical value is three percent
at full load.
The strength of the magnetic eld in the gap between the rotor and stator is
proportional to the amplitude of the voltage at a given frequency. The output torque
capability of the motor is, therefore, a function of the applied voltage amplitude at
a given frequency. When operated below base (rated) speed, AC motors run in
the range of constant torque. Constant torque output is obtained by maintaining
a constant ratio between voltage amplitude (Volts) and frequency (Hertz). For
60 Hz motors rated at 230, 460, and 575 Vac, common values for this V/Hz ratio
are 3.83, 7.66, and 9.58 respectively. Operating with these V/Hz ratios generally
yields optimum torque capability. Operating at lower ratio values results in lower
torque and power capability. Operating at higher ratio values will cause the motor
to overheat. Most standard motors are capable of providing full torque output from
3 to 60 Hz. However, at lower speeds, where motor cooling fans become less
effective, supplemental cooling may be needed to operate at full torque output
continuously.
If the frequency applied to the motor is increased while the voltage remains constant,
torque capability will decrease as speed increases. This will cause the horsepower
capability of the motor to remain approximately constant. Motors run in this mode
when operated above base speed, where drive output voltage is limited by the
input line voltage. This operating range is known as the constant horsepower
range. The typical maximum range for constant horsepower is about 2.3 to 1
(60 to 140 Hz). The diagram below depicts the characteristics of a typical AC
induction motor with a 60 Hz base speed.
WARNING!
Consult motor manufacturer before operating motor and/or driven equipment

above base speed.
14
Table of Contents
CONSTANT TORQUE
150
CONSTANT HP
130
TORQUE (%)
110
TORQUE
HORSEPOWER
TOR
90
QUE
ER
OW
70
EP
RS
HO
50
30
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
FREQUENCY (Hz)
6.1.1
VARIABLE TORQUE VS. CONSTANT TORQUE
Variable frequency drives, and the loads they are applied to, can generally be
divided into two groups: constant torque and variable torque. Constant torque loads
include: vibrating conveyors, punch presses, rock crushers, machine tools, and
just about every other application that is not considered variable torque. Variable
torque loads include centrifugal pumps and fans, which make up the majority of
HVAC applications.
Variable torque loads are governed by the afnity laws, which dene the relationships
between speed, ow, torque and horsepower. The diagram below illustrates these
relationships:
100%
75%
50%
OW
FL
UE
RQ
25%
TO
WE
PO
E
RS
HO
0%
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
% SPEED
Variable torque refers to the fact that the torque required varies with the square of
the speed. Also, the horsepower required varies with the cube of the speed, resulting
in a large reduction in horsepower for even a small reduction in speed. It is easily
seen that substantial energy savings can be achieved by reducing the speed of a
fan or pump. For example, reducing the speed to 50% results in a 50 HP motor
having to produce only 12.5% of rated horsepower, or 6.25 HP.
15
Table of Contents
Variable torque drives usually have a low overload capacity (110% - 120% for
60 seconds), because variable torque applications rarely experience overload
conditions. To optimize efciency and energy savings, variable torque drives are
usually programmed to follow a variable V/Hz ratio.
The term constant torque is not entirely accurate in terms of the actual torque
required for an application. Many constant torque applications have reciprocating
loads, such as vibrating conveyors and punch presses, where the rotational motion
of the motor is being converted to a linear motion. In such cases, the torque required
can vary greatly at different points in the cycle. For constant torque loads, this
uctuation in torque is not a direct function of speed, as it is with a variable torque
load. As a result, constant torque drives typically have a high overload rating (150%
for 60 seconds) in order to handle the higher peak torque demands. To achieve
maximum torque, constant torque drives follow a constant V/Hz ratio.
Both MC Series product lines (MC1000 and MC3000) have full overload capacity
(150% for 60 seconds, 180% for 30 seconds), so that either one can be used for either
type of application. The V/Hz ratio can also be changed to optimize performance
for either type of application.
16
Table of Contents
6.2
DRIVE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
The MC Series is a 16 bit microprocessor based, keypad programmable, variable

speed AC motor drive. There are four major sections: an input diode bridge and
lter, a power board, a control board, and an output intelligent power module.
6.2.1
DRIVE OPERATION
Incoming AC line voltage is converted to a pulsating DC voltage by the input diode

bridge. The DC voltage is supplied to the bus lter capacitors through a charge
circuit which limits inrush current to the capacitors during power-up. The pulsating DC
voltage is ltered by the bus capacitors which reduces the ripple level. The ltered
DC voltage enters the inverter section of the drive, composed of six output intelligent
insulated gate bi-polar transistors (IGBTs) which make up the three output legs of
the drive. Each leg has one intelligent IGBT connected to the positive bus voltage
and one connected to the negative bus voltage. Alternately switching on each leg,
the intelligent IGBT produces an alternating voltage on each of the corresponding
motor windings. By switching each output intelligent IGBT at a very high frequency
(known as the carrier frequency) for varying time intervals, the inverter is able to
produce a smooth, three phase, sinusoidal output current wave which optimizes
motor performance.
6.2.2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The control section consists of a control board with a 16 bit microprocessor, keypad
and display. Drive programming is accomplished via the keypad or the serial
communications port. During operation the drive can be controlled via the keypad,
by control devices wired to the control terminal strip, or by the serial communications
port. The Power Board contains the control and protection circuits which govern
the six output IGBTs. The Power Board also contains a charging circuit for the bus
lter capacitors, a motor current feedback circuit, a voltage feedback circuit, and a
fault signal circuit. The drive has several built in protection circuits. These include
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground short circuit protection, high and low line
voltage protection, protection against excessive ambient temperature, and protection
against continuous excessive output current. Activation of any of these circuits will
cause the drive to shut down in a fault condition.
6.2.3
MC1000 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
The drive has two analog inputs (0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA) that can be used for
speed reference, PID set point reference, or PID feedback. A speed potentiometer
(10,000 Ohm) can be used with the 0-10 VDC input.
There are also two analog outputs: one is proportional to speed (frequency), and
the other is proportional to load.
The drive has three programmable outputs for status indication: one Form C relay
and two open-collector outputs.
NOTE: Models rated above 30 Hp at 200/240 Vac and 60 Hp at 400/480 Vac have
a second Form C relay.
Refer to Sections 14.0 - CONTROL WIRING and 15.0 - CONTROL WIRING
DIAGRAMS for more information.
17
Table of Contents
7.0
INSTALLATION
WARNING!
DRIVES MUST NOT BE INSTALLED WHERE SUBJECTED TO ADVERSE

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS! DRIVES MUST NOT BE INSTALLED
WHERE SUBJECTED TO: COMBUSTIBLE, OILY, OR HAZARDOUS VAPORS
OR DUST; EXCESSIVE MOISTURE OR DIRT; STRONG VIBRATION;
EXCESSIVE AMBIENT TEMPERATURES. CONSULT AC TECHNOLOGY FOR
MORE INFORMATION ON THE SUITABILITY OF A DRIVE TO A PARTICULAR
ENVIRONMENT.
The drive should be mounted on a smooth vertical surface capable of safely
supporting the unit without vibrating. The LCD display has an optimum eld of view,
this should be considered when determining the mounting position.
Chassis models must be installed in an electrical enclosure which will provide
complete mechanical protection and maintain uniform internal temperature within the
drives ambient operating temperature rating. All drive models MUST be mounted
in a vertical position for proper heatsink cooling.
Maintain a minimum spacing around the drive as follows:
SPACING REQUIREMENTS
HP
SPACING
INCHES
mm
0.25 - 5
50
7.5 - 25
100
30 - 60
150
75 - 150
200
All drive models MUST be mounted in a vertical position for proper heatsink cooling.
Fans or blowers should be used to insure proper cooling in tight quarters. Do not
mount drives above other drives or heat producing equipment that would
impede the cooling of the drive. Note the ambient operating temperature ratings
for each drive model.
If it is necessary to drill or cut the drive enclosure or panel, extreme care must be
taken to avoid damaging drive components or contaminating the drive with metal
fragments (which cause shorting of electrical circuits). Cover drive components
with a clean cloth to keep out metal chips and other debris. Use a vacuum cleaner
to clean drive components after drilling, even if chips do not appear to be present.
Do not attempt to use positive air pressure to blow chips out of drive, as this tends
to lodge debris under electronic components. Contaminating the drive with metal
chips can cause drive failure and will void the warranty.The MC1000 Series is UL
approved for solid state motor overload protection. Therefore, a separate thermal
overload relay is not required for single motor applications. In applications where
one drive is operating more than one motor, a separate thermal overload relay is
required for each motor per NEC.
18
Table of Contents
7.1
INSTALLATION AFTER A LONG PERIOD OF STORAGE
WARNING!
Severe damage to the drive can result if it is operated after a long period of
storage or inactivity without reforming the DC bus capacitors!
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding
three years (due to storage, etc), the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive
can change internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can result in
premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is operated after such a long period
of inactivity or storage.
In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long
period of inactivity, apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the drive/motor system.
7.2
EXPLOSION PROOF APPLICATIONS
Explosion proof motors that are not rated for inverter use lose their certication when
used for variable speed. Due to the many areas of liability that may be encountered
when dealing with these applications, the following statement of policy applies:
AC Technology Corporation inverter products are sold with no warranty of
tness for a particular purpose or warranty of suitability for use with explosion
proof motors. AC Technology Corporation accepts no responsibility for any
direct, incidental or consequential loss, cost, or damage that may arise through
the use of its AC inverter products in these applications. The purchaser
expressly agrees to assume all risk of any loss, cost, or damage that may
arise from such application."
19
Table of Contents
8.0
INPUT AC REQUIREMENTS
WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Disconnect incoming power and wait three minutes
before servicing the drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
8.1
INPUT AC POWER REQUIREMENTS
8.1.1
VOLTAGE
The input voltage must match the drives nameplate voltage rating. Voltage
uctuation must not vary by greater than 10% over voltage or 15% under voltage.
NOTE: Drives with dual rated input voltage must be programmed for the proper
supply voltage. Refer to Parameter 0 - LINE VOLTS in Section 18.0 - DESCRIPTION
OF PARAMETERS.
The UL le for this drive shows that it is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, at the drives rated
voltage. The CSA le identies a short-circuit withstand rating of 5,000 RMS
symmetrical amperes at the drives rated voltage.
Three phase voltage imbalance must be less than 2.0% phase to phase. Excessive
phase to phase imbalance can cause severe damage to the drives power
components.
Motor voltage should match line voltage in normal applications. The drives maximum
output voltage will equal the input voltage. Use extreme caution when using a motor
with a voltage rating which is different from the input line voltage.
8.1.2
SUPPLY TRANSFORMER kVA RATINGS
If the kVA rating of the AC supply transformer is greater than ten times the input
kVA rating of the drive, a drive isolation transformer, or a 2 - 3% input line reactor
(also known as a choke) must be added.
8.2
INPUT FUSING AND DISCONNECT REQUIREMENTS
A circuit breaker or a disconnect switch with fuses must be provided in accordance

with the National Electric Code (NEC) and all local codes.
The MC1000 drive is capable of withstanding up to 150% current overload for 60
seconds. Select a fuse or magnetic trip circuit breaker rated at 1.5 times the input
current rating of the drive (the minimum size should be 10 amps, regardless of input
current rating). Refer to Section 5.0 - MC1000 RATINGS.Minimum voltage rating
of the protection device should be 250 Vac for 240/120 Vac and 240/200 Vac rated
drives, and 600 Vac for 480/400 Vac and 590/480 Vac drives.
Use UL Class CC or Class T current-limiting type fuses with low I 2 T values, rated
at 200,000 AIC. Recommended fuses are Bussman type KTK-R, JJN, and JJS,
or equivalent.
20
Table of Contents
9.0
VOLTAGE SELECTION
M1100 Series drives are rated for 240/120 Vac, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will
function with input voltage of 120 Vac (+ 10%, -15%) at 48 to 62 Hz when wired
for 120 Vac input, or with input voltage of 240 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz,
when wired for 240 Vac input.
M1200 Series drives are rated for 240/200 Vac, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will function
with input voltages of 200 to 240 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz.
function with input voltages of 400 to 480 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz.
function with input voltages of 480 to 590 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz.
10.0 POWER WIRING

WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Wait three minutes after disconnecting incoming power
before servicing drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
Note drive input and output current ratings and check applicable electrical codes
for required wire type and size, grounding requirements, over current protection,
and incoming power disconnect, before wiring the drive. Size conservatively to
minimize voltage drop.
Input fusing and a power disconnect switch or contactor MUST be wired in series
with terminals L1, L2, and L3 (L1 and L2 if input is single phase). If one has not been
supplied by AC Technology Corporation, a disconnect means must be wired during
installation. This disconnect must be used to power down the drive when servicing,
or when the drive is not to be operated for a long period of time, but should not be
used to start and stop the motor.
Repetitive cycling of a disconnect or input contactor (more than once every
two minutes) may cause damage to the drive.
10.1
WIRING FOR SINGLE PHASE OR THREE PHASE INPUT
If the drive is name plated for 240/120 Vac single phase input, wire the input to
terminals L1 and N and jumper terminals L1 to L2 for 120 Vac input voltage, or wire
to terminals L1 and L2 (do not wire to N) for 240 Vac input voltage. Refer to Section
11.0 - MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM.
If the drive is name plated for three phase input only, wire the input to terminals
L1, L2, and L3.
All three power output wires, from terminals T1, T2, and T3 to the motor, must be
kept tightly bundled and run in a separate conduit away from all other power and
control wiring.
It is not recommended to install contactors or disconnect switches between the
drive and motor. Operating such devices while the drive is running can potentially
cause damage to the drive's power components. If such a device is required, it
should only be operated when the drive is in a STOP state. If there is potential for
the device to be opened while the drive is running, the drive must be programmed
for COAST TO STOP (see Parameter 26 - STOP), and an auxiliary contact on the
device must be interlocked with the drive's run circuit. This will give the drive a stop
command at the same time the device opens, and will not allow the drive to start
again until the device is closed.
21
Table of Contents
11.0 MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM
L1 L2 N
T1
T2
T3
L1 L2
L3
120 Vac SINGLE

PHASE INPUT
WIRING DIAGRAM
GND GND
L1 L2 N
THREE PHASE
AC MOTOR
DISCONNECT
MEANS
(REQUIRED)
GND
240 Vac SINGLE

PHASE INPUT
WIRING DIAGRAM
FUSED INPUT
VOLTAGE
WARNING!
Do not connect incoming AC power to output terminals T1, T2, or T3! Severe
damage to the drive will result.
INSTALL, WIRE, AND GROUND IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE
CODES.
NOTES:
1. Wire the motor for the proper voltage per the output rating of the drive. Motor
wires MUST be run in a separate steel conduit away from control wiring and
incoming AC power wiring.
2. Do not install contactors between the drive and the motor. Failure to do so
may result in drive damage. See Section 10.1.
3. Remove any existing, and do not install, power factor correction capacitors
between the drive and the motor. Failure to do so will result in drive
damage.
4. Use only UL and CSA listed and approved wire.
5. Minimum wire voltage ratings: 300 V for 120, 200 and 240 Vac systems,
and 600 V for 400, 480, and 590 Vac systems.
6. Wire gauge must be based on a minimum of 125% of the rated input/output
current of the drive, and a minimum 75C insulation rating. Use copper wire
only.
7. Wire and ground in accordance with NEC or CEC, and all applicable local
codes.
22
Table of Contents
12.0 INITIAL POWER UP
WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Wait three minutes after disconnecting incoming power
before servicing drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
Before attempting to operate the drive, motor, and driven equipment be sure all
procedures pertaining to installation and wiring have been properly followed.
WARNING!
Severe damage to the drive can result if it is operated after a long period of
storage or inactivity without reforming the DC bus capacitors!
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding
three years (due to storage, etc), the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive
can change internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can result in
premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is operated after such a long period
of inactivity or storage.
In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long
period of inactivity, apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the drive/motor system.
Disconnect the driven load from the motor. Verify that the drive input terminals (L1,
L2, and L3) are wired to the proper input voltage per the nameplate rating of the
drive.
WARNING!
DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals T1, T2, and T3! Do
not cycle input power to the drive more than once every two minutes. Damage
to the drive will result.
Energize the incoming power line. The LCD display should light and ash TESTING
and then show the voltage and horsepower rating of the drive. The display should
then show STOP > 20.00 HZ which indicates that the drive is in a STOP condition,
and the speed set point is 20.00 Hz:
STOP
>
20.00 HZ
If the display does not appear, remove the incoming power, wait three minutes for
the bus capacitors to discharge, and verify correct installation and wiring. If the
wiring is correct, re-apply incoming power and note the display for drive status. If
the display still does not appear contact the factory for assistance.
NOTE 1: If the drive's display is blank after power up, and it is a model equipped with
heatsink fans, check to make sure the fans are operating (they should be spinning
anytime power is applied to the drive). If they are not spinning, the drive's display
will be blank and the drive cannot be operated. If the fans are clogged or jammed,
disconnect power from the drive and remove any obstructions from the fans. Reapply power to the drive and check the fans. If they are spinning, the drive's display
should appear and the drive should operate properly. If there are no obstructions,
the fan itself may be defective. Please contact the factory for assistance.
23
Table of Contents
If the drive powers up correctly, follow the procedure given below to check the
motor rotation:
1. Use the key to decrease the speed set point to the minimum value allowed
(.50 Hz if Parameter 10 - MIN FRQ has not been changed).
2. Press the START key. The drive should indicate RUN, but if the speed set
point is .50 Hz, the motor may not rotate. Press the key to increase the
speed set point until the motor starts to rotate.
3. If the motor is rotating in the wrong direction, press the STOP key and
remove power from the drive. Wait three minutes for the bus capacitors to
discharge, and swap any two of the motor wires connected to T1, T2, and
T3.
NOTE 2: The drive is phase insensitive with respect to incoming line voltage.
Therefore, to change the motor rotation, the phases must be swapped at the drive
output terminals or at the motor.
13.0 KEYPAD CONTROL

The drive can be operated in a number of different ways: keypad (LOCAL), control
devices wired to the terminal strip (REMOTE), serial communications (SERIAL), or a
combination of each. The drive should rst be operated from the keypad during initial
start-up. Refer to Sections 14.0 - CONTROL WIRING, and 18.0 - DESCRIPTION
OF PARAMETERS for information on remote operation.
13.1
KEYPAD FUNCTIONS (IN LOCAL MODE)
START/STOP
To start the drive, press the START key. To stop the drive,
press the STOP key.
NOTE: The STOP key is active in both LOCAL and
REMOTE modes.
SPEED SET POINT
To increase the speed set point, press the key. To

decrease the speed set point, press the key.
NOTE: The and keys will only function if another speed
reference source is not selected.
FORWARD/REVERSE To change rotation direction, press the FWD/REV key to

select the desired direction, and then press the ENTER key
within three seconds to conrm the change.
NOTE: Parameter 27 - ROTATION must be set to FWD &
REV for this key to be active.
AUTO/MANUAL
To toggle between AUTOMATIC (terminal strip) and

MANUAL (keypad) speed control, press the AUTO/MAN
key to select the desired mode, and then press the ENTER
key within three seconds to conrm the change.
NOTE: Parameter 28 - AUTO/MAN must be set to BOTH
for this key to be active. See Section 14.0 - CONTROL
WIRING for information on automatic speed references.
FAULT RESET
Use the STOP key to reset a fault. If the fault condition

has passed, pressing the STOP key will reset the fault and
return the drive to a STOP condition.
NOTE: If an OUTPUT fault occurs, there will be a 30
second delay before the fault can be cleared using the
STOP key.
24
Table of Contents
13.2
MC1000 DISPLAY
The following describes the possible display congurations for the MC1000 Series
drive.
13.2.1 MC1000 DISPLAY IN STOP MODE

When the drive is in the STOP mode, there are three possible displays. The rst is
the SPEED display, which looks like this:
DRIVE
STATUS
SPEED
SET POINT
STOP
> 60.00 HZ
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
SPEED
UNITS
NOTE: See Parameter 31 - UNITS for the SPEED UNITS display options.
Pressing the ENTER key will change the display from the SPEED indication to the
% LOAD indication:
DRIVE
STATUS
PERCENT
LOAD
STOP
> 0% LOAD
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
Pressing the ENTER key again will change the display from the % LOAD indication
to the VAC (motor voltage) indication:
DRIVE
STATUS
MOTOR
VOLTAGE
STOP
>
0 VAC
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
Pressing ENTER again will change the display back to the SPEED indication.
25
Table of Contents
The following table shows the possible DRIVE STATUS indications that can appear
on the drive display:
DRIVE STATUS TABLE

DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
STOP
Drive to STOP mode - No output to motor.
RUN
Drive is in RUN mode and is within + 0.3 Hz of the speed set point.
FAULT
Drive has shut down due to a FAULT condition. If the fault condition has
passed, pressing the STOP key will clear the fault and return the
drive to the STOP mode.
LOCK
Drive is in FAULT LOCKOUT after ve unsuccessful restart attempts.
BRAKE
DC BRAKE is energized.
LIMIT
Drive is in CURRENT LIMIT due to an overloaded motor,

or ACCEL is set too fast.
F DEC
Drive is in DECEL FREEZE because DECEL is set too fast.
13.2.2 MC1000 DISPLAY IN RUN MODE

When the drive is in the RUN mode, the default display will look like this:
DRIVE
STATUS
RUN
SPEED
SET POINT
>
60.00 HZ
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
SPEED
UNITS
As in the STOP mode, the ENTER key can be used to toggle the display from
SPEED to % LOAD to VAC (motor voltage):
DRIVE
STATUS
RUN
PERCENT
LOAD
> 85% LOAD
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
26
Table of Contents
DRIVE
STATUS
MOTOR
VOLTAGE
RUN
>
460 VAC
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
NOTE: During acceleration and deceleration to the SPEED SET POINT, the DRIVE
STATUS will show the actual drive speed. When the SPEED SET POINT is reached,
the DRIVE STATUS will change to RUN (or STOP if the drive is decelerating to a
STOP).
13.2.3 MC1000 DISPLAY IN FAULT MODE

When the drive trips into a fault, the display will automatically change to the FAULT
display, which indicates the FAULT MESSAGE:
DRIVE
STATUS
FAULT
MESSAGE
FAULT: OVERLOAD
In FAULT mode, the ENTER key will toggle the display between four screens:
FAULT, SPEED, % LOAD and VAC. The DRIVE STATUS for these displays will
be FAULT. An example is shown below of the drive in the FAULT mode displaying
SPEED.
DRIVE
STATUS
SPEED
SET POINT
FAULT > 60.00 HZ

DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
SPEED
UNITS
NOTE: To clear a FAULT, press the STOP key, issue a remote STOP command
at TB-1, or use TB-13D (refer to Parameter 50 - TB13D).
27
Table of Contents
13.2.4 MC1000 DISPLAY IN AUXILIARY MODE
If the ENTER key is held down, the display will enter the auxiliary mode, which
indicates the control source (LOCAL, REMOTE, or SERIAL), AUTO or MANUAL
mode, and the speed reference source. When the ENTER key is released, the
display will return to the previous screen. An example of the auxiliary mode display
is shown below:
CONTROL
SOURCE
AUTO/MAN
MODE
SPEED
REFERENCE
SOURCE
LOCAL -- AUTO -- IDC

The table below shows the possible SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indications
for the auxiliary mode display:
SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE TABLE

DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
KEY
KEYPAD - Change speed using the and keys.
VDC
0 - 10 VDC analog input at TB-5A.
IDC
4 - 20 mA analog input at TB-5B.
SP#1
PRESET SPEED #1
SP#2
PRESET SPEED #2
SP#3
PRESET SPEED #3
SP#4
PRESET SPEED #4
JOG
JOG SPEED - In JOG mode, JOG SPEED = PRESET SPEED #2.
MOP
MOTOR OPERATED POT - Change speed using contact closures at

TB-13A (DEC FREQ) and TB-13B (INC FREQ).
28
Table of Contents
14.0 CONTROL WIRING
14.1
GENERAL
14.1.1 KEYPAD CONTROL

The drive can be controlled by the keypad or by control devices wired to the terminal
strip. The drive will run from the keypad out of the box, requiring no connections
to the terminal strip. Refer to Section 13.0 - KEYPAD CONTROL.
14.1.2 CONTROL WIRING VS. POWER WIRING

External control wiring MUST be run in a separate conduit away from all other
input and output power wiring. If control wiring is not kept separate from power
wiring, electrical noise may be generated on the control wiring that will cause erratic
drive behavior. Use twisted wires or shielded cable grounded at the drive chassis
ONLY. Recommended control wire is Belden 8760 (2-wire) or 8770 (3-wire), or
equivalent.
Torque the control terminals to 2 lb-in (0.2 Nm). Be careful not to overtorque the
control terminals, as this will cause damage to the terminal strip. This is not covered
under warranty and can only be repaired by replacing the control board.
14.1.3 TB-2: CIRCUIT COMMON

The TB-2 terminals are used as circuit common for the start/stop, forward/reverse,
input select, local/remote, analog input, and analog output functions. There are three
TB-2 terminals available on the terminal strip, and they are all internally connected
to each other on the main control board. If necessary TB-2 may be connected to
chassis ground.
NOTE: TB-2 MUST be connected to chassis ground when using serial
communications.
14.1.4 SURGE SUPPRESSION ON RELAYS

Current and voltage surges and spikes in the coils of contactors, relays, solenoids,
etc, near or connected to the drive, can cause erratic drive operation. Therefore,
a snubber circuit should be used on coils associated with the drive. For AC coils,
snubbers should consist of a resistor and a capacitor in series across the coil.
For DC coils, a free-wheeling or y back diode should be placed across the coil.
Snubbers are typically available from the manufacturer of the device.14.2
START/STOP AND SPEED CONTROL
14.2.1 REMOTE MODE SELECTION

The REMOTE mode can be selected by one of two methods:
1. Program Parameter 30 - CONTROL to REMOTE, or:
2. Program CONTROL to BOTH, set the TB-13A or TB-13C function (see
Parameter 47 or 49) to LOCAL SELECT, and DO NOT make a contact closure
between TB-13A or TB-13C and TB-2 (making the contact closure will select
LOCAL mode).
WARNING!
If CONTROL is set to LOCAL, TB-1 is disabled and CANNOT be used as a STOP

switch! Incorrect use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment and/or injury
to personnel! See Parameter 30 - CONTROL.
29
Table of Contents
WARNING!
STOP (TB-1) and EXTERNAL FAULT (TB-13D) circuitry may be disabled if

parameters are reset to factory defaults! The drive must be reprogrammed after a
RESET in order to insure proper operation (see Parameter 65 - PROGRAM).
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
INJURY TO PERSONNEL!
14.2.2 TWO-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL

A two-wire start/stop circuit can be accomplished by one of three methods on the
MC Series drive. Follow the appropriate procedure listed below:
FORWARD ROTATION ONLY
1. Select REMOTE mode (see above).
2. Connect a jumper between TB-12A and TB-2 to provide a permanent START
command to the drive.
3. Wire a normally open maintained contact between TB-1 and TB-2. Closing
this contact will RUN the drive and opening this contact will STOP the
drive.
FORWARD and REVERSE ROTATION
2. Program Parameter 27 - RO TATION to FWD & REV to allow rotation in
both directions.
3. Program Parameter 49 - TB13C to START REVERSE. This will force TB12A to act as START FORWARD.
4. Select the desired rotation by closing the appropriate terminal (TB-12A for
forward, or TB-13C for reverse) to TB-2. This can be done with a toggle
switch or equivalent circuit.
5. Wire a normally open maintained contact between TB-1 and TB-2. Close
this contact to RUN the drive, and open this contact to STOP the drive.
14.2.3 ALTERNATE TWO-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL METHOD
WARNING!
This method requires TB-13C to be set for RUN REVERSE, which will disable
TB-1 as a STOP switch! Incorrect use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment
and/or injury to personnel! Refer to Parameter 49 - TB13C.
2. Program Parameter 27 - ROTATION to FWD & REV.
3. Program Parameter 49 - TB13C to RUN REVERSE. This will force TB-12A
to act as RUN FORWARD.
4. Wire a normally open maintained contact between TB-12A and TB-2. Close
this contact to RUN the drive in FORWARD, and open this contact to STOP
the drive.
30
Table of Contents
FORWARD and REVERSE ROTATION with TWO RUN CONTACTS
1. Follow 1-4 above and also wire a normally open maintained contact between
TB-13C and TB-2. Close this contact to RUN the drive in REVERSE, and
open this contact to STOP the drive.
FORWARD and REVERSE ROTATION with ONE RUN CONTACT
1. Follow 1-3 above and wire a normally open maintained contact between
TB-2 and the common of a single-pole, double-throw toggle switch. Wire
the poles of the toggle switch to TB-12A and TB-13C. Select the desired
rotation with the toggle switch. Close the maintained contact to RUN, and
open to STOP.
14.2.4 THREE-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL

A three-wire start/stop circuit can be accomplished by one of two methods on the
MC Series drive. Follow the appropriate procedure listed below:
2. Wire a normally closed momentary STOP contact between TB-1 and TB-2.
Momentarily open this contact to STOP the drive.
3. Wire a normally open momentary START contact between TB-12A and
TB-2. Momentarily close this contact to START the drive.
FORWARD and REVERSE ROTATION with TWO START CONTACTS
2. Program Parameter 27 - ROTATION to FWD & REV.
3. Program Parameter 49 - TB13C to START REVERSE.
4. Wire a normally closed momentary STOP contact between TB-1 and TB-2.
Momentarily open this contact to STOP the drive.
5. Wire a normally open momentary START FORWARD contact between
TB-12A and TB-2. Momentarily close this contact to START the drive in
FORWARD.
6. Wire a normally open momentary START REVERSE contact between
TB-13C and TB-2. Momentarily close this contact to START the drive in
REVERSE.
NOTE: If the drive is operating in one direction, and is given the START
command for the opposite direction, the drive will decelerate to 0 Hz and
then accelerate back to the speed set point in the opposite direction.
FORWARD and REVERSE ROTATION with ONE START CONTACT
1. Follow 1-4 above and wire a normally open momentary contact between
TB-2 and the common of a single-pole, double-throw toggle switch. Wire the
poles of the toggle switch to TB-12A and TB-13C. See the wiring diagram
in Section 15.3.
31
Table of Contents
14.2.5 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
The drive allows for three analog speed reference inputs: a speed potentiometer
(10,000 Ohm), 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA.
SPEED POT
Connect the wiper to terminal TB-5A, and connect the

high and low end leads to terminals TB-6 and TB-2,
respectively.
0-10 VDC
Wire the positive to terminal TB-5A and the negative to

terminal TB-2. TB-5A input impedance is 200 kilohms.
4-20 mA
Wire the positive to terminal TB-5B and the negative to

terminal TB-2. TB-5B input impedance is 100 ohms.
14.2.6 SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION

AUTO/MAN vs. LOCAL/REMOTE
In the MC Series drive, AUTO/MAN refers to speed control, and LOCAL/REMOTE
refers to START/STOP control. AUTOMATIC or MANUAL speed control selection
is affected by whether the drive is in LOCAL or REMOTE mode.
In LOCAL mode (keypad start/stop control), AUTOMATIC and MANUAL speed
control is selected using Parameter 28 - AUTO/MAN. When AUTO/MAN is set
to BOTH, the AUTO/MAN button on the keypad is active and is used to toggle
between MANUAL (keypad or speed pot) and AUTOMATIC (0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
or preset speeds) speed control. When set to MANUAL, speed control is governed
by Parameter 29 - MANUAL, which selects either KEYPAD or 0-10 VDC (speed
pot). When set to AUTOMATIC, one of the TB-13 input selects must be set to the
desired speed reference, and that terminal must be closed to TB-2. The drive will
then respond to the automatic speed reference. If one of the TB-13 input selects
is set for a speed reference, and the contact closure is not made to TB-2, speed
control will remain in AUTO mode, but the drive will respond to the keypad or speed
pot, depending on Parameter 29 - MANUAL. Therefore, if the Form C relay or opencollector outputs are set to indicate AUTO/MAN mode, they will still indicate AUTO
mode.In REMOTE mode (terminal strip start/stop control), speed control is only
selected using the TB-13 input selects. For AUTOMATIC speed control, one of the
TB-13 input selects must be set to the desired speed reference, and that terminal
must be closed to TB-2. The drive will then respond to the automatic speed reference.
If none of the TB-13 input selects are closed to TB-2, speed control will default to
MANUAL mode, and the drive will respond to the keypad or speed pot, depending
on Parameter 29 - MANUAL. This will cause the Form C relay or open-collector
outputs to indicate MANUAL mode if set to indicate AUTO/MAN mode.
0 - 10 VDC and 4 - 20 mA INPUT SIGNALS
TB-13A, TB-13B, and TB-13C can all be programmed to select 0-10 VDC or 4-20
mA input.
PRESET SPEEDS
TB-13A can be programmed to select SPEED #1, TB-13B to select SPEED #2,
and TB-13C to select SPEED #3. Closing any two of these terminals to TB-2
will select SPEED #4. Refer to Parameters 1-4: SPEED #1 - #4 in Section 18.0
- DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
32
Table of Contents
JOG
The JOG function only works when the drive is in REMOTE mode, and only when
the drive is in a STOP condition. TB-13B can be programmed to select either JOG
FORWARD or JOG REVERSE. The jog speed is set by PRESET SPEED #2. Close
TB-13B to TB-2 to JOG, and open the contact to STOP.
WARNING!
When operating in JOG mode, the STOP key WILL NOT stop the drive. To stop
the drive, the contact between TB-13B and TB-2 must be opened.
MOP - MOTOR OPERATED POT
TB-13A and TB-13B are used for this function, which sets the speed of the drive
using contacts wired to the terminal strip. Program TB-13A to select DEC FREQ,
and program TB-13B to select INC FREQ. Closing TB-13A to TB-2 will activate
the DEC FREQ function, and will cause the speed set point to decrease until the
contact is opened. DEC FREQ will operate when the drive is in RUN mode or STOP
mode. Closing TB-13B to TB-2 will activate the INC FREQ function, and will cause
the speed set point to increase until the contact is opened. INC FREQ will only
operate when the drive is in RUN mode.
NOTE: If TB-13A, TB-13B, and TB-13C are all programmed to select speed
references, and two or three of the terminals are closed to TB-2, the higher terminal
has priority and will override the others. For example, if TB-13A is programmed
to select 0-10VDC, and TB-13C is programmed to select PRESET SPEED #3,
closing both terminals to TB-2 will cause the drive to respond to PRESET SPEED
#3, because TB-13C overrides TB-13A.
14.2.7 ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNALS

There are two terminals that can supply analog output signals proportional to
output frequency or load. Terminal TB-10A can provide a 0-10 VDC or a 2-10 VDC
signal proportional to output frequency, and TB-10B can provide the same signals
proportional to load. The 2-10 VDC signals can be converted to a 4-20 mA signal
using a resistor in series with the signal such that the total load resistance is 500
Ohms. See Parameters: 42 - TB10A OUT, 43 - @TB10A, 44 - TB10B OUT, and
45 - @TB10B in Section 18.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
NOTE: These analog output signals cannot be used with loop-powered devices
that derive power from a 4-20 mA signal.
14.2.8 DRIVE STATUS OUTPUT CONTACTS

The control board has one Form C relay at terminals TB-16, TB-17, and TB-18.
Contacts are rated 2 amps at 28 VDC or 120 Vac.
NOTE: Models rated above 30 Hp at 200/240 Vac and 60 Hp at 400/480 Vac have
a second Form C relay at terminals TB-19, TB-20, and TB-21.
There are also two open-collector outputs at terminals TB-14 and TB-15. The opencollector circuit is a current-sinking type rated at 30 VDC and 40 mA maximum. An
external power supply (30 VDC max) must be used to power the open-collector outputs.
The drive does not have a dedicated power supply for the open-collector outputs.
The Form C relay and the open collector outputs can be programmed to indicate
any of the following: RUN, FAULT, /FAULT (INVERSE FAULT), LOCK (FAULT
LOCKOUT), AT SPEED, ABOVE #3, I LIMIT (CURRENT LIMIT), or AUTO/MAN.
See Parameters: 52 - TB14 OUT, 53 - TB15 OUT, and 54 - RELAY. Refer to Section
6.2.5 for a complete description of each of these status indications.
33
Table of Contents
15.0 MC1000 CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAMS
15.1
MC1000 TERMINAL STRIP
Shown below is the terminal strip on the main control board, along with a brief
description of the function of each terminal. Wiring shown above the terminal strip
indicates internal wiring on the main control board.
FORM C
RELAY
The TB-2 terminals are internally tied together
1 2 5A 5B 6 10A 10B 2 12A 13A 13B 13C 13D 14 15 2 RXA TXB
16 17 18
RS-485 SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
OPEN-COLLECTOR OUTPUT
CIRCUIT COMMON
OPEN-COLLECTOR OUTPUT
TB-13D FUNCTION SELECT
TB-13C FUNCTION SELECT
TB-13B FUNCTION SELECT
TB-13A FUNCTION SELECT
START
CIRCUIT COMMON
0-10 OR 2-10 VDC OUTPUT: LOAD
0-10 OR 2-10 VDC OUTPUT: FREQUENCY
4-20 mA SPEED REFERENCE INPUT
10 VDC SUPPLY FOR SPEED POT
CIRCUIT COMMON
0-10 VDC SPEED REFERENCE INPUT
STOP
NOTE: The function of terminals TB-10A, TB-10B, TB-13A, TB-13B, TB-13C,

TB-13D, TB-14, TB-15, TB-16, and TB-18 are dependent on the programming of
certain parameters. In most cases, the name of the parameter matches the number
of the terminal, allowing quick and easy programming of the terminals to suit the
application. The exception is TB-16 and TB-18, which are governed by Parameter
54 - RELAY.
A complete description of operating the drive in the REMOTE mode can be found
in Section 14.2. The following diagrams provide a quick reference to wire the drive
for the most common congurations.
34
Table of Contents
15.2
TWO-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL
Shown below is the wiring diagram for a typical two-wire start/stop control scheme,
using one maintained contact (such as that from a PLC) for RUN and STOP
commands. Close the contact to RUN, and open the contact to STOP. Also shown
is the wiring for a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA speed reference signal.
START REVERSE
CIRCUIT COMMON
START FORWARD
4-20 mA INPUT
0-10 VDC INPUT
STOP
CIRCUIT COMMON
FWD
16 17 18
0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA

SELECT (see Note 3)
REV
(see Note 2)
MAINTAINED
RUN/STOP
CONTACT
NOTES:
1. Close TB-1 to TB-2 to RUN, and open to STOP.
2. If REVERSE direction is required, ROTATION must be set to FWD&REV,
and TB-13C must be set to START REVERSE (refer to Parameters: 27
- ROTATION, and 49 - TB-13C).
If REVERSE is not required, jumper TB-2 to TB-12A and eliminate the
FWD/REV switch.
3. Program TB-13A, 13B, or 13C to select the appropriate speed reference
signal that will control the drive speed (refer to Parameters 47, 48, and
49). When that TB-13 terminal is closed to TB-2, the drive will respond
to the selected speed reference signal. In the diagram above, TB-13A is
programmed to select either a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal.
4. If the contact closure is not made between TB-13A and TB-2 to select a
speed reference, the drive will default to MANUAL speed control, which is
determined by Parameter 29 - MANUAL.
35
Table of Contents
15.3
THREE-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL
Shown below is the wiring diagram for a typical three-wire start/stop control scheme,
using momentary contacts (such as push buttons) for START and STOP commands.
Also shown is the wiring for a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA speed reference signal.
MOMENTARY
STOP CONTACT
START REVERSE
START FORWARD
CIRCUIT COMMON
4-20 mA INPUT
0-10 VDC INPUT
STOP
CIRCUIT COMMON
FWD
16 17 18
0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA

SELECT (see Note 3)
REV
(see Note 2)
MOMENTARY
START CONTACT
NOTES:
1. Momentarily close TB-12A to TB-2 to START, and momentarily open TB-1
to TB-2 to STOP.
2. If REVERSE direction is required, ROTATION must be set to FWD&REV,
and TB-13C must be set to START REVERSE (refer to Parameters: 27
- ROTATION, and 49 - TB13C).
If REVERSE is not required, wire the Start button directly to TB-12A
and eliminate the FWD/REV switch.
3. Program TB-13A, 13B, or 13C to select the appropriate speed reference
signal that will control the drive speed (refer to Parameters 47, 48, and
49). When that TB-13 terminal is closed to TB-2, the drive will respond
to the selected speed reference signal. In the diagram above, TB-13A is
programmed to select either a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal.
4. If the contact closure is not made between TB-13A and TB-2 to select a
speed reference, the drive will default to MANUAL speed control, which is
determined by Parameter 29 - MANUAL.
36
Table of Contents
15.4
SPEED POT AND PRESET SPEED CONTROL
Shown below is the wiring diagram for a control scheme that utilizes a speed
pot and PRESET SPEEDS for speed control, and either a two-wire or three-wire
START/STOP circuit:
16 17 18
CIRCUIT COMMON
PRESET SPEED
PRESET SPEED
PRESET SPEED
CIRCUIT COMMON
START
10 VDC SUPPLY
0-10 VDC INPUT
STOP
CIRCUIT COMMON
SPEED POT
(10 K)
NOTES:
1. Program the PRESET SPEEDS (Parameters 1-4) to the desired values.
2. Program TB-13A to select SPEED #1, TB-13B to select SPEED #2, and
TB-13C to select SPEED #3 (refer to Parameters 47, 48, and 49).
3. To select a preset speed, close the appropriate terminal to TB-2. To select
SPEED #4, close any two of the preset speed terminals to TB-2.
4. Speed pot control can be selected by one of two methods. If none of
the preset speeds are selected (all TB-13 terminals are open), the drive
will default to speed pot control if Parameter 29 - MANUAL is set to 0-10
VDC. The speed pot can also be selected if one of the TB-13 terminals is
programmed to select 0-10 VDC and that terminal is closed to TB-2.
5. If REVERSE rotation is required, TB-13C cannot be used to select SPEED
#3. TB-13C must be programmed to select RUN REVERSE or START
REVERSE, leaving only TB-13A and TB-13B to select preset speeds.
37
Table of Contents
16.0 PROGRAMMING THE MC1000 DRIVE
16.1
PROGRAMMING THE PARAMETERS
The MC1000 keypad serves two purposes: operating the drive when in the LOCAL
mode, and programming the parameters for particular applications. The keypad
is shown below, along with the display that should appear when the drive is rst
powered up:
STOP
PROG
RUN
ENTER
> 20.00 HZ
AUTO
MAN
START
FWD
STOP
REV
To program the drive, the PROGRAM mode must be entered by pressing the PROG/
RUN button. If the password protection is disabled, pressing the PROG/RUN button
will result in direct entry into the PROGRAM mode. If the password protection is
enabled, the PASSWORD prompt will appear when an attempt is made to enter the
PROGRAM mode. The PASSWORD prompt appears as follows:
PASSWORD
0000
CURSOR
To enter the password, use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll to the password
value, and then press the ENTER key.
Note:
The factory default password is 0019.
38
Table of Contents
Once the correct password is entered, the PROGRAM mode will be entered and
the rst parameter will be displayed, which is Parameter 0 - LINE VOLTS. This is
shown below:
PARAMETER
NAME
PARAMETER
VALUE
LINE VOLTS
AUTO
CURSOR
To scroll through the parameters, use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons on the
keypad. When the desired parameter is found, press the ENTER key to shift the
cursor from the parameter name to the parameter value. In this example, the cursor
shifts from LINE VOLTS to AUTO:
PARAMETER
NAME
PARAMETER
VALUE
LINE VOLTS
AUTO
CURSOR
The parameter value can then be changed using the UP and DOWN arrow buttons.
If the parameter has a numerical value, the UP arrow will increase the value and
the DOWN arrow will decrease the value. If the parameter has specic choices
that can be selected, the UP and DOWN arrow keys will scroll through the list of
possible settings. When the desired value or option is selected, press the ENTER
key to store the new setting. If the new setting is not ENTERED, it will not take
effect and the old setting will still be valid.
If the PROG/RUN key is pushed while the cursor is highlighting the parameter value,
the value will change back to the original setting (if it had been changed, but not
ENTERED), and the cursor will shift back to the parameter name. Pressing PROG/
RUN again will exit the PROGRAM mode. If the PROGRAM mode is entered again
within two minutes, the last parameter that was viewed, or changed, will come up on
the display. After two minutes has elapsed, the password will have to be entered
again when attempting to access the PROGRAM mode.
39
Table of Contents
16.2
PARAMETER ACCESS USING SPEED DIAL
SPEED DIAL is used to access parameters quickly using the parameter number.
Once accessed, the parameter can be programmed as described in Section 16.1.
SPEED DIAL is accessed by pressing the AUTO/MAN key while in the PROGRAM
mode. This will activate the SPEED DIAL display as shown below:
- SPEED DIAL Once in SPEED DIAL, the UP and DOWN arrow keys will allow the operator to scroll
through the parameter numbers. The display will continue to show SPEED DIAL
while scrolling through the parameter numbers, as shown below:
#11
SPEED DIAL
When the desired parameter is reached, the SPEED DIAL display will be replaced
by the parameter name:
#11
MAX FRQ
Once the desired parameter is displayed on the screen, press the ENTER key to
display the parameter name and present setting. The parameter setting can now
be changed by the method described in Section 16.1. Press the AUTO/MAN key
to return to SPEED DIAL.
40
Table of Contents
17.0 PARAMETER MENU
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM.
PARAMETER
NAME
ADJUSTMENT
DEFAULT
LINE VOLTS
HIGH, LOW, AUTO
AUTO
SPEED #1
MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ
20.00 Hz
SPEED #2
MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ
20.00 Hz
SPEED #3
MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ
20.00 Hz
SPEED #4
MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ
20.00 Hz
SKIP #1
0.00 Hz - MAX FRQ
0.00 Hz
NUMBER
RANGE OF
FACTORY
SKIP #2
0.00 Hz - MAX FRQ
0.00 Hz
BAND WID
0.00 - 10.00 Hz
1.00 Hz
ACCEL
(NOTE 1)
30.0 SEC
DECEL
(NOTE 1)
30.0 SEC
10
MIN FRQ
0.00 - MAX FRQ
0.50 Hz
11
MAX FRQ
MIN FREQ - 120.0 Hz (NOTE 2)
60.00 Hz
12
DC BRAKE
(NOTE 1)
0.0 VDC
13
DC TIME
0.0 - 999.9 SEC
0.0 SEC
14
DYN BRAKE
OFF, ON
OFF
16
CURRENT
25 - 180 % (NOTE 3)
180 %
17
MOTOR OL
25 - 100 %
100 %
18
BASE
20.00 - 360.0 Hz (NOTE 2)
60.00 Hz
19
FX BOOST
0.0 - 30.0 %
(NOTE 1)
20
AC BOOST
0.0 - 20.0 %
0.00 %
21
SLIP CMP
0.0 - 5.0 %
0.00 %
22
TORQUE
CONSTANT, VARIABLE,
CT / NOCMP
CONSTANT
23
CARRIER
2.5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 kHz
2.5 kHz
25
START
NORMAL, POWER UP,

AUTO RE-, RE-BRAKE
NORMAL
26
STOP
COAST, RAMP, RAMP 2
COAST
27
ROTATION
FORWARD, REVERSE,
FWD&REV, FWD@LOC
FORWARD
NOTE 1: REFER TO SECTION 18.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

NOTE 2: MAX LIMIT IS 650 Hz ON UNITS WITH HIGH FREQUENCY SOFTWARE
NOTE 3: IF LINE VOLTS IS SET TO "LOW" (OR SET TO "AUTO" AND THE INPUT
VOLTAGE IS LOW), THE RANGE IS 25 - 150%.
41
Table of Contents
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM.
PARAMETER
NAME
ADJUSTMENT
28
AUTO/MAN
AUTO, MANUAL, BOTH
BOTH
29
MANUAL
KEYPAD, 0-10 VDC
KEYPAD
30
CONTROL
LOCAL, REMOTE, BOTH
LOCAL
NUMBER
RANGE OF
FACTORY
DEFAULT
sp: HERTZ, RPM, % HZ,

/SEC, /MIN, /HR, GPH, NONE
31
UNITS
32
HZ MULT
0.10 - 650.0
1.00
33
SPEED DP
XXXXX, XXX.X, XX.XX,

X.XXX, .XXXX
XXXXX
pid: %, PSI, FPM, CFM, GPM,

IN, FT, /SEC, /MIN, /HR, F, C,
MPM, GPH
sp: HERTZ
34
LOAD MLT
95 - 139 %
100 %
35
CONTRAST
LOW, MED, HIGH
MED
36
SLEEP TH
0.00 - 360.0 Hz
0.00 Hz
37
SLEEP DL
0.0 - 300.0 SEC
30.0 SEC
38
SLEEP BW
FB @ MIN - FB @ MAX
0%
39
TB5 MIN
0.00 - 360.0 Hz (NOTE 2)
0.00 Hz
40
TB5 MAX
0.00 - 360.0 Hz (NOTE 2)
60.00 Hz
41
AIN FLTR
0.01 - 10.0 SEC
0.02 SEC
42
TB10A OUT
NONE, 0-10V, 2-10V
NONE
43
@TB10A
0.00 - 360.0 Hz
60.00 Hz
44
TB10B OUT
NONE, 0-10V, 2-10V
NONE
45
@TB10B
10 - 200 %
125 %
47
TB13A
NONE, 0-10VDC, 4-20MA,

SPEED#1, LOC SEL,
DEC FREQ
NONE
48
TB13B

SPEED#2, INC FREQ,
JOG FWD, JOG REV
NONE
49
TB13C

SPEED#3, LOC SEL,
RUN REV, STRT REV
NONE
50
TB13D
EXT FAULT EXT/FAULT,

EXT CLEAR
EXT FAULT
NOTE 2: MAX LIMIT IS 650 Hz ON UNITS WITH HIGH FREQUENCY SOFTWARE.
42
Table of Contents
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
RANGE OF
FACTORY
NAME
ADJUSTMENT
DEFAULT
52
53
54
TB14 OUT
TB15 OUT
RELAY
NONE, RUN, FAULT, /FAULT,

LOCK, @ SPEED, ABOVE #3,
I LIMIT, AUT/MAN, FLWR PR,
MIN/MAX ALARM,
INV MIN/MAX A,
MIN ALARM, INV MIN ALARM,
MAX ALARM, INV MAX ALARM,
REVERSE, SLEEP, SPD = 0HZ
NONE
55
TB5B LOSS
FAULT, SP#4, NONE
FAULT
57
SERIAL
DISABLED, W/TIMER, W/O TIMR
DISABLE
58
ADDRESS
1 - 247
30
61
PASSWORD
0000 - 9999
0019
63
SOFTWARE
(VIEW - ONLY)
(N/A)
64
MONITOR
OFF, ON
ON
65
PROGRAM
MAINTAIN, RESET 60,

RESET 50 (NOTE 4)
RESET 60
66
HISTORY
MAINTAIN, CLEAR
MAINTAIN
70
PID MODE
OFF, NORMAL, REVERSE
OFF
74
PID FB
TB-5A, TB-5B
TB-5A
75
FB @ MIN
-32768 to 32767
0.0 %
76
FB @ MAX
-32768 to 32767
100.00 %
77
P GAIN
0.0 - 999.9 %
5.0 %
78
I GAIN
0.0 - 10.0 SEC
0.0 SEC
79
D GAIN
0.0 - 10.0 SEC
0.0 SEC
80
PID ACC
0.0 - 100.0 SEC
30.0 SEC
81
MIN ALRM
FB @ MIN - FB @ MAX
0.0 %
82
MAX ALRM
FB @ MIN - FB @ MAX
98
LANGUAGE
99
FAULT HISTORY
0.0 %
ENGLISH
(VIEW - ONLY)
(N/A)
NOTE 4: "RST HIGH" WILL APPEAR ON UNITS SET UP FOR HIGH FREQUENCY.
NOTE!
If you are working with Software M108313 or ealier (see Parameter 63),
parameters 69 and 70 are shown here as parameters 98 and 99.
43
Table of Contents
18.0 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
LINE VOLTS
(LINE VOLTAGE)
This parameter calibrates the drive for the correct input voltage, and can be set to
AUTO, HIGH, or LOW.
When set to AUTO, the drive measures the DC bus voltage when power is applied
and automatically calibrates itself according to the measured value (DC bus voltage
is equal to input voltage multiplied by 1.4).
This parameter can also be set manually, using the HIGH or LOW settings. For
actual line voltages of 230/240 Vac (on 240/200 Vac models), 460/480 Vac (on
480/400 Vac models), or 575/590 Vac (on 590/480 Vac models), set this parameter
to HIGH. Also use the HIGH setting for 240/120 Vac single-phase input models.
Refer to the table below.
For actual line voltages of 200/208 Vac (on 240/200 Vac models), 380/415 Vac (on
480/400 Vac models), or 460/480 Vac (on 590 Vac models), set this parameter to
LOW. Refer to the table below.
INPUT LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION

MODEL
M1100S
M1200(S)
M1400
M1500
1-4
RATED INPUT
VOLTAGE
INPUT
PHASE
ACTUAL INPUT
VOLTAGE
PARAM.
SETTING
240 / 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac
240 / 120 Vac
110 - 120 Vac
240 Vac
220 - 240 Vac
240 / 200 Vac
220 - 240 Vac
240 / 200 Vac
200 - 208 Vac
LOW
480 / 400 Vac
460 - 480 Vac
HIGH
480 / 400 Vac
380 - 415 Vac
LOW
590 / 480 Vac
575 - 600 Vac
HIGH
590 / 480 Vac
460 - 480 Vac
LOW
SPEED #1- #4
HIGH
HIGH
(PRESET SPEEDS #1, #2, #3, AND #4)
PRESET SPEEDS are only active when the drive is in AUTO mode, and are activated
via contact closures between terminal TB-2 and terminals TB-13A, TB-13B, and
TB-13C. These terminals must be programmed as preset speed selects using
Parameters 47 - 49: TB13A, TB13B, and TB13C.
The preset speeds can only be set to values that are within the operating range
dened by the minimum and maximum frequency (see Parameters: 10 - MIN FREQ,
and 11 - MAX FREQ).
The following table shows how each preset speed is selected using the TB-13
terminals. The terms OPEN and CLOSED refer to the state of the TB-13 terminal
relative to TB-2.
44
Table of Contents
PRESET ACTIVATION
PRESET #
TB - 13A
TB - 13B
TB - 13C
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
NOTE: SPEED #4 is selected if any two of the three TB-13 terminals are closed
to TB-2.
5,6
SKIP #1 & #2
(SKIP SPEED #1 & #2)
BAND WID
(SKIP BANDWIDTH)
These parameters are used to prevent the drive from operating continuously at critical
speeds, or frequencies, that cause excessive mechanical vibration of the driven
equipment. The SKIP SPEEDS (Parameters 5 and 6) and the SKIP BANDWIDTH
(Parameter 7) are used to dene up to two speed avoidance ranges. The SKIP
SPEED settings dene the starting point of the speed range that is to be avoided,
and the SKIP BANDWIDTH setting denes how far the speed range extends beyond
SKIP SPEED. Setting the SKIP SPEEDS to .00 Hz disables this function.
Example: The critical frequency is 21 Hz, and a bandwidth of 2 Hz is desired.
Therefore, set SKIP #1 to 20 Hz and set SKIP BANDWIDTH to 2 Hz. This results in
a speed range from 20 Hz to 22 Hz that the drive will not operate within continuously.
If the drive were operating at 25 Hz and then commanded to operate at a speed
within the range of avoidance, the drive would decelerate to 22 Hz and remain at
that frequency until commanded to 20 Hz or below. The drive would then decelerate
through the range of avoidance to the new frequency. Likewise, if the drive were
operating at 18 Hz, and then commanded to operate at a speed within the range of
avoidance, the drive would accelerate to 20 Hz and remain at that frequency until
commanded to a speed of 22 Hz or above. The drive would then accelerate through
the range of avoidance to the new frequency.
45
Table of Contents
8
ACCEL
(ACCELERATION TIME)
ACCEL sets the acceleration rate for all speed reference sources (keypad, speed
pot, 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, jog, and the preset speeds). The ACCEL setting is the time
to accelerate from 0 Hz to the BASE FREQUENCY (Parameter 18). The range of
adjustment for ACCEL depends on horsepower. Refer to the following table:
ACCELERATION LIMITS
120 - 240 Vac
Models
400 - 590 Vac

Models
RANGE OF ADJUSTMENT
0.25 - 20 HP
1 - 20 HP
0.1 - 3600 SEC
25 - 30 HP
25 - 60 HP
0.3 - 3600 SEC
40 - 60 HP
75 - 150 HP
1.0 - 3600 SEC
Example: If ACCEL is set to 30 seconds, and the BASE FREQUENCY is set to 60

Hz, the drive will ramp from 0 Hz to 60 Hz in 30 seconds. This is a linear function,
therefore the drive would ramp up to 30 Hz in 15 seconds, etc.
NOTE: The ability to accelerate a given load at a particular rate will be limited by the
output power capability of the drive/motor combination. The acceleration of highinertia and high-friction loads may be affected by the current limiting characteristics
of the drive. See Parameters: 16 - CURRENT, 19 - FX BOOST, and 20 - AC BOOST
for more information.
9
DECEL
(DECELERATION TIME)
DECEL sets the deceleration rate for all speed reference sources. The DECEL
setting indicates the time to decelerate from BASE FREQUENCY to 0 Hz. As with
Parameter 8 - ACCEL, this is a linear function. If the drive is set to COAST to stop,
this parameter will have no effect when a STOP command is given. The range of
adjustment for DECEL depends on horsepower, voltage, and whether Dynamic
Braking (DB) is being used. Refer to the table below:
DECELERATION LIMITS
HORSEPOWER / VOLTAGE RATING
120 - 240 Vac
Models
(NOTE 1)
480/400 Vac
Models
RANGE OF ADJUSTMENT
590 / 480 Vac

Models
WITHOUT DB
(NOTE 2)
WITH DB
0.25 - 7.5 HP
1 - 7.5 HP
----
0.3 - 3600 SEC
0.1 - 3600 SEC
10 - 15 HP
10 - 20 HP
1 - 7.5 HP
0.5 - 3600 SEC
0.1 - 3600 SEC
20 - 30 HP
25 - 60 HP
10 - 20 HP
1.0 - 3600 SEC
0.2 - 3600 SEC
40 HP
----
----
1.0 - 3600 SEC
0.3 - 3600 SEC
----
----
25 - 60 HP
2.0 - 3600 SEC
0.2 - 3600 SEC
60 HP
75 HP
----
3.0 - 3600 SEC
0.8 - 3600 SEC
----
100 - 150 HP
----
7.0 - 3600 SEC
1.8 - 3600 SEC
NOTE 1: 120/240 Vac units have the same limits as 240/200 Vac units.
NOTE 2: The parameter value can be set below the minimum value shown, but
the value shown is the operational limit of the drive. For example, if DECEL is set
for 0.1 seconds on a 10 HP, 480 Vac drive without dynamic braking, the actual
deceleration time would be 0.5 seconds.
46
Table of Contents
If an attempt is made to decelerate a high-inertia load too quickly, the motor will
regenerate voltage back into the drive. This will cause the DC bus voltage to rise,
which can result in a HI VOLTS fault. In order to prevent faulting, the drive will enter
DECEL FREEZE, which halts the deceleration until the DC bus voltage returns to
a normal level. The drive will then begin to decelerate again, and if necessary, will
enter DECEL FREEZE repeatedly to avoid faulting. If a very short deceleration
time is programmed, DECEL FREEZE may not be able to compensate fast enough,
resulting in a HI VOLTS fault.
In applications where very short deceleration times are required on high-inertia
loads, dynamic braking may be required. Consult the factory for more information
on the Dynamic Braking option.
10
MIN FRQ
(MINIMUM FREQUENCY)
This parameter denes the lower limit of the drives speed range. MIN FRQ is
used in conjunction with MAX FRQ (Parameter 11 below) to dene the operating
range of the drive.
If MIN FRQ is set to a value above 0.0 Hz, the drive will ramp up from 0.0 Hz when
given a start command. Once running, however, the drive will not operate below
the MIN FRQ setting unless the rotation is changed, or a stop command is issued
and the drive is programmed to ramp to a stop.
If the MINIMUM FREQUENCY is set to 0.0 Hz, the drive may be operated in ZERO
SPEED mode (drive is in RUN state, but there is no output to the motor). ZERO
SPEED operation can be used in applications requiring the ability to start and stop
the drive using only the selected speed reference. The drive will start when the
speed reference is raised above 0 VDC or 4 mA, and it will stop when the reference
is lowered to 0 VDC or 4 mA. Note that the drive must be initially started using one
of the normal start commands (keypad or terminal strip).
11
MAX FRQ
(MAXIMUM FREQUENCY)
This parameter denes the upper limit of the drives speed range. MAX FRQ is
used in conjunction with MIN FRQ (Parameter 10 above) to dene the operating
range of the drive.
WARNING!
Consult motor manufacturer before operating motor above rated frequency.

Overspeeding the motor and/or driven equipment can cause damage to
equipment and injury to personnel!
NOTE: If the drive is equipped with the High Frequency Output option, the range
of adjustment will be 1.00 - 650.0 Hz.
47
Table of Contents
12
DC BRAKE
(DC BRAKE VOLTAGE)
DC braking creates a braking torque by injecting DC voltage into the motor. This
parameter sets the magnitude of that DC voltage. The point at which the drive
applies DC braking to the motor depends on which STOP mode is programmed
(either COAST or RAMP, see Parameter 26 - STOP).
If the drive is set to COAST, DC braking is activated when the stop command is given.
In this case, DC braking helps decelerate the motor. This is useful in applications
where a quick deceleration is desired on a load that would normally take a long
time to coast to a stop.
If the drive is set to RAMP, DC braking is activated when the output frequency
reaches 0 Hz. In this case, the drive decelerates the load to a near stop and then
DC braking is used to stop and hold the motor. This is useful in applications where
the load needs to be stopped in a certain position. Similar applications with highinertia loads utilize both dynamic braking and DC braking. The dynamic braking
allows the high-inertia load to be decelerated quickly, while the DC braking stops
the load in the desired position.
Due to heat generated in the motor, DC braking should only be used in applications
where the load is stopped infrequently. In high duty-cycle applications, dynamic
braking is recommended because the heat is dissipated through external resistor
banks, rather than in the motor. When used, DC BRAKE should be set to the lowest
voltage that provides satisfactory operation in order to minimize motor heating. The
maximum voltage available depends on the voltage rating of the drive. Refer to
the table below:
MAXIMUM DC BRAKE VOLTAGE
13
MODEL M1100
240 / 200 Vac
MODEL M1200
240 / 200 Vac
MODEL M1400
480 / 400 Vac
MODEL M1500
590 / 480 Vac
24 VOLTS
24 VOLTS
48 VOLTS
59 VOLTS
DC TIME
(DC BRAKE TIME)
This parameter determines the length of time that the DC braking voltage is applied
to the motor. DC TIME should be set to the lowest value that provides satisfactory
operation in order to minimize motor heating.
NOTE: If this parameter is set to 999.9 seconds (the maximum value), the DC
braking will be continuous. If it is set to .0 seconds, it is disabled.
14
DYN BRAK
(DYNAMIC BRAKE)
This parameter enables the dynamic braking circuit. Set this parameter to ON only
if the optional dynamic braking circuit board and resistors are installed.
Dynamic braking is used in applications where high-inertia loads need to be
decelerated quickly. When this is attempted, the motor regenerates voltage back
into the drive, causing the DC bus voltage to rise, eventually resulting in a HI
VOLTS fault. With the dynamic braking option, the DC bus voltage is monitored,
and when it reaches a certain level, a transistor is switched on that connects an
external resistor bank across the DC bus. This allows the regenerated energy from
the motor to be dissipated through the resistors as heat, which keeps the DC bus
voltage below the trip level.
48
Table of Contents
16
CURRENT
(CURRENT LIMIT)
This parameter sets the maximum allowable output current of the drive, which also
determines the torque capability of the motor. For most applications, CURRENT is
left at the maximum setting, which is 150% or 180% (of the drives output current
rating), depending on whether the input voltage to the drive is low or high (see
Parameter 0 - LINE VOLTS).
The drive will enter current limit when the current draw of the motor exceeds the
current limit setting. To respond to this condition, the drive will enter "frequency
foldback", which commands the drive to decelerate in order to reduce the output
current and regain synchronization with the motor. When the over current condition
passes, the drive will return to normal operation and reaccelerate to the speed set
point. However, if "frequency foldback" cannot correct the condition and the drive
remains in current limit for too long, it will trip into an OVERLOAD fault. If the drive
enters current limit while accelerating, the time required to reach the speed set point
will be longer than the time programmed into ACCEL (Parameter 8).
Regardless of the CURRENT setting, the drive is capable of delivering a maximum
of 150% current for one minute, and 180% current for approximately 30 seconds,
before tripping into an OVERLOAD fault. See Parameter 17 MOTOR OL.
17
MOTOR OL
(MOTOR OVERLOAD)
The MC1000 Series is UL approved for solid state motor overload protection.
Therefore, a separate thermal overload relay is not required for single motor
applications. The MOTOR OVERLOAD circuit is used to protect the motor
from overheating due to excessive current draw. The trip time for the MOTOR
OVERLOAD setting is based on what is known as an inverse I2t function. This
function allows the drive to deliver 150% of the rated output current for one minute,
and even higher current levels for shorter periods of time. Once the overload circuit
times out, the drive will trip into an OVERLOAD fault.
The MOTOR OVERLOAD should be set to a value which is equal to the ratio (in
percentage) of the motor full load current rating to the drive output current rating.
This will result in an overload capacity of 150% of the MOTOR current rating for one
minute. If this parameter is set to 100%, the motor will be allowed to draw 150%
of the DRIVE output current rating for one minute. This distinction is important in
cases where the motor full load current rating is signicantly less than the drive
output current rating, such as applications where the drive is oversized to meet
torque requirements.
Example 1: A 5 Hp, 480 Vac drive is operating a 3 HP motor with a full load current
rating of 4.8 amps. Divide the motor current rating by the drive output current rating:
4.8 / 7.6 = 63%. Entering this value will allow continuous operation at 4.8 amps,
and will also allow the motor to draw 7.2 amps (150% of 4.8 amps) for one minute.
If the setting is left at 100%, the motor could draw 11.4 amps (150% of 7.6 amps)
for one minute before tripping the drive.
The MC Series drive has two options for thermal overload protection. One depends on the
speed of the drive, and the other does not. The diagram below illustrates the difference
between speed compensated and non-compensated thermal overload protection.
The speed-compensated thermal overload circuit offers additional protection
from high load conditions at low speeds, where motor cooling is often less effective
(e.g., motors with shaft-mounted fans). As seen on the diagram below, the drive
reduces the allowable continuous output current when operating at frequencies
less than 30 Hz.
49
Table of Contents
Example 2: A 480 Vac, 20 HP drive is operating a motor at 10 Hz. From the
diagram, a drive operating at 10 Hz can deliver about 75% of its output current
rating continuously. A 480 Vac, 20 HP drives output current rating is 27 Amps.
Therefore, the drive would be able to operate continuously at 20 Amps. The drive
would also be able to deliver 150% of that value (30 Amps) for one minute before
tripping into an OVERLOAD fault.
The speed compensated thermal overload is the factory default and should be
used in applications where the motor does not normally experience high loads at
low speeds for extended periods of time.
NON-COMPENSATED
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
OUTPUT CURRENT (%)
100
ED
AT
OM
80
C
ED
S
EN
SP
60
40
20
10
20
30
40
50
60
FREQUENCY (Hz)
NOTE 1: The above diagram is based on a MOTOR OL setting of 100%. For lower
MOTOR OL settings, reduce the % CURRENT values by the same percentage. For
example, if MOTOR OL is set to 75%, reduce the % CURRENT values by 25%.
Therefore, the curve shifts down, but the shape of the curve remains the same.
The non-compensated thermal overload circuit allows 100% current continuously,
and 150% current for one minute, at all speeds. In the example above, the motor
operating at 10 Hz without speed-compensated protection would be allowed to
operate continuously at 27 Amps, and could draw 40.5 Amps for one minute before
tripping. Without sufcient motor cooling, this can result in motor failure due to
overheating.
The non-compensated circuit is selected by setting Parameter 22 - TORQUE to
CT/NOCMP. The non-compensated setting should only be used in applications
where the motor is properly cooled at all speeds, or the motor manufacturer has
approved the motor for full-load operation at low speeds.
NOTE 2: The operation of the motor thermal overload circuit is affected by the
setting of Parameter 34 - LOAD MLT.
50
Table of Contents
BASE
18
(BASE FREQUENCY)
The BASE FREQUENCY determines the V/Hz ratio by setting the frequency at
which the drive will output full voltage to the motor. For most applications the base
frequency should be set to match the motors rated frequency.
For example, if the drive is rated for 460 Vac output, and the BASE FREQUENCY is
set to 60 Hz, the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (except when AC
BOOST or FX BOOST are active, see Parameters 19 and 20) from 0 Hz to 60 Hz.
This range is the region of constant torque. If the motor speed is increased past 60
Hz, the output voltage remains constant while the frequency increases, resulting in a
reduced V/Hz ratio. This range, from 60 Hz to about 90 Hz, is the region of constant
horsepower. Above 90 Hz, horsepower begins to decrease as frequency increases.
Refer to Section 6.1 - DESCRIPTION OF AC MOTOR OPERATION.
19
FX BOOST
(FIXED BOOST)
This parameter is used in applications which require high starting torque. FX BOOST
increases the output voltage at lower output frequencies (below 30 Hz for 60 Hz
base frequency), in order to boost the torque capability of the motor. Refer to the
diagram below. The factory default for FX BOOST depends on the horsepower
rating. Refer to the table below:
FX BOOST FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
HP
FACTORY DEFAULT
(ALL VOLTAGES)
HP
FACTORY DEFAULT
(240 / 200 VAC)
FACTORY DEFAULT
(400+ VAC)
0.25 - 1 HP
5.30 %
40 HP
2.30 %
1.20 %
1.5 - 2 HP
4.40 %
50 HP
---
0.80 %
3 HP
3.60 %
60 HP
2.10 %
0.80 %
5 HP
3.00 %
75 HP
---
2.00 %
7.5 HP
2.70 %
100 HP
---
1.90 %
10 HP
2.40 %
125 HP
---
1.90 %
15 HP
2.20 %
150 HP
---
1.80 %
20 HP
2.00 %
25 HP
1.80 %
30 HP
1.60 %
51
Table of Contents
AC BOOST
20
(ACCELERATION BOOST)
AC BOOST is similar to FX BOOST, but is only active when the drive is accelerating.
During acceleration, the output voltage is increased according to the setting of AC
BOOST, which increases motor torque. Refer to the diagram below. AC BOOST,
like FX BOOST, is used in applications with high-inertia loads.
The diagram below illustrates how FX BOOST and AC BOOST alter the V/Hz ratio
to increase motor torque.
FX BOOST sets the boost at 0 Hz (approximately 15% in the example above), and
as the output frequency approaches 30 Hz, the boost decreases to zero.
100
AC BOOST
90
80
OUTPUT VOLTAGE (%)
70
60
FX BOOST
50
40
30
20
CONSTANT V/Hz
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
OUTPUT FREQUENCY (Hz)
AC BOOST only functions during acceleration. In the diagram above, the drive
is operating at 35 Hz and is then commanded to 50 Hz. The output voltage is
increased by the AC BOOST setting (approximately 15% in the example above)
during acceleration to the new speed set point. Once the new set point is reached,
the output voltage returns to normal.
21
SLIP CMP
(SLIP COMPENSATION)
SLIP COMPENSATION is used to compensate for changes in motor speed (slip)

which occur due to changes in load. In a standard AC induction motor, as the load
on the motor increases, the motor current increases and the motor shaft speed
decreases. By increasing the output frequency in response to the increased motor
current, SLIP COMPENSATION is able to counteract the reduction in motor speed
due to increased load. This parameter is useful in applications where precise
speed regulation is needed, even under changing load conditions. The use of SLIP
COMPENSATION can result in speed regulation of less than 1% of base speed in
most applications. SLIP COMPENSATION is often set to 3%, which is the standard
slip rating of most AC induction motors.
52
Table of Contents
22
TORQUE
(TORQUE CURVE SELECTION)
This parameter is used to select whether the output of the drive follows a constant
or variable V/Hz curve. The following selections are available:
CONSTANT
Use for constant torque applications to optimize torque.
VARIABLE
Use for variable torque applications to optimize energy

savings.
CT / NOCMP
Use for constant torque applications that require full overload

capacity at low speeds (see Parameter 17 - MOTOR OL).
23
CARRIER
(CARRIER FREQUENCY)
This parameter sets the carrier, or switching, frequency of the output IGBTs. Higher
switching rates result in less audible noise from the motor, but the efciency of the
drive decreases as the carrier frequency increases. Therefore, this parameter should
be set to the lowest value which yields acceptable sound levels. Available settings
are: 2.5 kHz, 6 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12 kHz and 14 kHz.
NOTE 1: The 2.5 kHz carrier frequency setting is a variable carrier. The carrier
frequency remains xed at 1.5 kHz up to 25 Hz output frequency. Above 25 Hz, the
carrier is a xed multiple of 60 times the drives output frequency. For example, if
the output frequency of the drive was set to 45 Hz, the carrier frequency would be
2.7 kHz (45 Hz x 60 = 2700 Hz).
NOTE 2: The ability to operate a drive in the quiet (high carrier frequency) mode
is dependent on the drive horsepower rating, driven load, drive enclosure, and the
ambient temperature. At full ambient temperature, operation above 8 kHz requires
derating the drive by multiplying the output current rating by the following factors:
0.94 at 10 kHz, 0.89 at 12 kHz, and 0.83 at 14 kHz.
NOTE 3: If the drive is equipped with the High Output Frequency option, and MAX
FRQ is set above 120 Hz, CARRIER will automatically change to 14 kHz, and the
CARRIER parameter will disappear from the parameter menu. Operation at 14 kHz
carrier frequency requires derating as shown in NOTE 2 above.
53
Table of Contents
25
START
(START MODE)
WARNING!
Automatic start of equipment may result in damage to equipment and/or injury to

personnel! Automatic start should only be used on equipment that is inaccessible
to personnel.
This parameter selects the starting method for the drive, and can be set for one of
the following:
NORMAL
The drive will start when the appropriate contact closure is

made on the terminal strip (in REMOTE mode), or by pressing
the keypad START key (in LOCAL mode). To start the drive
in NORMAL mode, a start command must be issued at least
two seconds AFTER input power is applied.
POWER UP
The drive will automatically start upon application of input power.

The drive MUST be wired for a two-wire start/stop circuit (refer
to Section 14.0 - CONTROL WIRING). The start command
MUST be present when power is applied for this function to
operate.
AUTO RE-
The drive will automatically restart after a protective fault or upon

application of input power. As with the POWER-UP option, a
start command must be present for this function to operate.
RE-BRAKE
After a fault, the drive will apply DC braking equal to the DC

BRAKE setting for 15 seconds and then restart. This is done
to ensure the motor is stopped during the restart attempt, as
the drive will not start into a spinning motor.
NOTE 1: POWER UP, AUTO RE-, and RE-BRAKE settings are only active when
the drive is in REMOTE mode (see Parameter 30 - CONTROL).
NOTE 2: After a fault, the drive will attempt to restart ve times, and if unsuccessful,
will shut down on a FAULT LOCKOUT. Every 15 minutes that passes will decrement
the restart counter by one. Therefore, 75 minutes after a successful restart, the
restart counter is fully reset, and the drive can once again attempt ve restarts.
NOTE 3: The drive WILL NOT restart after the following faults: CONTROL and
PWR SAG. Also, if an OUTPUT fault occurs below 1.5 Hz, only one restart will be
attempted, after a four minute delay. If unsuccessful, it will then trip into FAULT
LOCKOUT, which will require a manual reset. This is done to protect the drive in
case of a shorted motor.
26
STOP
(STOP MODE)
This parameter selects whether the motor will COAST to a stop, or RAMP to a stop,
when the drive is given a stop command.
COAST
When a stop command is given, the drive shuts off the output
to the motor, allowing it to coast to a stop. The time required
for the motor to stop is governed by the inertia of the load.
RAMP
When a stop command is given, the drive will decelerate the

motor to a stop over a period of time according to Parameter
9 - DECEL. Once the output frequency reaches 0.0 Hz, there
will be a 200 ms delay before the drive can be started again.
RAMP 2
Same as RAMP, but without the 200 ms start delay. This allows
faster start/stop cycles for applications that require it.
54
Table of Contents
27
ROTATION
(ROTATION DIRECTION)
WARNING!
If TB-13C is programmed for RUN REVERSE, TB-1 is disabled and CANNOT be

used as a STOP switch! This is true in LOCAL and REMOTE mode. Incorrect
use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel! Refer
to Parameter 49 - TB13C for more information.
This parameter is used to limit the motor rotation direction to forward or reverse, or to
allow rotation in both directions. The parameter can be set to one of the following:
FORWARD
Rotation is allowed in the forward direction only. This selection

disables the FWD/REV button on the keypad and TB-13C
(REVERSE).
REVERSE
Rotation is allowed in the reverse direction only. This selection

disables the FWD/REV button on the keypad and TB-12A
(FORWARD). TB-13C must be programmed for either RUN REV
or STRT REV for this function to operate in the REMOTE mode.
FWD&REV
Rotation is allowed in both directions. The FWD/REV button is

enabled. Rotation can be changed from the keypad (LOCAL
mode), or the terminal strip (REMOTE mode). In the REMOTE
mode, TB-13C must be programmed for either RUN REV or
STRT REV for this function to operate.
FWD@LOC
In LOCAL mode, rotation is allowed in the forward direction only.

In REMOTE mode, rotation is allowed in both directions.
NOTE: If the rotation is changed while the drive is running, the drive will decelerate to
0 Hz, and then accelerate back up to the speed set point in the opposite direction.
28
AUTO / MAN
(AUTO / MANUAL SPEED CONTROL)
This parameter is used to select the method of speed control when the drive is in
the LOCAL mode. The choices are explained below:
MANUAL
The drive will accept a speed reference from the keypad (UP
and DOWN ARROW keys) or a speed potentiometer (wired
to TB-2, 5A, and 6). Parameter 29 - MANUAL below selects
either keypad or speed potentiometer. The AUTO/MAN button
on the keypad is disabled.
AUTO
The drive will accept a 0-10 VDC input signal on TB-5A and
TB-2, a 4-20 mA input signal on TB-5B and TB-2, or one of the
four PRESET SPEEDS. The programming of TB-13A, TB-13B
and TB-13C determines which AUTO reference is selected.
The AUTO/MAN button on the keypad is disabled.
BOTH
The AUTO/MAN key on the keypad is enabled and can be

used to toggle between MANUAL and AUTO control ONLY if
the drive is in LOCAL mode.
NOTE: If the drive is in the AUTO mode, and a speed reference is not selected
using TB-13A, TB-13B, or TB-13C, the speed reference source will default to the
setting of Parameter 29 - MANUAL (KEYPAD or 0-10 VDC).
29
MANUAL
(MANUAL)
This parameter selects the speed reference source when the drive is set for MANUAL
speed control (see Parameter 28 - AUTO/MAN above). The speed reference options
are KEYPAD (UP and DOWN ARROW keys), or 0 - 10 VDC (from a speed pot wired
to TB-2, 5A, and 6; or some other 0-10 VDC source).
55
Table of Contents
30
CONTROL
(START/STOP CONTROL)
WARNING!
If CONTROL is set to LOCAL, TB-1 is disabled and CANNOT be used as a

STOP switch! Incorrect use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment and/or
injury to personnel!
WARNING!

This parameter is used to select the source of the start/stop command and direction
control. The following settings are available:
LOCAL
START/STOP and FORWARD/REVERSE commands from

the keypad only.
REMOTE
START/STOP and FORWARD/REVERSE commands from

the terminal strip only.
BOTH
LOCAL operation if TB-13A or TB-13C is programmed for

LOCAL SELECT and a contact closure is made from TB-13A
or TB-13C to TB-2. If the contact closure is not made, the drive
will be in REMOTE mode.
31
UNITS
(SPEED/PID UNITS)
UNITS sets the units of the output speed or PID display on the keypad.
The following choices are available:
Speed mode: HERTZ, RPM, %HZ, /SEC, /MIN, /HR, GPH, NONE
PID mode:
%, PSI, FPM, CFM, GPM, IN, FT, /SEC, /MIN, /HR, F, C,

MPM, GPH
NOTE: If one of the "pid" units is selected, but the drive is in Manual (open-loop)
speed control mode or PID MODE is DISABLED, the displayed speed units will
default to HERTZ. If one of the "speed" units is selected, but PID MODE is ENABLED
and the drive is in Auto mode, the displayed PID units will default to %.
32
HZ MULT
(HERTZ MULTIPLIER)
The HZ MULTIPLIER is used to scale the output speed indication on the display.
If UNITS is set for HERTZ or % HZ, this parameter has no effect. Multiplying the
output frequency by the HZ MULTIPLIER will yield the desired speed value on the
display.
Example: The desired speed units is RPM with a standard 60 Hz, 1800 RPM
motor. Set UNITS to RPM and set HZ MULT to 30.00. This will result in a speed
display of 1110 RPM for an output frequency of 37 Hz (37 Hz X 30 = 1110 RPM).
Also, if there was a 100:1 gear reducer in the system, Parameter 33 - SPEED DP
below could be set to XX.XX to represent the output of the gear reducer (11.10
RPM in the example).
56
Table of Contents
33
SPEED DP
(SPEED DECIMAL POINT)
This parameter is used to move the decimal point location in the speed display. This
parameter will not have any effect if UNITS is set to HERTZ or % HZ. The possible
settings are: XXXXX, XXX.X, XX.XX, X.XXX, and .XXXX. Refer to Parameter 32
- HZ MULT above for an example on the use of SPEED DP.
34
LOAD MLT
(LOAD MULTIPLIER)
This parameter is used to scale the % LOAD display. If the drive output current rating
is higher than the motor full load current rating, the drive will not display 100% load
when the motor is at full load. Setting this parameter to the ratio (in %) of the drive
output current rating to the motor full load current rating will scale the load display
to show motor load instead of drive load. This will result in a display of 100% when
the motor is at full load.
The motor overload circuitry is also affected by this parameter. When the display
reads 150% load, the drive will trip on OVERLOAD in one minute, regardless of the
actual motor current. If this parameter is used to scale the display to show actual
motor load, then Parameter 17 - MOTOR OL should be left at 100%. Likewise, if
MOTOR OL has been set according to the motor full load rating, this parameter
should be left at 100%. Changing both parameters will result in an OVERLOAD
fault sooner than expected.
The output signal at TB-10B is also affected by this parameter. When set to the
ratio of current ratings as explained above, the output signal will be proportional to
motor load instead of drive load.
35
CONTRAST
(LCD DISPLAY CONTRAST)
This parameter is used to adjust the contrast of the drive display and can be set
to LOW, MED, or HIGH in order to obtain the most visible display. If the drive is
mounted lower than eye level, a HIGH setting may make the display more visible.
Likewise, if the drive is mounted higher than eye level, a LOW setting may make
the display more visible.
36
SLEEP TH
(SLEEP THRESHOLD)
The MC1000 Series drive has a Sleep Mode function that allows the drive to cease
operation when system demand falls below a preset level. This is to prevent the
motor from operating at low speeds for long periods of time. It is commonly used
along with the PID Set point Control feature, but can also be used in standard speed
control mode.
When the commanded speed falls below the SLEEP THRESHOLD setting for the
dened SLEEP DELAY time (see Parameter 37 below), the drive will "go to sleep"
and the motor will go to zero speed. The drive will remain "sleeping" until it is
commanded to operate at a speed that is 2 Hz above the SLEEP THRESHOLD, at
which point it will "wake up" and ramp the motor up to the commanded speed.
NOTE 1: While the drive is in Sleep Mode, the Status portion of the display will
read SLEEP.
NOTE 2: If the drive's commanded speed goes below the SLEEP THRESHOLD,
the SLEEP DELAY timer will start to count down. If the commanded speed equals
or exceeds the SLEEP THRESHOLD before the SLEEP DELAY times out, the
SLEEP DELAY timer will be reset.
NOTE 3: If the drive is in a Stop state, and the commanded speed is below the
SLEEP THRESHOLD, the drive will immediately go to sleep upon a Start command,
bypassing the SLEEP DELAY.
57
Table of Contents
37
SLEEP DL
(SLEEP DELAY)
This parameter sets the amount of time the drive must operate below the SLEEP
THRESHOLD (see Parameter 36 above) before the drive "goes to sleep" and brings
the motor to zero speed.
Example: SLEEP THRESHOLD is set to 15 Hz and SLEEP DELAY is set to 60
seconds. If the drive operates below 15 Hz for 60 seconds, the drive will "go to
sleep" and the motor will stop. The drive's display will indicate SLEEP, and the
drive will remain "sleeping" until the drive commanded to a speed equal to greater
than 17 Hz. At this point, the drive will "wake up" and ramp the motor up to the
commanded speed.
38
SLEEP BW
(SLEEP BANDWIDTH)
This parameter allows the PID feedback signal to determine when drive should
"wake up" when operating in Sleep Mode. In process systems that utilize Integral
Gain (see Parameter 78), the drive may cycle in and out of Sleep Mode more often
than desired, due to the Integral function of the PID algorithm.
When SLEEP BANDWIDTH is used, the feedback signal must decrease or increase
(depending on whether the system is normal or reverse-acting) by the programmed
amount before the drive will "wake up". This parameter is set in PID units.
Example: In a normal-acting system, the PID set point is 50 PSI, SLEEP
THRESHOLD is set to 20 Hz, and SLEEP BANDWIDTH is set to 5 PSI. The drive
will enter Sleep Mode when the commanded speed drops below 20 Hz for the
time dened in SLEEP DELAY. The drive will wake up when the feedback signal
drops below 45 PSI (50 PSI set point minus 5 PSI bandwidth = 45 PSI), even if the
commanded speed is still below 20 Hz.
NOTE: If SLEEP BANDWIDTH is set to 0, this function is disabled, and the drive
will wake up when the commanded speed exceeds the SLEEP THRESHOLD plus
2 Hz, as described in Parameters 36 and 37.
39
TB5 MIN
(TERMINAL TB-5 INPUT)
TB5 MIN selects the output frequency of the drive that will correspond to the
minimum analog speed reference input (0 VDC or 4 mA). This parameter is used in
conjunction with Parameter 40 - TB5 MAX to dene a speed range that corresponds
to the analog speed reference input (0 - 10 VDC or 4 - 20 mA).
40
TB5 MAX
(TERMINAL TB-5 INPUT)
TB5 MAX selects the output frequency of the drive that will correspond to the
maximum analog speed reference input (10 VDC or 20 mA). This parameter is used
in conjunction with Parameter 39 - TB5 MIN to dene a speed range that corresponds
to the analog speed reference input (0 - 10 VDC or 4 - 20 mA).
Example 1: The drive is required to operate from 0 to 60 Hz in response to a 0-5
VDC speed reference signal (rather than the normal 0-10 VDC). Because TB5 MAX
is based on a 0-10 VDC (or 4-20 mA) signal, the drive will operate at half of the TB5
MAX value if it is given a 5 VDC signal. Therefore, setting TB5 MAX to 120 Hz will
cause the drive to run at 60 Hz when it is given a 5 VDC speed reference signal.
NOTE: The drive can be programmed for inverse operation so that as the speed
reference increases, the drive speed will decrease, and as the speed reference decreases,
the drive speed will increase. This is accomplished by setting TB5 MIN to the desired
maximum output frequency, and TB5 MAX to the desired minimum output frequency.
58
Table of Contents
Example 2: The drive is being controlled by a pressure transducer that provides a
4-20 mA signal proportional to duct pressure. The minimum frequency desired is 20
Hz, and the maximum is 60 Hz. Set TB5 MIN for 60 Hz, and TB5 MAX for 20 Hz. As
the duct pressure rises, the output signal from the transducer will increase, causing
the speed of the drive to decrease. This results in a decrease in duct pressure and
a decreasing transducer signal. The drive responds to the decreasing signal by
increasing speed, which again raises the duct pressure. In this way, the average duct
pressure can be maintained at a certain level. If the acceleration and deceleration
rates are set too fast however, the drive will react quickly to signal changes which
will cause the drive speed to hunt up and down excessively.
41
AIN FLTR
(ANALOG INPUT FILTER)
This parameter adjusts the lter on the analog input terminals (TB-5A and TB-5B)
to reduce the effect of any electrical noise that may be present on the analog input
signals. This lter works in both PID mode and standard speed control mode. It
should be set to the lowest value that yields acceptable performance, as setting it
too high may cause the drive to react too slowly to signal changes.
42
TB10A OUT
(TERMINAL TB-10A OUTPUT)
The analog output signal at TB-10A is proportional to the output frequency of the
drive. This parameter selects whether that signal is 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC. The
2-10 VDC signal can be converted to a 4-20 mA signal by connecting a resistor
in series with the signal such that the total load resistance is 500 Ohms. If set to
NONE, the function is disabled.
NOTE: This output cannot be used with loop-powered devices that derive power
from a 4-20 mA signal.
43
@ TB10A
(TERMINAL TB-10A SCALING)
This parameter scales the analog output signal at TB-10A. This setting is the output
frequency that is indicated when the TB-10A output measures 10VDC.
Example: The drive is part of a control system that requires a 0-5 VDC signal
(rather than 0-10 VDC) that is proportional to 0-60 Hz output frequency. The output
signal is linear, so setting this parameter to 120 Hz would yield 10 VDC at 120 Hz,
and 5 VDC at 60 Hz.
44
TB10B OUT
(TERMINAL TB-10B OUTPUT)
The analog output signal at TB-10B is proportional to the drive load. This parameter
selects whether that signal is 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC. The 2-10 VDC signal can
be converted to a 4-20 mA signal by connecting a resistor in series with the signal
such that the total load resistance is 500 Ohms.
NOTE: This output cannot be used with loop-powered devices that derive power
from a 4-20 mA signal.
45
@ TB10B
(TERMINAL TB-10B SCALING)
This parameter scales the analog output signal at TB-10B. This setting is the load
(in %) that is indicated when the TB-10B output measures 10 VDC.
Example: The drive is part of a control system that requires a 0-10 VDC signal to
indicate 0-150% drive load. If this parameter were set to 150%, the drive would
output 10 VDC at 150% load (and about 6.7 VDC at 100% load).
NOTE: The output signal at TB-10B is affected by the setting of Parameter 34
- LOAD MLT.
59
Table of Contents
47
TB13A
(TB-13A INPUT FUNCTION)
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13A. Closing TB-13A
to TB-2 activates the TB-13A input function.
The following functions can be selected:
NONE
Disables the TB-13A function.
0-10VDC
Selects 0-10 VDC as the AUTO speed reference input. The

0-10 VDC signal is wired to TB-5A and TB-2.
4-20 MA
Selects 4-20 mA as the AUTO speed reference input. The

4-20 mA signal is wired to TB-5B and TB-2.
SPEED#1
Selects PRESET SPEED #1 as the AUTO speed reference.
LOC SEL
Selects LOCAL mode when Parameter 30 - CONTROL is set

to BOTH. Drive is in REMOTE mode if contact closure is not
made.
DEC FREQ
Decrease frequency set point. Used with the MOP (motor

operated pot) function. Refer to Section 14.2.6 - SPEED
REFERENCE SELECTION.
48
TB13B
(TB-13B INPUT FUNCTION)
WARNING!
When operating in JOG mode, the STOP key WILL NOT stop the drive. To stop
the drive, the contact between TB-13B and TB-2 must be opened.
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13B. Closing TB-13B
to TB-2 activates the TB-13B function. The following functions can be selected:
NONE
Disables the TB-13B function.
0-10VDC

4-20 MA

SPEED#2
INC FREQ
Increase frequency set point. Used with the MOP (motor

operated pot) function. Refer to Section 14.2.6 - SPEED
REFERENCE SELECTION.
JOG FWD
Jog in the forward direction. Active only when drive is STOPPED.

The jog speed is set by Parameter 2 -SPEED#2.
JOG REV
Jog in the reverse direction. Active only when drive is STOPPED.

The jog speed is set by Parameter 2 - SPEED#2.
49
TB13C
(TB-13C INPUT FUNCTION)
WARNING!
If TB-13C is programmed for RUN REVERSE, TB-1 is disabled and CANNOT be

used as a STOP switch! This is true in LOCAL and REMOTE mode. Incorrect
use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel!
60
Table of Contents
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13C. Closing TB13C to TB-2 activates the TB-13C input function. The following functions can be
selected:
NONE
Disables the TB-13C function.
0-10VDC

4-20 MA

SPEED#3
LOC SEL
LOCAL SELECT - Selects LOCAL mode when Parameter 30

- CONTROL is set to BOTH. Drive is in REMOTE mode if
contact closure is not made.
RUN REV
RUN REVERSE - Run in reverse direction. Requires a

maintained contact closure - close to RUN in reverse direction,
open to STOP. This will cause TB-12A to function as RUN
FORWARD, also requiring a maintained contact to RUN in
forward.
STRT REV
START REVERSE - Start in reverse direction. Requires a

momentary contact closure to RUN in reverse direction. A
momentary STOP contact must be wired between TB-1 and
TB-2. Setting this parameter to START REVERSE causes
TB-12A to function as START FORWARD, also requiring a
momentary contact closure to RUN in forward.
50
TB13D
(TB-13D FUNCTION)
WARNING!

This parameter selects the function for TB-13D.
EXT FAULT
Sets TB-13D as a normally open EXTERNAL FAULT contact.

Close TB-13D to TB-2 to trip the drive into an EXTERNAL
FAULT.
EXT / FAULT
Sets TB-13D as a normally closed EXTERNAL FAULT contact.

Open TB-13D to TB-2 to trip the drive into an EXTERNAL
FAULT.
EXT CLEAR
Sets TB-13D as a normally open FAULT RESET. Close TB13D to TB-2 to clear a fault.
NOTE: When set to CLEAR, TB-13D becomes the only terminal that can be used
to clear a fault (TB-1 will not work). However, the keypad STOP key can still be
used to clear faults.
61
Table of Contents
52
TB14 OUT
(TB-14 OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT)
This parameter sets the open-collector output indication for terminal TB-14.
The following conditions can be selected:
NONE
This setting disables the output.
RUN
The relay energizes when the drive is given a START command,

and remains energized until: a STOP command is given and
the output frequency has decelerated to 0.5 Hz, the drive has
tripped, or the input voltage is removed. Note that this relay
indicates only that the drive is in the RUN mode. It does not
necessarily indicate that the motor is turning.
FAULT
The relay energizes when input voltage is applied to the

drive and remains energized until the drive trips into a fault
condition, or input voltage is removed.
/ FAULT
INVERSE FAULT - The relay energizes when the drive trips

into a fault condition, and remains energized until the fault
condition is cleared.
LOCK
FAULT LOCKOUT - This relay is used when the drive is

programmed to automatically restart after a fault. The relay
energizes when input voltage is applied to the drive and
remains energized until the drive has faulted and unsuccessfully
attempted ve restarts, or input voltage is removed.
@ SPEED
AT SPEED - The relay energizes when the drive reaches the

speed set point. To avoid a chattering relay (energizing and
de-energizing), due to small uctuations in speed, the relay will
remain energized as long as the actual speed is within + 3 Hz
of the speed set point.
ABOVE #3
ABOVE SPEED #3 - The relay energizes when the output

frequency exceeds the SPEED #3 value, and de-energizes
when the output frequency returns to a value lower than the
SPEED #3 value. See Parameter 3 - SPEED #3 in Section
18.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
I LIMIT
CURRENT LIMIT - The relay energizes when the drive is

operating in current limit. Once the current limit relay is
energized, it remains energized for a minimum of 500ms,
regardless of whether the drive is still in current limit. At the
end of the 500ms interval, the relay will de-energize if the drive
is no longer in current limit. See Parameter 16 - CURRENT in
Section 18.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
AUT/MAN
AUTO/MANUAL MODE - The relay energizes when the drive

is in the AUTOMATIC mode, and de-energizes in the MANUAL
mode. Refer to Section 14.2.5 - SPEED REFERENCE
SELECTION.
FLWR PR
FOLLOWER PRESENT - The relay energizes when the analog

input reference signal at TB-5B is greater than 2 mA, and deenergizes if the signal falls below 2 mA.
REVERSE
The relay energizes when Reverse direction is selected, and

de-energizes when Forward direction is selected.
62
Table of Contents
MIN/MAX ALARM The relay energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode) or
the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) is within
the limits set by MIN ALARM and MAX ALARM (Parameters
81 and 82), and de-energizes when the signal falls below the
MIN ALARM setting or exceeds the MAX ALARM setting.
INV MIN/MAX A
INVERSE MIN/MAX ALARM - The relay de-energizes when the

feedback signal (in PID mode) or the speed reference signal (in
open-loop speed mode) is within the limits set by MIN ALARM
and MAX ALARM (Parameters 81 and 82), and energizes when
the signal falls below the MIN ALARM setting or exceeds the
MAX ALARM setting.
MIN ALARM
The relay de-energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode)
equals or exceeds the MIN ALARM setting (Parameter 81),
and energizes when the signal falls below the MIN ALARM
setting.
INV MIN ALARM
INVERSE MIN ALARM - The relay energizes when the feedback

signal (in PID mode) or the speed reference signal (in openloop speed mode) equals or exceeds the MIN ALARM setting
(Parameter 81), and de-energizes when the signal falls below
the MIN ALARM setting.
MAX ALARM
The relay de-energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) is less
than or equal to the MAX ALARM setting (Parameter 82), and
energizes when the signal exceeds the MAX ALARM setting.
INV MAX ALARM
INVERSE MAX ALARM - The relay energizes when the

feedback signal (in PID mode) or the speed reference signal
(in open-loop speed mode) is less than or equal to the MAX
ALARM setting (Parameter 82), and de-energizes when the
signal exceeds the MAX ALARM setting.
SLEEP
The relay energizes when the drive is in SLEEP MODE. See

Parameters 36 - 38.
SPD = 0HZ
The relay energizes when there is no output to the motor, for

any reason, such as: drive is in STOP mode, drive is in RUN
mode but the speed command is 0 Hz, drive is in SLEEP mode,
drive has tripped into a fault, etc.
The open-collector output circuit is a current-sinking type rated at 30 VDC and 40

mA maximum. An external power supply (30 VDC max.) must be used to power
the open-collector outputs. The drive does not have a dedicated power supply for
the open-collector outputs.
53
TB15 OUT
(TB-15 OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT)
This parameter sets the open-collector output indication for terminal TB-15. It has
the same functionality as Parameter 52 - TB14 OUT above.
54
RELAY
(RELAY FUNCTION)
The control board has one set of FORM C relay contacts at TB-16, 17, and 18
that can be programmed for the same indications as the open-collector outputs
described in parameter 52.
63
Table of Contents
The FORM C contacts at TB-16, 17, and 18 are rated 2 amps at 28 VDC or 120 Vac.
Control wiring diagrams show relays in the rest state (coils NOT energized).
NOTE: Models rated above 30 Hp at 200/240 Vac and 60 Hp at 400/480 Vac have a
second Form C relay at terminals TB-19, TB-20, and TB-21. This relay is controlled
by Parameter 52 - TB14 OUT.
55
TB5B LOSS
(LOSS OF FOLLOWER ACTION)
This parameter selects the action taken by the drive if the follower signal is lost at
TB-5B. This function is only active if the follower signal is 4-20 mA. The signal is
considered lost if it falls below 2 mA.
FAULT
The drive will trip into a FOLLOWER fault condition.
SP #4
The drive will go to SPEED #4 (Parameter 4).
NONE
57
The drive will go to the programmed minimum speed.

SERIAL
(SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS)
This parameter is used to activate serial communications. When using this feature,
the drive can communicate with a personal computer (PC), programmable logic
controller (PLC), or other external device that utilizes RS-485 serial communications
for control. The serial interface may be used to read present parameter settings
(uploading to the control device), write new parameter settings (downloading from
the control device), monitor present drive activity, and control drive activity. The
following settings are available:
DISABLE
Serial communication function is disabled.
W / TIMER
Enables serial communications with a watchdog timer. If there

is no serial activity (read or write) for more than 10 seconds,
serial control will turn off and the drive will stop.
W / O TIMR
Enables serial communications without a watchdog timer.

However, after 10 seconds of no serial activity, serial control
can be turned off by issuing a STOP command from any source
(keypad, terminal strip) other than the serial link.
NOTE 1: The keypad STOP button is always active, regardless of what method
(LOCAL, REMOTE, or SERIAL) is being used to control the drive. The remote STOP
input (TB-1) may also be active, depending on how the drive is programmed.
NOTE 2: If a RESET command (Parameter 65 - PROGRAM) is issued through
the serial link, this parameter will not default back to DISABLE. However, explicitly
setting this parameter to DISABLE through the serial link will cut off communication
with the drive.
If developing an application for serial communications, refer to the RS-232/RS-485
Modbus Communications Protocol Specication.
58
ADDRESS
(SERIAL ADDRESS)
This parameter is used with the serial communications feature, and is intended for
use in a multiple drive network (RS-485). The serial link will support drives with
addresses from 1 up to 247.
64
Table of Contents
61
PASSWORD
(PASSWORD NUMBER)
This feature limits access to the programmable parameters for added security. The
correct password must be entered in order to change the parameters.
Pressing the PROG/RUN button on the keypad will activate the PASSWORD
prompt. If the correct password is entered, the PROGRAM MODE is entered and
parameters can be changed.
If the wrong password is entered, the drive will ash ERROR: INCORRECT and
then return to the PASSWORD prompt to allow another attempt at entering the
correct password.
If the ENTER key is pressed while PASSWORD reads 0000, the MONITOR MODE
will be entered (if Parameter 64 - MONITOR, is set to ON), which will allow the
parameters to be viewed (except for PASSWORD), but not changed.
NOTE 1: The factory default value is 0019.
NOTE 2: If PASSWORD is set to 0000, the function is disabled. Pressing the
PROG/RUN key will result in direct entry into the PROGRAM mode without having
to enter a password.
63
SOFTWARE
(SOFTWARE VERSION)
This parameter displays the software code and revision number of the control board
software. This information is useful when contacting the factory for programming
or troubleshooting assistance. This is a view-only parameter, and cannot be
changed.
64
MONITOR
(MONITOR MODE)
This parameter is used to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the MONITOR MODE
function. The functionality is explained below:
ON
Pressing the PROG/RUN key will call up the PASSWORD

prompt. If the ENTER key is pressed while the password value
reads 0000, the MONITOR MODE is entered and parameters
can be viewed (except for PASSWORD), but not changed.
OFF
Pressing the PROG/RUN key will call up the PASSWORD

prompt. If the ENTER key is pressed while the password value
reads 0000 (or any other incorrect value), it will be treated
as in incorrect password and the display will ash ERROR:
INCORRECT, and then return to the PASSWORD prompt to
allow another attempt at entering the correct password.
65
PROGRAM
(PROGRAM FACTORY DEFAULTS)
WARNING!

parameters are reset to factory defaults! The drive must be reprogrammed after
a RESET in order to insure proper operation.

65
Table of Contents
This parameter is used to reset the programmable parameters back to the factory
default settings. This parameter has four possible settings:
MAINTAIN
Maintain parameter settings as they are.
RESET 60
Resets parameters to factory defaults for 60 Hz base

frequency.
RESET 50

frequency.
RST HIGH

frequency. This option will only appear if the drive is equipped
with the High Frequency Output option.
When a factory reset is performed, the following terminals are affected:

TB-1 will be disabled as a STOP input because Parameter 30 - CONTROL will
default to LOCAL.
TB-13A, 13B, and 13C will be disabled because Parameters 47, 48, and 49 will
default to NONE. If TB-13C was set to RUN REVERSE, TB-12A will default to a
momentary START contact.
TB-13D will default to a normally open EXTERNAL FAULT contact because
Parameter 50 - TB13D will be reset to EXT FAULT.
NOTE: This parameter will display RESET 60, RESET 50 or RST HIGH until a
change is made to one or more of the parameter settings. Once a parameter is
changed, the display will change to MAINTAIN.
66
HISTORY
(CLEAR FAULT HISTORY)
This parameter is used to clear the previous faults in the FAULT HISTORY. When set
to CLEAR and the ENTER key is pushed, the display will change to MAINTAIN, and
the FAULT HISTORY will display NO FAULT for each of the eight fault histories.
70
PID MODE
(PID MODE SELECT)
This parameter activates the PID function, and selects whether the PID control
will be direct or reverse acting. Refer to Section 19.0 - MC1000 PID SET POINT
CONTROL. The following options are available:
OFF
Disables the PID function to allow standard drive operation.
NORMAL
Enables the PID function for direct acting systems. An increase

in the feedback variable will cause a decrease in motor
speed.
REVERSE
Enables the PID function for reverse acting systems. An

increase in the feedback variable will cause an increase in
motor speed.
NOTE: The REVERSE selection is not used to compensate for reverse acting feedback
devices. If a reverse acting feedback device is used, program Parameters 75 and 76
- FB @ MIN and FB @ MAX as described in Section 19.1 - FEEDBACK DEVICES.
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in REMOTE and AUTO mode, the drive will
operate in a CLOSED LOOP fashion, responding to the feedback signal in order
to maintain the process set point. In this case, the set point reference can be a
0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal, or the keypad. The SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE
indication in the CONTROL display will indicate VDC (0-10 VDC), IDC (4-20 mA),
or AKB (keypad), depending on the set point reference.
66
Table of Contents
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in LOCAL and AUTO mode, the drive will
also operate in a CLOSED LOOP fashion. However, in this case, the only set point
reference available is the keypad, and the SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indication
in the CONTROL display will indicate AKB.
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in MANUAL and LOCAL or REMOTE mode,
the drive will operate in an OPEN LOOP fashion, responding directly to speed
commands from the keypad only. The SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indication
in the CONTROL display will indicate MKB.
When PID is disabled, the drive will operate in an OPEN LOOP mode, responding
directly to speed commands from either the keypad (MANUAL mode) or an analog
input signal or preset speed (AUTO mode).
74
PID FB
(PID FEEDBACK SOURCE)
This parameter selects the terminal to be used for the feedback signal, and can be
set to TB-5A or TB-5B. TB-5A is used for 0-10 VDC signals, and TB-5B is used
for 4-20 mA signals.
NOTE: The MC1000 has only one analog input of each type, so the same type of
signal cannot be used for feedback and set point reference. For example, a 4-20
mA signal from a transducer could not be used as a feedback signal if the set point
is being controlled by a 4-20 mA signal from a PLC.
75
FB @ MIN
(MINIMUM FEEDBACK VALUE)
This parameter should be set to the value of the process variable that corresponds
to the minimum transducer feedback signal (0 VDC or 4 mA).
76
FB @ MAX
(MAXIMUM FEEDBACK VALUE)
This parameter should be set to the value of the process variable that corresponds
to the maximum transducer feedback signal (10 VDC or 20 mA).
NOTE: If a reverse acting feedback device is being used, FB @ MIN should be
set to the maximum process variable value, and FB @ MAX should be set to the
minimum process variable value.
77
P GAIN
(PROPORTIONAL GAIN)
This parameter setting represents the speed command output (in % of maximum
speed) that results from each 1% of error (1% of the feedback range; FB @ MAX
minus FB @ MIN).
Example: If P GAIN is programmed for 5%, and the error (difference between set
point and feedback) is 10%, the speed command output of the Proportional term is
50% (10 x 5 = 50) of maximum speed.
78
I GAIN
(INTEGRAL GAIN)
This parameter setting represents the ramp rate of the speed command output (in
% of maximum speed per second) that results from each 1% of error.
Example: If I GAIN is programmed for 0.5 seconds, and the error is 5%, the rate
of rise of the speed command output of the Integral term is 2.5% (0.5 x 5 = 2.5) of
maximum speed per second.
79
D GAIN
(DIFFERENTIAL GAIN)
This parameter setting represents the speed command output (in % of maximum
speed) that results from each 1% per second change in the error.
67
Table of Contents
Example: If D GAIN is programmed for 5 seconds, and the error is increasing
at 2% per second, the speed command output of the Differential term is
10% (5 x 2 = 10) of maximum speed.
NOTE: Differential gain is used as a shock-absorber to dampen overshoots in
fast-acting systems. However, it can be very sensitive to noise on the feedback
signal and to digitizing errors, so it must be used with caution.
80
PID ACC
(PID ACCEL/DECEL)
This parameter sets the acceleration and deceleration rate of the set point reference
into the PID unit. When the set point changes, this function will lter the input
to the PID unit by ramping the set point reference from the previous value to the
new value. This will help prevent overshoots that can occur when the PID control
attempts to respond to step changes in set point, resulting in smoother operation.
If PID ACC is set to 0.0 seconds, it is effectively disabled.
81
MIN ALRM
(PID MINIMUM ALARM)
This parameter setting represents the value that the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) must fall below to activate the
MIN ALARM output (see Parameters 52, 53, and 54).
82
MAX ALRM
(PID MAXIMUM ALARM)
This parameter setting represents the value that the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) must exceed to activate the
MAX ALARM output (see Parameters 52, 53, and 54).
NOTE 1: The MIN/MAX ALARM function can be used to start and stop the drive
based on the level of the speed reference signal or PID feedback signal. This is
done by wiring a 2-wire start/stop circuit through the drive's Form C relay or opencollector output, and setting the Form C relay or open-collector output for MIN/MAX
(see Parameters 52, 53, and 54). When the signal drops below the MIN ALARM
setting, the relay or open-collector output will de-energize, which opens the start
contact and stops the drive. When the signal is equal to or greater than the MIN
ALARM setting, the relay or open-collector output will energize, which closes the
start contact and starts the drive. The drive must be in REMOTE mode to use the
MIN/MAX function to start and stop the drive.
NOTE 2: When using the MIN and MAX ALARM functions in open-loop speed
mode (PID is disabled), parameter 74 - PID FB must still be set to match the speed
reference signal being used.
98
LANGUAGE
(LANGUAGE SELECTION)
The MC Series drive can support other languages with the addition of an optional
LANGUAGE EEPROM chip installed in socket U11 on the control board of the
drive. If the EEPROM is not present, the default language will be ENGLISH. Also,
this parameter is not affected when the parameters are reset using Parameter 65
- PROGRAM. Therefore, if a language other than ENGLISH is selected, it will
remain in effect after a RESET.
99
FAULT HISTORY
The FAULT HISTORY stores the previous eight fault conditions that caused the drive
to trip. The information stored here is view-only, it cannot be altered. The FAULT
HISTORY can be used to determine if there is a pattern, or trend, to the faults, which
may indicate a problem in the system. Refer to Section 19.0 - TROUBLESHOOTING
for more information on faults.
68
Table of Contents
The FAULT HISTORY indicates the number of the fault (number 1 is the most
recent fault), the fault message, and the status of the drive at the time of the fault.
An example is shown below:
FAULT
NUMBER
FAULT
MESSAGE
3 OVERLOAD
DRIVE
STATUS
RUN
In the example above, the third fault log is being viewed, which is an OVERLOAD
fault that occurred while the drive was in a RUN state
69
Table of Contents
19.0 MC1000 PID SET POINT CONTROL
PID Set point Control allows the MC1000 to maintain a process set point, such
as PSI or CFM, without using an external controller. When PID is activated, the
MC1000 will operate in a closed-loop fashion, automatically adjusting the motor
speed to maintain the set point.
PID set point control requires feedback from the process in order to compare the
process variable value to the set point. The difference between the process variable
value and the set point is called the error. The MC1000 will increase or decrease
the motor speed in an attempt to minimize the error. By constantly adjusting the
motor speed, the PID control will drive the process toward the set point. Refer to
the PID block diagram below:
P
SET
Error
Speed
Command
Motor
Process
Process Variable
Feedback (transducer)
19.1
FEEDBACK DEVICES
A transducer or transmitter is required to monitor the process variable and provide

feedback to the PID unit in order to compare the process variable feedback to
the set point. A transducer outputs a signal corresponding to a xed range of the
process variable. A transmitter provides offset and gain adjustments to allow the
output signal to be adjusted to correspond to different ranges of the process variable.
Typical output signals for transducers and transmitters are: 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
or 4-20 mA. The feedback device must be externally powered, as the drive does
not have a power supply for such devices. Program Parameter 74 - PID FB (PID
FEEDBACK SOURCE) for the appropriate terminal (TB-5A or TB-5B), and connect
the feedback device as described below:
POT
The positive signal wire (wiper) is connected to TB-5A, and the

high lead is connected to TB-6.
0-5, 0-10 VDC
Connect the positive signal wire to TB-5A.
4-20 mA
Connect the positive signal wire to TB-5B.
The common, or negative signal wire, is connected to TB-2 (circuit common).

Feedback devices can be direct or reverse acting. A direct acting device outputs
a signal that increases as the process variable increases. A reverse acting device
outputs a signal that decreases as the process variable increases. The programming
of Parameters 75 - FB @ MIN and 76 - FB @ MAX depend on the type of feedback
device being used.
When using a direct acting transducer, Parameter 75 - FB @ MIN should be set to
the value of the process variable feedback corresponding to the minimum feedback
signal (0 VDC or 4 mA), and Parameter 76 - FB @ MAX should be set to the value
of the process variable feedback corresponding to the maximum feedback signal
(5 or 10 VDC, or 20 mA).
70
Table of Contents
Example 1: A 0-100 psi transducer outputs a 4 mA signal at 0 psi and 20 mA at
100 psi. Program Parameter 75 to 0.0 PSI, and Parameter 76 to 100.0 PSI (This
assumes that Parameter 31 - UNITS is set to pid PSI, and Parameter 33 - UNITS
DP is set to XXX.X).
For a reverse acting transducer, set Parameter 75 - FB @ MIN to the maximum
process variable feedback value, and set Parameter 76 - FB @ MAX to the minimum
process variable feedback value. In other words, Parameter 75 is set higher than
Parameter 76. See the example below:
Example 2: A 0-100 psi transducer outputs a 20 mA signal at 0 psi and 4 mA at
100 psi. Program Parameter 75 to 100.0 PSI, and Parameter 76 to 0.0 PSI (This
assumes that Parameter 31 - UNITS is set to pid PSI, and Parameter 33 - UNITS
DP is set to XXX.X).
19.2
THE SYSTEM - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING
The entire system can also be direct or reverse acting. In a direct acting system,
an increase in motor speed causes an increase in the process variable. This is
equivalent to requiring an increase in motor speed in response to a decreasing
process variable feedback.
In a reverse acting system, an increase in motor speed causes a decrease in the
process variable. This is equivalent to requiring an increase in motor speed in
response to an increasing process variable feedback. Examples of direct and
reverse acting systems are described in the next section.
19.3
PID CONTROL - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING
The PID Set point Control software can be direct or reverse acting, and must be
set to match the system. This is accomplished with Parameter 70 - PID MODE.
When set to NORMAL (for direct acting systems), the PID unit will command an
increase in motor speed if the process variable feedback decreases, and a decrease
in motor speed if the process variable feedback increases. When set to REVERSE
(for reverse acting systems), the opposite is true.
NOTE: The REVERSE setting for Parameter 70 - PID MODE is not used to
compensate for reverse acting feedback devices. If a reverse acting feedback device
is used, program Parameters 75 and 76 as described above.
An example of a direct acting system is one that maintains duct pressure. Duct
pressure is the process variable that is monitored by the feedback device. As duct
pressure rises, motor speed needs to be decreased to maintain the pressure. A
direct acting PID control will command a decrease in motor speed in response to
an increasing process variable feedback.
An example of a reverse acting system is one that maintains water temperature in
a cooling tower. Water temperature is the process variable that is monitored by the
feedback device. As the water temperature rises, motor speed needs to be increased
to lower the temperature of the water. A reverse acting PID control will command an
increase in motor speed in response to an increasing process variable feedback.
71
Table of Contents
19.4
SET POINT REFERENCE SOURCES
The set point reference input can be one of the following:

1. Keypad
2. 4-20 mA signal at TB-5B
3. 0-10 VDC signal at TB-5A
4. Potentiometer signal at TB-5A
In order to use TB-5A or TB-5B for a set point input, one of the terminals must be
programmed for the appropriate signal. Closing the TB-13 terminal to TB-2 will then
select that signal as the set point reference. If the contact closure is not made to
TB-2, the set point reference source will default to the keypad. See Parameters 47
- TB13A, 48 - TB13B, and 49 - TB13C.
Remote set point reference inputs at TB-5A and TB-5B can only be used if that
terminal is NOT being used for the process feedback signal from a transducer. The
MC1000 has only one analog input of each type, so the same type of signal cannot
be used for transducer feedback and set point reference. For example, a 4-20 mA
signal from a transducer could not be used as a feedback signal if the set point is
being controlled by a 4-20 mA signal from a PLC.
19.5
TUNING THE PID CONTROL
Once the PID control is set up correctly, it needs to be tuned in order to maintain the
process set point. First, set the Integral and Differential Gains to zero, and increase
the Proportional Gain (Parameter 77) until the system becomes unstable, then lower
the gain until the system stabilizes again. Set the Proportional Gain about 15% less
than that value that stabilizes the system. If only Proportional Gain is used, and
the system is operating in a steady-state condition (set point is xed and process
variable has settled to a xed value), there will always be a certain amount of error
in the system. This is called the steady-state error.
Integral Gain (Parameter 78) is used to force the steady-state error to zero by
increasing the output speed command with respect to time. Over time, the error
will be forced to zero because the Integral term will continue to change the speed
command, even after the Proportional term reaches steady state and no longer
affects the speed command. The Integral Gain affects the rate of rise of the output
speed command from the Integral term. Small amounts of Integral Gain can cause
large changes in PID performance, so care must be taken when adjusting Integral
Gain. Too much Integral Gain will result in overshoots, especially if large step
changes in error occur.
Typically, Proportional and Integral Gain are all that is needed to ne-tune the
system. However, it may be necessary to use Differential Gain (Parameter 79) to
further stabilize the system, especially when quick responses are required. The
Differential term responds to the rate of change of the error, not the actual error
itself. Differential Gain acts like a shock-absorber to dampen overshoots that can
occur when the PID tries to react quickly to changes in error or set point. This allows
fast PID response, with reduced risk of becoming unstable due to overshoots. The
Differential term is very sensitive to electrical noise on the feedback signal and to
digitizing errors, so it must be used with caution.
The other parameter setting that affects the response of the PID control is Parameter
80 - PID ACC. This sets the acceleration (and deceleration) rate of the set point
reference into the PID unit. When the set point changes, this function will lter the
input to the PID unit by ramping the set point reference from the previous value to the
new value. This will help prevent overshoots that can occur when the PID control
attempts to respond to step changes in set point, resulting in smoother operation.
If PID ACC is set to 0.0 seconds, it is effectively disabled.
72
Table of Contents
19.6
MC1000 DISPLAY IN PID MODE
When the drive is in PID mode, the DRIVE STATUS portion of the display will indicate
actual output frequency (in Hertz) instead of RUN, and the right side of the display
will indicate PID SET POINT, % LOAD, or PID FEEDBACK. The ENTER key is
used to toggle between the different displays. Examples of the possible displays
are shown below:
DRIVE
STATUS
PID
SET
42.53 HZ
35.0 PSI
PID
UNITS
DRIVE
STATUS
42.53 HZ
PERCENT
LOAD
57% LOAD
PID
FEEDBACK
DRIVE
STATUS
42.53 HZ
33.7 PSI
PID
UNITS
In the examples above, the drive is running at 42.53 Hz to maintain the PID SET
POINT of 35.0 psi. Pressing the ENTER key displays % LOAD, which is 57%.
Pressing ENTER again displays the PID FEEDBACK from the process, which is
33.7 psi.
When the PID SET POINT and PID FEEDBACK displays are entered, the display
will ash SET POINT or FEEDBACK before displaying the value to indicate which
display is being viewed.
73
Table of Contents
20.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
The table below lists the fault conditions that will cause the drive to shut down, as
well as some possible causes. Please contact the factory for more information on
troubleshooting faults.
NOTE: The drive will not automatically restart after a PWR SAG or a CONTROL
fault. Also, if an OUTPUT fault occurs below 1.5 Hz, the drive will only attempt
one restart, after a four minute delay. If unsuccessful, it will then trip into FAULT
LOCKOUT, which will require a manual reset. This is done to protect the drive in
case of a shorted motor.
FAULT MESSAGES
FAULT
OUTPUT
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Output transistor fault: Output cur- Phase to ground short.

rent exceeded 200% of drive rating. Phase to phase short.
FX or AC BOOST set too high.
Bad transistor module (IPM).
LO VOLTS
Low DC Bus Voltage fault: DC bus Low line voltage.

voltage below 60% of normal.
HI VOLTS
High DC Bus Voltage fault: DC bus High line voltage.

voltage above 120% of normal.
Overhauling load.
DECEL rate is set too fast.
HI TEMP
Temperature fault: Internal drive

temperature too high.
Ambient temperature too high.

Fan failure (if equipped).
OVERLOAD
Current Overload fault: Output cur- Drive undersized for the

rent rating exceeded for too long. application.
Problem with motor and/or driven
equipment.
PWR TRAN
Power Transient fault:

Low line voltage.
AC line dipped or sagged.
Power Sag fault: Control board

voltage is below tolerance.
Erratic AC line.
A new control board has been

installed that is different from the
previous version.
Perform a factory reset using

Parameter 65-PROGRAM.
This will update the software and
allow the fault to be reset
PWR SAG
LANGUAGE
Language fault: Selected language Defective language EEPROM.

not present
Language EEPROM (U11) removed after programming.
74
Table of Contents
FAULT MESSAGES
FAULT
DESCRIPTION
EXTERNAL
External fault: TB-13D is open or

closed to TB-2, depending on setting of Parameter 50 - TB13D.
Check setting of Parameter

50-TB 13D
Check devices wired between
TB13D and TB-2.
DB ERROR
Dynamic Brake fault: DB circuit

has sensed a resistor overload.
The DB duty cycle is too high,

causing the resistors to overheat.
CONTROL
Control Board fault: New software

has been installed that is different
from the previous version.
Perform a factory reset using

Parameter 65-PROGRAM.
This will update the software and
allow the fault to be reset.
INTERNAL
INTERN (#)
Internal fault: The microprocessor has sensed a problem.
Electrical noise on control wiring.

Defective microprocessor.
FOLLOWER
Loss of Follower fault: 4-20 mA

signal at TB-5B is below 2 mA.
Parameter 55 - TB5B LOSS is set

to FAULT.
Blank display or The power supply has shut down.

repeatedly ashes This can be the result of clogged or
failed heatsink fans.
TESTING
(drive will not run)
75
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Check heatsink fans (if equipped).

Clear any obstructions. If they are
not clogged, contact the AC Tech
Service Department.
Table of Contents
21.0 USER SETTING RECORD
PARAMETER MENU: USER SETTING RECORD
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
NAME
FACTORY
DEFAULT
LINE VOLTS
AUTO
SPEED #1
20.00 Hz
SPEED #2
20.00 Hz
SPEED #3
20.00 Hz
SPEED #4
20.00 Hz
SKIP #1
.00 Hz
SKIP #2
.00 Hz
BAND WID
1.00 Hz
ACCEL
30.0 SEC
DECEL
30.0 SEC
10
MIN FRQ
.50 Hz
11
MAX FRQ
60.00 Hz
12
DC BRAKE
.0 VDC
13
DC TIME
.0 SEC
14
DYN BRAKE
OFF
16
CURRENT
180 %
17
MOTOR OL
100%
18
BASE
60.00 Hz
19
FX BOOST
(NOTE 1)
20
AC BOOST
0.00%
21
SLIP CMP
0%
22
TORQUE
CONSTANT
23
CARRIER
2.5 kHz
NOTE 1: Refer to section 18.0 - description of parameters.
76
USER
SETTING
Table of Contents
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
NAME
FACTORY
DEFAULT
25
START
NORMAL
26
STOP
COAST
27
ROTATION
FORWARD
28
AUTO/MAN
BOTH
29
MANUAL
KEYPAD
30
CONTROL
LOCAL
31
UNITS
sp: HERTZ
32
HZ MULT
1.00
33
SPEED DP
XXXXX
34
LOAD MLT
100%
35
CONTRAST
MED
36
SLEEP TH
.00 Hz
37
SLEEP DL
30.0 SEC
38
SLEEP BW
0%
39
TB5 MIN
.00 Hz
40
TB5 MAX
60.00 Hz
41
AIN FLTR
0.02 SEC
42
TB10A OUT
NONE
43
@TB10A
60.00 Hz
44
TB10B OUT
NONE
45
@TB10B
125%
47
TB13A
NONE
48
TB13B
NONE
49
TB13C
NONE
50
TB13D
EXT FAULT
77
USER
SETTING
Table of Contents
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
NAME
FACTORY
DEFAULT
52
TB14 OUT
NONE
53
TB15 OUT
NONE
54
RELAY
NONE
55
TB5B LOSS
FAULT
57
SERIAL
DISABLE
58
ADDRESS
30
61
PASSWORD
0019
63
SOFTWARE
(N/A)
64
MONITOR
ON
65
PROGRAM
RESET 60
66
HISTORY
MAINTAIN
70
PID MODE
OFF
74
PID FB
TB-5A
75
FB @ MIN
0.00 %
76
FB @ MAX
100.00 %
77
P GAIN
5.00 %
78
I GAIN
0.0 SEC
79
D GAIN
0.0 SEC
80
PID ACC
30.0 SEC
81
MIN ALRM
0.0 %
82
MAX ALRM
0.0 %
98
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
99
FAULT HISTORY
(N/A)
78
USER
SETTING
Table of Contents
AC Technology Corporation
630 Douglas Street, Uxbridge MA 01569
Sales: 800 - 217 - 9100, FAX: 508 - 278 - 7873
Service: 508 - 278 - 9100 ext 125, FAX: 508 - 278 - 6620
www.actech.com
Document: M101T
7.0 Recommended Spare Parts

Stock Redler India Private Limited recommends purchasing and holding in reserve the following
replacement parts to reduce any downtime that might occur due to component failure. Having these
replacement parts on hand would allow for the equipment to return to operational status with minimal
downtime. For a price quote or to place an order, call the Parts Department at (080) 3040-3705/706/707
extension 650 or fax to (080) 3040-3708.
The quantities shown in the list below reflect spare parts required for one feeder conversion.
Description
Part No.
Qty.
DT_9 Controller
V000754.B09
Keyboard/Display Assembly
V000755.B09
Speed Sensor
FE11705
Variable Frequency Drive
V003033.B06
Motor
FE14364
Novmber 2013
7.0 Recommended Spare Parts

Novmber 2013

DT9 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DT9 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product User Manual

DT_9 Microprocessor Control

TENUGHAT VIDYUT NIGAM LIMITED

Customer: Apex Industrials

Revision 0 - November 2013

DT_9 Microprocessor Control and Variable Frequency Drive Feeder Conversion

TENUGHAT VIDYUT NIGAM LIMITED

(A Govt. of Jharkhand undertaking)

STOCK REDLER INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED

P.O NO. : AI/3133/13

SRIPL JOB NO.: 1272

SRIPLs Document No. 1272-0000

PREPARED & CHECKED

REVIEWED (QA & QC)

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Stock Redler India Private Limited

How to Use this Manual

Stock Redler India Private Limited

Electrostatic Sensitive Devices

Disconnect power at the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker.

Stock Redler India Private Limited

DT_9 Operation & Maintenance

Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists

Electrical/Electronic Drawings and Parts Lists

Recommended Spare Parts

Stock Redler India Private Limited

Stock Redler India Private Limited

2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance

Stock Redler India Private Limited

The conversion consists of the following:

Remote Power Cabinet With DT_9 Microprocessor assembly

Feeder Integral Cabinet Assembly

VFD Motor 7.5HP Upgrade Kit with Dual Tacho

Motor , Loadcell And Calibration Field Cable

Stock Redler India Private Limited

DT_9 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL CABINET INSTALLATION

If provided, close the feeder discharge valve.

Open all feeder side and end access doors.

2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance

Stock Redler India Private Limited

VFD CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION

ELECTRICAL CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION

Disconnect power at the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker.

Stock Redler India Private Limited

Refer to Section 2.0, D T _ 9 Operation and Maintenance for programming and

2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance

Stock Redler India Private Limited

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Stock Redler India Private Limited

2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance

2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintaenance

DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF

2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance

Stock Redler India Private Limited

24 hour Emergency Support

(origin: 9007199363029899 V2)

Stock Redler India Private Limited

About This Manual ...................................................................................................................................... 1

Stock Redler India Private Limited

Operation Using the 196NT Display .......................................................................................................... 47

8 Operation Using EasyServe ...................................................................................................................... 49

Stock Redler India Private Limited